Konica Minolta ineo 220 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

Search Results: 1 - 50 of 56 

Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide German ineo+ 220/280/360 User´s Guides 2-1-1 2010-04-13
User`s Guide English ineo+ 220/280/360 User´s Guides 2-1-0 2010-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 220/280/360 User´s Guides 2-1-1 2010-04-13
User`s Guide French ineo+ 220/280/360 User´s Guides 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Hungarian ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 1-1-1 2009-08-20
Quick Guide Turkish ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 1-1-1 2009-08-20
Quick Guide Czech ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 1-1-1 2009-08-20
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 220/280/360 User´s Guides 2-1-1 2010-04-13
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 220/280/360 User´s Guides 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Czech ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Danish ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide German ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Greek ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide English ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-0 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Spanish ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide French ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Hungarian ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Italian ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Dutch ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Norwegian ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Polish ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Portuguese ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Russian ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Slovakian ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Swedish ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Turkish ineo+ 220/280/360 Quick Guide 2-1-1 2010-04-13
Quick Guide Czech ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Danish ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide German ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Greek ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide English ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-0 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Spanish ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide French ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Hungarian ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Italian ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Dutch ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Norwegian ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Polish ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Portuguese ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Russian ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Turkish ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-07
User`s Guide German ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 3-1-1 2010-09-07
User`s Guide English ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 3-1-0 2010-09-07
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 3-1-1 2010-09-07
User`s Guide French ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 3-1-1 2010-09-07
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 3-1-1 2010-09-07
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 3-1-1 2010-09-07
Quick Guide Slovakian ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-08
Quick Guide Swedish ineo+ 220/280/360 - Quick Guide 3-1-1 2010-09-08
User`s Guide German ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 4-1-1 2010-10-01

Search Results:  51 - 56 of 56

Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 4-1-1 2010-10-01
User`s Guide French ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 4-1-1 2010-10-01
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 4-1-1 2010-10-01
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 4-1-1 2010-10-01
User`s Guide English ineo+ 220/280/360 - User's Guides 4-1-0 2010-10-05
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo+ 220, ineo+ 280, ineo+ 360 i6 2011-09-15

 

 

 

 

 

 

Autres documentations et logiciels Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-12-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-s-Guide-ColorCentro-IC-601-Ver1.0-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-11-Manuels

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 20:31  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-D-162..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  5.3M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:15  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:14  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:13  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:12  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:11  5.8M  

[TXT]

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:10  3.5M

Konica-Minolta-IC-305-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-1600W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C280-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C220-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350EN-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-2550-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-200-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C253P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-C252-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-600-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-8-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-C252-2-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C451-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Konica-Minolta-FAX-1610-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-600-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C280-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C353-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-1200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-451-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-750-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-5501-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-350-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160f-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-650-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-303-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Manuels

Konica-business-hub-C284-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Italie-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CN5001Pro-Allemand-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-213-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1250-P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-550-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-D131F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C30P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-ineo-283-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-654-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-165-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-160f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C5501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-421-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-500-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Cabinet-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-AU-201-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CF2001-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub423SeriesAdvancedFunctionOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35Printer_Copier_ScannerUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html

Box operations bizhub C252 Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome............................................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 What is an ENERGY STAR® product? .......................................... 1-4 1.3 Trademarks and registered trademarks......................................... 1-5 License information........................................................................ 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.4 About this manual............................................................................. 1-9 Structure of the manual ................................................................. 1-9 Notation........................................................................................ 1-10 Screens, windows and dialog boxes ........................................... 1-10 1.5 Explanation of manual conventions.............................................. 1-11 Safety advices.............................................................................. 1-11 Sequence of action ...................................................................... 1-11 Tips .............................................................................................. 1-12 Special text markings................................................................... 1-12 1.6 User manuals .................................................................................. 1-13 User manual [Copy Operations]................................................... 1-13 User manual [Network Scanner Operations]................................ 1-13 User manual [Box Operations] ............................. 1-13 User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] .................................. 1-13 User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] ............................... 1-13 User manual [Network Facsimile Operations].............................. 1-13 User manual [Print Operations] .................................................... 1-14 2 Overview of the box functions 2.1 Box functions .................................................................................... 2-3 Types of boxes............................................................................... 2-4 2.2 Available box functions.................................................................... 2-5 Saving documents ......................................................................... 2-5 Moving/copying box documents ................................................... 2-5 Changing a document name.......................................................... 2-5 Deleting a document...................................................................... 2-5 Changing settings .......................................................................... 2-5 Printing a document....................................................................... 2-5 Transmitting a document ............................................................... 2-6 Faxing a document ........................................................................ 2-6 Contents-2 bizhub C252 2.3 Specifying settings for using the box functions ............................. 2-7 Registering and specifying settings for boxes................................ 2-7 3 Saving documents 3.1 Information on saving documents ................................................... 3-3 User authentication......................................................................... 3-3 Registering boxes ........................................................................... 3-5 Naming documents......................................................................... 3-6 3.2 Saving copies in boxes ..................................................................... 3-7 Settings that can be saved and changed ....................................... 3-7 Saving copy documents ................................................................. 3-8 3.3 Saving scans in boxes..................................................................... 3-11 Using a box destination ................................................................ 3-11 To save data to a box destination ................................................ 3-13 To save data to the specified box ................................................ 3-15 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4.1 Displaying the box mode screen...................................................... 4-3 Viewing documents saved in boxes ............................................... 4-3 Searching for a box name............................................................... 4-5 4.2 Deleting document data ................................................................... 4-6 To delete data................................................................................. 4-6 4.3 Changing the document name......................................................... 4-7 To change the document name...................................................... 4-7 4.4 Moving document data ..................................................................... 4-8 To move a document...................................................................... 4-8 4.5 Copying document data.................................................................. 4-10 To copy a document..................................................................... 4-10 4.6 Printing document data .................................................................. 4-12 To print a document ..................................................................... 4-14 To change the number of copies.................................................. 4-15 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing ............................. 4-16 Specifying finishing settings ......................................................... 4-17 To specify the finishing settings ................................................... 4-18 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) ......... 4-20 Adding a binding margin............................................................... 4-21 To specify the page margin settings............................................. 4-22 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) .............................. 4-23 To specify the cover mode settings.............................................. 4-24 bizhub C252 Contents-3 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) .............................. 4-26 To specify the “Date/Time” function ............................................ 4-27 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function).................................. 4-29 To specify the “Page #” function ................................................. 4-30 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)........... 4-33 To specify the “Set Numbering” function .................................... 4-34 4.7 Printing a proof copy...................................................................... 4-36 To print a proof copy ................................................................... 4-36 4.8 Combined printing.......................................................................... 4-38 To print a document..................................................................... 4-40 To change the number of copies ................................................. 4-42 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing ............................ 4-43 Specifying finishing settings ........................................................ 4-44 To specify the finishing settings................................................... 4-45 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function)......... 4-47 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) .............................. 4-48 To specify the “Date/Time” function ............................................ 4-49 Adding a binding margin.............................................................. 4-51 To specify the page margin settings............................................ 4-52 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)........... 4-53 To specify the “Set Numbering” function .................................... 4-54 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function).................................. 4-55 To specify the “Page #” function ................................................. 4-56 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5.1 Editing document data..................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Routing .............................................................................................. 5-4 Routing types................................................................................. 5-4 Transmission methods................................................................... 5-5 Available settings ........................................................................... 5-5 To route data.................................................................................. 5-6 5.3 Specifying destinations.................................................................... 5-7 To specify a program as the destination........................................ 5-7 To select a destination from a group ............................................. 5-9 To select a destination from the address book ........................... 5-11 Searching for a destination .......................................................... 5-13 To directly specify the e-mail destination .................................... 5-15 Directly specifying an FTP destination......................................... 5-17 To directly specify an FTP destination......................................... 5-18 Directly specifying an SMB destination ....................................... 5-20 To directly specify an SMB destination ....................................... 5-21 Contents-4 bizhub C252 5.4 Checking settings before routing .................................................. 5-23 Checking the document information ............................................ 5-23 To check information .................................................................... 5-24 Specifying the file format .............................................................. 5-26 To specify the file format .............................................................. 5-27 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6.1 Editing document data...................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Routing ............................................................................................... 6-4 Routing types.................................................................................. 6-4 Transmission methods.................................................................... 6-4 Available settings............................................................................ 6-5 To route data .................................................................................. 6-6 6.3 Specifying destinations..................................................................... 6-8 To specify a program as the destination ........................................ 6-8 To select a destination from a group ............................................ 6-10 To select a destination from the address book ............................ 6-12 Searching for a destination........................................................... 6-14 To directly specify the e-mail destination ..................................... 6-16 Directly specifying an FTP destination.......................................... 6-18 To directly specify an FTP destination.......................................... 6-19 Directly specifying an SMB destination ........................................ 6-21 To directly specify an SMB destination ........................................ 6-22 6.4 Checking settings before routing .................................................. 6-24 Checking the document information ............................................ 6-24 To check information .................................................................... 6-24 Changing the text ......................................................................... 6-26 To change the stamp elements .................................................... 6-27 7 Control panel settings 7.1 Specifying settings from the control panel..................................... 7-3 Utility mode parameters.................................................................. 7-3 Box permissions ............................................................................. 7-3 Additional information..................................................................... 7-4 7.2 Registering boxes.............................................................................. 7-5 Registering public/personal user boxes ......................................... 7-6 To register a box............................................................................. 7-7 7.3 Displaying the administrator setting screen................................. 7-10 To display the administrator setting screen.................................. 7-10 7.4 Specifying user box settings .......................................................... 7-12 To delete unused user boxes ....................................................... 7-12 bizhub C252 Contents-5 7.5 Specifying box administrator settings.......................................... 7-13 To specify the “User Box Admin. Setting” parameter ................. 7-14 7.6 Specifying HDD setting parameters ............................................. 7-16 To check the hard disk capacity .................................................. 7-17 To overwrite temporary data........................................................ 7-18 Overwrite all data ......................................................................... 7-22 To overwrite all data..................................................................... 7-23 To specify the hard disk locking password ................................. 7-25 To specify hard disk encryption................................................... 7-27 To format the hard disk................................................................ 7-30 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8.1 Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web Connection ............................................................................... 8-3 User mode...................................................................................... 8-3 Administrator mode ....................................................................... 8-4 8.2 Using PageScope Web Connection................................................ 8-5 System requirements ..................................................................... 8-5 Accessing PageScope Web Connection ....................................... 8-6 Structure of pages ......................................................................... 8-7 Web browser cache ....................................................................... 8-9 For Internet Explorer ...................................................................... 8-9 For Netscape Navigator ................................................................. 8-9 8.3 Logging on and logging off............................................................ 8-10 Logging off ................................................................................... 8-10 To log off ...................................................................................... 8-10 Logging on to user mode (public user) ........................................ 8-12 Logging on to user mode (registered user/box administrator) .... 8-14 To log on as a registered user/box administrator ........................ 8-14 Logging on to administrator mode............................................... 8-16 To log on to administrator mode.................................................. 8-16 8.4 Opening a box (User mode) ........................................................... 8-19 Opening boxes............................................................................. 8-19 To open a box .............................................................................. 8-21 Checking box information and downloading documents ............ 8-22 Changing the box settings ........................................................... 8-24 Deleting a box .............................................................................. 8-26 8.5 Creating boxes (User mode).......................................................... 8-27 To create a box ............................................................................ 8-29 Contents-6 bizhub C252 8.6 Opening a box (Administrator mode) ............................................ 8-30 Opening boxes.............................................................................. 8-30 To open a box............................................................................... 8-31 Changing the box settings............................................................ 8-32 Deleting a box............................................................................... 8-34 8.7 Creating boxes (Administrator mode) ........................................... 8-35 To create a box............................................................................. 8-35 8.8 Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode) ..... 8-36 9 Appendix 9.1 Error message list ............................................................................. 9-3 9.2 Entering text....................................................................................... 9-4 To type text ..................................................................................... 9-6 List of available characters ............................................................. 9-6 9.3 Glossary.............................................................................................. 9-7 9.4 Index ................................................................................................. 9-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-3 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for choosing a Konica Minolta digital electrophotographic copier. This User manual contains details on the operations required to use the Box functions of bizhub C252 and the precautions on their use. Carefully read this manual before using these functions. If software (such as PageScope Job Spooler, HDDTWAIN or PageScope Box Operator) other than that described in this User manual has been installed, data saved in a box can be used from a computer on the network. Since the operation differs for each software, refer to the manual for the corresponding software for details. After reading this User manual, store it in the designated holder. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and safely, carefully read the "Installation and Operation Precautions" in the User manual [Copy Operations] before using the machine. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub C252 1.2 Energy Star® As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR® product? An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-5 1.3 Trademarks and registered trademarks KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation. This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. License information This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub C252 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub C252 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-9 1.4 About this manual This user manual covers the bizhub C252 box functions. This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for product names, etc. This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of computers and the machine. For the operating procedures of Windows or Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the respective manuals. In addition, software, such as HDDTWAIN and PageScope Box Operator, which are used with the Box functions of this machine, are also available. Users of these software should refer to the corresponding manuals on the User Software CD-ROM. Structure of the manual This manual consists of the following chapters. Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Overview of the box functions Chapter 3 Saving documents Chapter 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box Chapter 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box Chapter 6 Routing a document from the system user box Chapter 7 Control panel settings Chapter 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection Chapter 9 Appendix 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub C252 Notation Screens, windows and dialog boxes The touch panel screens and PageScope Web Connection windows and dialog boxes that appear in this manual show a machine with optional ADF (automatic document feeder) DF-601 installed. Product name Notation in the manual bizhub C252 This machine, C252 Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP When the operating systems above are written together Windows 98/Me Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-11 1.5 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub C252 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-13 1.6 User manuals The following user manuals have been prepared for this machine. User manual [Copy Operations] This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating procedures for the various copy functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual [Network Scanner Operations] This manual contains details on specifying network settings for standard equipment and on operations for scanning functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network functions and for using Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB. User manual [Box Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the boxes. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the boxes on the hard disk. User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for faxing. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for fax functions when the fax kit is installed. User manual [Network Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for network faxing. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the network fax functions (Internet faxing, SIP faxing and IP address faxing). 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub C252 User manual [Print Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard built-in printer controller. - For details on the printing functions, refer to user manual (PDF file) on User Software CD-ROM. 2 Overview of the box functions Overview of the box functions 2 bizhub C252 2-3 2 Overview of the box functions 2.1 Box functions The Box functions allow document data to be saved on the machine’s internal hard disk and later printed. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying, received faxes, and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by e-mail, forwarded to an FTP site, or sent to a computer. If the Box functions are used, documents can easily be scanned repeatedly and the data can be saved on separate computers. 2 Overview of the box functions 2-4 bizhub C252 Types of boxes Various types of boxes are available for different uses. With this machine, 1,000 boxes can be created. The boxes can be given any number between 1 and 999,999,999. - Public/personal user boxes Two box types can be specified: "Public" and "Personal". Public user boxes can be used by all users. Access to the box can be controlled by specifying a password for the box. Personal user boxes can be used by certain individuals. If user authentication settings have been applied, the box can only be accessed by users that have logged on. - System user boxes These are boxes that were already set up when the machine was purchased. There are six types of system user boxes. For details on using the system user boxes, refer to the corresponding user manual. Box name Description Bulletin Board User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Documents can be saved in this box, which can be used like a bulletin board. Up to 10 additional boxes can be created within the bulletin board user box. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Polling TX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Data can be registered in this box for polling transmissions. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Secure Print User Box Confidential documents can be saved in this box. A password must be entered in order to access the document. Up to 200 documents can be saved. For details, refer to the User manual [Print Operations]. Memory RX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Received fax documents will be saved in this box when “Memory RX” is set to “ON”. When a fax that you do not wish to print out is received, it can be saved and printed when desired. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Annotation User Box This box is used when adding an image of the date/time or number to document data saved in Scan mode before routing it. For details on saving documents in annotation user boxes, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Re-TX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. A document that, even after redialing, could not be sent because the recipient’s line is busy is temporarily saved in this box. The saved document can later be sent to the same recipient. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Overview of the box functions 2 bizhub C252 2-5 2.2 Available box functions Saving documents Copies made using this machine, sent faxes, and scanned document data can all be saved in boxes. For details on saving using each function, refer to the pages indicated below or refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. For copy data, refer to "Saving copies in boxes" on page 3-7. For scan data, refer to "Saving scans in boxes" on page 3-11. Faxing: User manual [Facsimile Operations] Printing: User manual [Print Operations] Moving/copying box documents Document data saved in a box can be moved or copied to a different box. For details, refer to "Moving document data" on page 4-8 and "Copying document data" on page 4-10. Changing a document name The name given to document data can be changed. For details, refer to the "Changing the document name" on page 4-7. Deleting a document Data that has already been printed or is no longer needed can be deleted. For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6. Changing settings Before printing document data, settings can be specified, such as the finishing settings, the binding position and whether or not a cover sheet is added. For details, refer to "Printing document data" on page 4-12. Printing a document Document data saved in Copy mode or saved with the printer driver can be printed. Each document can be printed separately or up to 10 documents can be selected and printed together. This is called "combined printing". If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can also be printed. If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can also be printed. For details on printing, refer to "Printing document data" on page 4-12. For details on combined printing, refer to "Combined printing" on page 4-38. 2 Overview of the box functions 2-6 bizhub C252 Transmitting a document Document data saved in Scan mode can be sent as an e-mail attachment or to an FTP site or a shared folder on a computer. In addition, a fax document saved in a box can be routed. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Faxing a document Document data saved in Fax mode can be sent as a fax. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Overview of the box functions 2 bizhub C252 2-7 2.3 Specifying settings for using the box functions Before using the Box functions, the following settings should be specified. Registering and specifying settings for boxes Register the boxes where data will be saved. Boxes can be set up by using the machine’s touch panel or by using PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. ! Detail For registering and specifying settings for recipients, refer to the following sections. "Registering boxes" on page 7-5 "Opening a box (User mode)" on page 8-19 2 Overview of the box functions 2-8 bizhub C252 3 Saving documents Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-3 3 Saving documents 3.1 Information on saving documents Keep in mind the following information before saving documents. 2 Note For details on saving fax documents, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations] User authentication This machine can be set so that an account or user name and a password must be entered in order to use the machine. Contact the administrator for details on the account or user name for using the machine. With user authentication Type in the user name and password, and then press the [Access] key. 3 Saving documents 3-4 bizhub C252 With account track Type in the account name and password, and then press the [Access] key. 2 Note With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those that can be accessed by the user that is logged on. With account track, all boxes are considered shared boxes. If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-5 Registering boxes Before document data can be saved, a box must be created to save the data in. Up to 1,000 boxes can be created. Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single box. A total of 9,000 pages can be saved in all boxes. A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all boxes. There are public user boxes, which can be used by more than one person, and personal user boxes, which can be used only by a single person. For details on registering boxes, refer to "Registering boxes" on page 7-5 and "Opening a box (User mode)" on page 8-19. 3 Saving documents 3-6 bizhub C252 Naming documents Document data that is saved can be given a name. - The names can contain a maximum of 30 characters. - The names can also be changed after they are saved. - The names can be specified when the data is saved; however, if the data is saved without a name specified, a preset name is applied. - Names are created by combining the following elements. As an example, the document name "CKMBT_C25204102315230" is described. Element Description C This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved. C: Copy F: Fax S: Scan P: Printing KMBT_C252 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is "KMBT_C252". This name can be changed with the "Input Machine Address" parameter on the Administrator/Machine Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters can be specified. 04102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if the document is part of a series of scans. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name screen; however, it is added automatically as part of the name when the file is routed. Add this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the server to receive files, for example, when sending data by FTP. .JPG This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters do not appear in the Document Name screen; however, they are added automatically as part of the name when the file is routed. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-7 3.2 Saving copies in boxes Settings that can be saved and changed Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies, there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below. ! Detail The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603 and punch kit are installed. Function type Function Can be saved Can be set when printing Number of copies × o Paper tray selection o × Output tray selection o × Basic screen settings Color o × Paper o × Zoom o × Simplex/Duplex o o Fold & Staple o o Sort/Group o o Punch o o Staple o o Combine Originals Combine Originals o × Quality/Density Original Type o × Density o × Background Removal o × Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert o × Edit Color o × Page Margin o o Stamp o o 3 Saving documents 3-8 bizhub C252 Saving copy documents The following procedure describes how to save a copy document in a box. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Save in User Box]. A screen for selecting a box appears. 3 Select the box where the data is to be saved. Select the tab that contains the box where the data is to be saved, and then touch the button for the box. To specify a box number, touch [User Box #], and then type in the number of the box. The button for the selected box appears selected. ? Is a password required when saving data? % It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the box. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-9 4 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] under "Make copies also?". 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. 6 The default name appears beside "Document Name". – To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. 3 Saving documents 3-10 bizhub C252 8 Touch [OK]. The Copy mode screen appears again. If the function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected. 9 Specify the necessary copy settings. 10 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original glass. 11 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. – If "Yes" under "Make copies also?" was selected, the scanned document is copied and the document data is saved in the specified box. – If "No" under "Make copies also?" was selected, the scanned document data is saved in the specified box. 2 Note For details on the copy settings, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. For details on printing the document saved in a box, refer to "Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box" on page 4-3. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-11 3.3 Saving scans in boxes Scanned images can be saved in boxes. Box destinations can be registered in the address book, or a box destination can be specified directly. The following procedure describes how to specify a box as a destination and how to use the Direct Input tab. Using a box destination A destination where a box has been registered is called a "box destination". Box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated by "B" on their buttons. The following procedure describes how to save data to a specified box destination that has already been registered. 3 Saving documents 3-12 bizhub C252 2 Note If a box destination is used, the document is automatically saved with the default name. To specify whether or not the marks indicating the destination type are displayed, touch [2 User Setting] in the Utility screen, then [2 Display Setting], then [2 Scan Basic Screen Default Setting], and then specify a setting for the "Address Type Symbol Display" parameter. For details, refer to User manual [Copy Operations]. 2 Note E-mail destinations are indicated by "E", FTP destinations are indicated by "F", and SMB destinations are indicated by "S". Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-13 To save data to a box destination 1 Press the [Scan] key in the control panel. The Scan mode screen appears. 2 Touch [Address Book]. The registered destinations are displayed. 3 Touch the button for the box where the data is to be saved. ? Why is [LDAP Search] not displayed on the Address Book tab? % If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear on the Address Book tab. 4 Specify the necessary scan settings. 5 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original glass. 3 Saving documents 3-14 bizhub C252 6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. The document is scanned and the document data is saved. ! Detail For details on the scan settings, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-15 To save data to the specified box Specifying the box where the data is to be saved directly from the control panel is called "direct input". 1 Press the [Scan] key in the control panel. The Scan mode screen appears. 2 Touch [Direct Input]. ? Why is the Direct Input tab not displayed? % If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", the Direct Input tab does not appear. 3 Touch [Save in User Box]. A screen for selecting a box appears. 3 Saving documents 3-16 bizhub C252 4 Select the box where the data is to be saved. Select the tab that contains the box where the data is to be saved, and then touch the button for the box. To specify a box number, touch [User Box Number], and then type in the number of the box. The button for the selected box appears selected. ? Which box recipients can be specified for a single transmission? % Only one box recipient can be specified, but multiple e-mail and fax recipients can be specified. 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. 6 The default name appears beside "Document Name". – To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-17 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. 8 Touch [OK]. The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified box appears under "Broadcast Destinations". ? Why can’t the name of the document be changed after returning to the Direct Input tab? % To change the document name after returning to the Direct Input tab, touch [Document Name]. 9 Specify the necessary transmission settings. 10 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original glass. 11 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on the scan settings, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. 3 Saving documents 3-18 bizhub C252 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-3 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4.1 Displaying the box mode screen The documents that can be printed from a box are those that were saved in the box from Copy or Fax mode or during computer printing. 2 Reminder If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can also be printed. Viewing documents saved in boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in boxes. 1 Press the [Box] key in the control panel. 2 From the Public User Box tab or the Personal User Box tab, touch the button for the desired box. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-4 bizhub C252 ? Why does [Personal User Box] not appear? % The Personal User Box tab displays only boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication. 3 If a password has been set for the box, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – The list of documents saved in the box is displayed. 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a box user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that box is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-5 Searching for a box name The desired box can be searched for by its name. 1 From the screen containing a list of the boxes, touch [Search by Name]. 2 The boxes matching the box search text appear. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-6 bizhub C252 4.2 Deleting document data To delete data Data that has already been printed or is no longer needed can be deleted. 1 Select the document to be deleted. 2 Touch [Delete]. 3 Check the document information that appeared, and then touch [Yes] to delete the document. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-7 4.3 Changing the document name To change the document name The name of the saved document can be changed. 1 Select the document to be renamed. 2 Touch [Edit Name]. 3 The current name appears beside "Document Name". Type in the new name. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP or SMB server. Specify a document name according to the routing conditions of the destination server. The document name can also be changed when the document is sent. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-8 bizhub C252 4.4 Moving document data 2 Note A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected. To move a document Document data currently saved in a box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box. 1 Select the document to be moved. 2 Touch [Move/Copy]. 3 Under "Action", touch [Move]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-9 4 Touch the button for the box where the document is to be moved. ? Is a password required for moving data to a different box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a different box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 5 Check the settings, and then touch [OK]. The data is moved. 2 Note The date and time that the document is moved is recorded under "Time Stored". 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-10 bizhub C252 4.5 Copying document data 2 Note A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected. To copy a document Document data currently saved in a box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box. 1 Select the document to be copied. 2 Touch [Move/Copy]. 3 Under "Action", touch [Copy]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-11 4 Touch the button for the box where the document is to be copied. ? Is a password required for copying data to a different box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a different box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 5 Check the settings, and then touch [OK]. The data is copied into the selected box. 2 Note The date and time that the document is copied is recorded under "Time Stored". 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-12 bizhub C252 4.6 Printing document data A document saved in a box from Copy mode, Fax mode or during computer printing can be printed. When printing the document, additional settings, such as those for the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be specified. In addition, a proof copy can be printed as a sample before printing or multiple documents can be combined and printed. ! Detail For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy" on page 4-36. ! Detail For details on combining multiple documents for printing, refer to "Combined printing" on page 4-38. The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603 and punch kit are installed. 2 Note If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can be printed. If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed and data saved from Scan mode is being printed, [Cover Mode] cannot be selected in the Change Setting screen. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-13 2 Note Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is installed. Available functions Description Page reference # of Sets Specifies the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-15 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-16 Finishing Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be specified. p. 4-18 Fold & Staple Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. p. 4-20 Page Margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. p. 4-22 Cover Mode Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back. p. 4-24 Stamp The document can be printed with the date/time, page number or distribution number. p. 4-26 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-14 bizhub C252 To print a document 1 Select the document to be printed. 2 Touch [Print]. 3 Check the document information that appeared. To check detailed information, touch [ ] or [ ]. 4 To specify a setting, such as the number of copies, touch [Change Setting] under "Print". 5 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with "To change the number of copies" on page 4-42. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-15 To change the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. The number of copies can be set between 1 and 999. % Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-16 bizhub C252 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing Specify whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed. % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-17 Specifying finishing settings Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be specified. The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Sort Feeds out copies by sets. Group Feeds out copies by pages. Offset Separates the sets or pages of the copies. Staple Staples copies in the corner or at two locations. The stapling position can also be selected. Punch Punching holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-18 bizhub C252 To specify the finishing settings 1 Touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Sort] or [Group]. To separate the copies, touch [Offset]. 3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-19 4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position. – If the "Corner" Staple setting is selected – If the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-20 bizhub C252 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. 1 Touch [Fold & Staple]. 2 Touch [OK]. 2 Note "Sort" on the Finishing screen is also selected. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-21 Adding a binding margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. The following settings can be specified. Function Description Page Margin The binding margin can be added to the left side, right side or top of the page. The width of the binding margin can be set between 1/16 in and 3/4 in. If "Auto" is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 11 45/64" or less. If the document length is more than 11 45/64", a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-22 bizhub C252 To specify the page margin settings 1 Touch [Page Margin]. 2 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then touch [-] or [+] to specify the width of the binding margin. – The width of the binding margin can be set in 1/16 in increments. – To set the binding margin to 0 in, touch [None]. Only the binding position can be specified. 3 Touch [OK]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-23 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back. First, load the paper trays with the paper for the front cover page and the back cover page. The following settings can be specified. 2 Note If a setting for the "Cover Mode" function is to be specified when printing a copied document, either of the following conditions must be met when saving the document in a user box. A paper drawer is specified. A setting is selected for the "Cover Mode" function. Setting Description "Front (Copy)" under "Front Cover" The first page of the document is printed onto the paper for the front cover page. If "2-Sided" was selected, the second page of the document is printed onto the back of the front cover page. "Front (Blank)" under "Front Cover" A blank page is added as the first page of the document. "Back (Copy)" under "Back Cover" The last page of the document is printed onto the paper for the back cover page. If "2-Sided" was selected, the second to last page of the document is printed onto the back cover page. "Back (Blank)" under "Back Cover" A blank page is added as the last page of the document. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-24 bizhub C252 ! Detail Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is installed. To specify the cover mode settings 1 Touch [Cover Mode]. 2 Select the desired cover page format. 3 Specify the paper trays loaded with the paper for the front cover page and back cover page. Touch [Front Cover Paper] or [Back Cover Paper]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-25 4 Select the paper tray. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-26 bizhub C252 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings are available under "Pages". Item Description Date Type Select the format for the date. Time Type Select the format for the time. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The date/time is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The date/time is printed on all pages. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-27 To specify the “Date/Time” function 1 Touch [Stamp]. 2 Touch [Date/Time]. 3 Under "Date Type", select the format for the date. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-28 bizhub C252 4 Under "Time Type", select the format for the time. 5 Under "Pages", select the pages that the date/time is to be printed on. 6 To change the printing position, touch [Print Position]. 7 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 8 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-29 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function) Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings can be specified for printing on inserted pages. Item Description Start No. Specify the starting chapter and page numbers. Page No. Type Select the format for the page number. Insert Sheet Setting Select whether or not page numbers are printed on the inserted paper. Setting Description Cover Mode All Pages The page number is printed on all pages, including the front and back cover pages. Except for Front Cover The page number is not printed on the front cover page. Do Not Print Page # The page number is not printed on the front and back cover pages. Insert (Copy) Print Page # A copied insertion is counted as a page, and the page number is printed on it. Do Not Print Page # A copied insertion is counted as a page, but the page number is not printed on it. Skip the Page(s) A copied insertion is not counted as a page, but the page number is not printed on it. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print Page # A blank insertion is counted as a page, but the page number is not printed on it. Skip the Page(s) A blank insertion is not counted as a page, and the page number is not printed on it. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-30 bizhub C252 To specify the “Page #” function 1 Touch [Stamp]. 2 Touch [Page #]. 3 Under "Start No.", type in the starting page and chapter numbers. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-31 4 Under "Page No. Type", select the page number format. 5 If there are inserted pages, specify whether or not page numbers are printed on them. Touch [Insert Sheet Setting]. 6 Select how page numbers are printed on inserted pages, and then touch [OK]. 7 To change the printing position, touch [Print Position]. 8 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-32 bizhub C252 9 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 10 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. 2 Note The Chapter settings are applied only when "1-1, 1-2 ..." is selected under "Page No. Type". Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-33 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function) Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings can be selected as the pages to be printed on. Item Description Start Number Specify the starting distribution number. Text Color Select the text color for the distribution numbers. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The distribution number is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The distribution number is printed on all pages. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-34 bizhub C252 To specify the “Set Numbering” function 1 Touch [Stamp]. 2 Touch [Set Numbering]. 3 Under "Start Number", use the keypad to specify the starting number. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-35 4 Under "Text Color", select the desired color. 5 Under "Pages", select the pages that the distribution numbers are to be printed on. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-36 bizhub C252 4.7 Printing a proof copy The contents of the document can be checked. 2 Note A proof copy cannot be printed if multiple documents are selected. Print proof copies one document at a time. To print a proof copy 1 Select the document to be proofed. 2 Touch [Proof Print]. 3 Check the document information that appeared. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-37 4 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note Only the first page is printed. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-38 bizhub C252 4.8 Combined printing Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be printed together. Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified for the selected document. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to descriptions starting with "To change the number of copies" on page 4-42. ! Detail Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings specified cannot be combined and printed. Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is installed. The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603 and punch kit are installed. Available functions Description Page reference # of Sets Specifies the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-42 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-43 Finishing Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be specified. p. 4-45 Fold & Staple Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. p. 4-47 Page Margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. p. 4-52 Date/Time The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document. p. 4-49 Set Numbering Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. p. 4-54 Page # Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. p. 4-56 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-39 2 Note If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can be printed. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-40 bizhub C252 To print a document 1 Touch [Combine]. The list of documents appears. 2 Select the document to be printed. The selected document is highlighted, and its bind number appears on the right side. 3 Touch [Combine] in the lower-right corner. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-41 4 Check the document information that appeared. To check detailed information, touch [ ] or [ ]. 5 To specify a setting, such as the number of copies of each document, touch [Print]. 6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to descriptions starting with "To change the number of copies" on page 4-42. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-42 bizhub C252 To change the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. The number of copies can be set between 1 and 999. % Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-43 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing Specify whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed. % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-44 bizhub C252 Specifying finishing settings Select whether or not the copies are separated. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can be specified. The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Offset Separates the sets or pages of the copies. Staple Staples copies in the corner or at two locations. The stapling position can also be selected. Punch Punching holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-45 To specify the finishing settings 1 Touch [Finishing]. 2 To separate the copies, touch [Offset]. 3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-46 bizhub C252 4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position. – If the "Corner" Staple setting is selected – If the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-47 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. 1 Touch [Fold & Staple]. 2 Touch [OK]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-48 bizhub C252 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings are available under "Pages". Item Description Date Type Select the format for the date. Time Type Select the format for the time. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The date/time is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The date/time is printed on all pages. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-49 To specify the “Date/Time” function 1 Touch [Date/Time]. 2 Under "Date Type", select the format for the date. 3 Under "Time Type", select the format for the time. 4 Under "Pages", select the pages that the date/time is to be printed on. 5 To specify the printing position, touch [Print Position]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-50 bizhub C252 6 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 7 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-51 Adding a binding margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. The following settings can be specified. Function Description Page Margin The binding margin can be added to the left side, right side or top of the page. The width of the binding margin can be set between 1/16 in and 3/4 in. If "Auto" is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 11 45/64" or less. If the document length is more than 11 45/64", a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-52 bizhub C252 To specify the page margin settings 1 Touch [Page Margin]. 2 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then touch [-] or [+] to specify the width of the binding margin. – The width of the binding margin can be set in 1/16 in increments. – To set the binding margin to 0 in, touch [None]. Only the binding position can be specified. 3 Touch [OK]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-53 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function) Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings can be selected as the pages to be printed on. Item Description Start Number Specify the starting distribution number. Text Color Select the text color for the distribution numbers. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The distribution number is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The distribution number is printed on all pages. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-54 bizhub C252 To specify the “Set Numbering” function 1 Touch [Set Numbering]. 2 Under "Start Number", use the keypad to specify the starting number. 3 Under "Text Color", select the desired color. 4 Under "Pages", select the pages that the distribution numbers are to be printed on. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-55 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function) Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. Item Description Start No. Specify the starting chapter and page numbers. Page No. Type Select the format for the page number. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-56 bizhub C252 To specify the “Page #” function 1 Touch [Page #]. 2 Under "Start No.", type in the starting page and chapter numbers. 3 Under "Page No. Type", select the desired page number format. 4 To specify the printing position, touch [Print Position]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-57 5 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 6 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. 2 Note The Chapter settings are applied only when "1-1, 1-2 ..." is selected under "Page No. Type". 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-58 bizhub C252 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-3 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5.1 Editing document data From the Route tab, document data can be edited in addition to being routed. Function Description Delete Data that has already been sent or is no longer needed can be deleted. For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6. Edit Name The name of the saved document can be changed. For details, refer to "Changing the document name" on page 4-7. Move/Copy Document data currently saved in a box can be moved or copied to a different public user box/personal user box. For details on moving document data, refer to "Moving document data" on page 4-8. For details on copying document data, refer to "Copying document data" on page 4-10. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-4 bizhub C252 5.2 Routing Document data saved in a box from Scan mode or Fax mode can be sent via the network. The data can easily be routed by simply registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers. 2 Note Data saved from Fax mode can be sent with the fax image resolution. Routing types Document data saved in boxes can be routed in three different ways. Type Description E-Mail Direct Input Document data is sent as an e-mail attachment. File (FTP) Direct Input Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. File (SMB) Direct Input Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-5 Transmission methods Select one of the four routing methods according to the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. Available settings The following settings can be specified. Method Description Page reference Program Multiple preset routing types are programmed with this method. p. 5-7 Group Multiple destinations can be registered with this method. This is convenient for always sending data to the same people. p. 5-9 Address book Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 5-11 Direct input With this method, destinations for email transmissions, FTP transmissions and SMB transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when routing data to a destination that is not already registered. E-mail transmission: p. 5-15 FTP transmission: p. 5-18 SMB transmission: p. 5-21 Setting Description Destinations Shows the destination number and number of destinations. Transmission method Select the desired method for specifying the destination. Document Info. Shows various information, such as the name, date and time that the transmission document was registered. File Type Select the format for the file that is to be transmitted. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-6 bizhub C252 To route data 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. A screen appears, allowing you to specify the destination. 2 Specify the destination by using the programs and groups. 3 If necessary, check the document information and specify the data format. 4 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note To change the print settings specified with a program, select the destination program, and then change the settings. If there are limitations on the document name due to the destination server conditions, it may not be possible to send the transmission. Contact your network administrator for information when specifying the document name during a transmission. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-7 5.3 Specifying destinations To specify a program as the destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Program]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-8 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the program where the data is to be sent. The button for the selected program appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-9 To select a destination from a group 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Group]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-10 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the group where the data is to be sent. The list of the addresses registered in the group appears. 4 Select the destinations. – To send the data to all addresses in the group, touch [Select All]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-11 To select a destination from the address book 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Address Book]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-12 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the destination where the data is to be sent. – The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to "Searching for a destination" on page 5-13. The button for the selected destination appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-13 Searching for a destination Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination. - Detail Search Type in the name of the destination or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. - LDAP Search Search the addresses registered in the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. To perform a Basic Search, type in the search text. To search with multiple conditions, perform a Advanced Search. For a basic search For an advanced search 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-14 bizhub C252 2 Reminder For details on an LDAP search and specifying settings for the LDAP server, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. An LDAP search is possible only if "Select from Address Book" was selected. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-15 To directly specify the e-mail destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [E-Mail Direct Input]. A screen appears, allowing an address to be entered. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-16 bizhub C252 3 Type in the e-mail address of the destination. To specify an additional address, touch [Next Dest.]. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be registered in Administrator mode. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-17 Directly specifying an FTP destination The following settings can be specified for the FTP destination. To specify more advanced FTP settings, touch [Detail Setting]. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Setting Description Port Number Shows the port number. PASV mode Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-18 bizhub C252 To directly specify an FTP destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (FTP) Direct Input]. The Scan to FTP screen appears. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-19 3 Type in the information for the FTP server. To specify an additional FTP server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-20 bizhub C252 Directly specifying an SMB destination The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Reference Click to check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-21 To directly specify an SMB destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (SMB) Direct Input]. The Scan to SMB screen appears. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-22 bizhub C252 3 Type in the destination information. To specify an additional SMB server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-23 5.4 Checking settings before routing Checking the document information The following document information can be checked. Item Description Time Stored Shows the date and time that the data was saved. Job No. Shows the number of the registered job. User Name Shows the name of the user that saved the data. Document Name Shows the name of the document. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-24 bizhub C252 To check information 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Document Info.]. The Document Info. screen appears. Touch [ ] or [ ] to display the next screen of document information. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-25 3 Touch [OK]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-26 bizhub C252 Specifying the file format Data can be routed in the following file formats. In addition, there are settings for specifying how much of the saved data is converted. The encryption level can be selected if "File Type" was set to "PDF" or "Compact PDF". Settings can be specified for the following. Format Description PDF Sends data in the PDF format. TIFF Sends data in the TIFF format. JPEG Sends data in the JPEG format. Compact PDF Sends data in the compact PDF format. Setting Description Single Page A single file is created for each page of the document. Multi-Page A single file is created from the entire document. Item Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password twice. Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password twice. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-27 To specify the file format 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File Type]. 3 Select the format of the file to be sent and select the scan setting. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-28 bizhub C252 4 If "PDF" or "Compact PDF" was selected, touch [Encrypt]. 5 Specify the encryption settings. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-3 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6.1 Editing document data From the Route tab, document data can be edited in addition to being routed. ! Detail For details on creating annotation user boxes and saving documents in them, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Function Description Delete Data that has already been sent or is no longer needed can be deleted. For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6. Edit Name The name of the saved document can be changed. For details, refer to "Changing the document name" on page 4-7. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-4 bizhub C252 6.2 Routing Document data saved in an Annotation User box from Scan mode can be sent via the network. The data can easily be routed by simply registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers. Routing types Document data saved in Annotation User boxes can be routed in three different ways. Transmission methods Select one of the four routing methods according to the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. Type Description E-Mail Direct Input Document data is sent as an e-mail attachment. File (FTP) Direct Input Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. File (SMB) Direct Input Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. Method Description Page Reference Program Multiple preset routing types are programmed with this method. p. 6-8 Group Multiple destinations can be registered with this method. This is convenient for always sending data to the same people. p. 6-10 Address book Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 6-12 Direct input With this method, destinations for email transmissions, FTP transmissions and SMB transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when routing data to a destination that is not already registered. E-mail transmission: p. 6-16 FTP transmission: p. 6-19 SMB transmission: p. 6-22 Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-5 Available settings The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Destinations Shows the destination number and number of destinations. Transmission method Select the desired method for specifying the destination. Document Info. Shows various information, such as the name, date and time that the transmission document was registered. Edit Stamp Elements Specify the text to be printed. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-6 bizhub C252 To route data 1 On the System User Box tab, touch [Annotation User Box]. – The Annotation User boxes can also be used from the Public User Box screen. For details on using the boxes from the Public User Box screen, refer to "Routing" on page 5-4. 2 Select the annotation user box. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-7 3 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. A screen appears, allowing you to specify the destination. 4 Specify the destination by using the programs and groups. 5 If necessary, check the document information and specify the text. 6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note To change the print settings specified with a program, select the destination program, and then change the settings. If there are limitations on the document name due to the destination server conditions, it may not be possible to send the transmission. Contact your network administrator for information when specifying the document name during a transmission. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-8 bizhub C252 6.3 Specifying destinations To specify a program as the destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Program]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-9 3 Touch the button for the program where the data is to be sent. The button for the selected program appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-10 bizhub C252 To select a destination from a group 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Group]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-11 3 Touch the button for the group where the data is to be sent. The list of the addresses registered in the group appears. 4 Select the destinations. – To send the data to all addresses in the group, touch [Select All]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-12 bizhub C252 To select a destination from the address book 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Address Book]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-13 3 Touch the button for the destination where the data is to be sent. – The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to "Searching for a destination" on page 5-13. The button for the selected destination appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear. An LDAP search is possible only if "Select from Address Book" was selected. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-14 bizhub C252 Searching for a destination Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination. - Detail Search Type in the name of the destination or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. - LDAP Search Search the addresses registered in the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. To perform a Basic Search, type in the search text. To search with multiple conditions, perform a Advanced Search. For a basic search For an advanced search Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-15 2 Reminder For details on an LDAP search and specifying settings for the LDAP server, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-16 bizhub C252 To directly specify the e-mail destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [E-Mail Direct Input]. A screen appears, allowing an address to be entered. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-17 3 Type in the e-mail address of the destination. To specify an additional address, touch [Next Dest.]. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be registered in Administrator mode. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-18 bizhub C252 Directly specifying an FTP destination The following settings can be specified for the FTP destination. To specify more advanced FTP settings, touch [Detail Setting]. 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Setting Description Port Number Shows the port number. PASV mode Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-19 To directly specify an FTP destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (FTP) Direct Input]. The Scan to FTP screen appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-20 bizhub C252 3 Type in the information for the FTP server. To specify an additional FTP server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-21 Directly specifying an SMB destination The following settings can be specified. 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Reference Click to check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-22 bizhub C252 To directly specify an SMB destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (SMB) Direct Input]. The Scan to SMB screen appears. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-23 3 Type in the destination information. To specify an additional SMB server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-24 bizhub C252 6.4 Checking settings before routing Checking the document information The following document information can be checked. 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. To check information 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. Item Description Time Stored Shows the date and time that the data was saved. Job No. Shows the number of the registered job. User Name Shows the name of the user that saved the data. Document Name Shows the name of the document. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-25 2 Touch [Document Info.]. The Document Info. screen appears. Touch [ ] or [ ] to display the next screen of document information. 3 Touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-26 bizhub C252 Changing the text Previously specified text or the count is set for annotation user boxes. This information can be changed while printing. Settings can be specified for the following. Item Description Secondery Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed. Density Select the density for the numbers that are printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the numbers that are printed. Print Position Select the printing position. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-27 To change the stamp elements 1 Select the document, and then touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Edit Stamp Elements]. The Edit Stamp Elements screen appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-28 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the setting. – Touch [Secondary Field], type in the text to be added, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Date/Time], select the format for the date and time to be printed, and then touch [OK]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-29 – Touch [Density], touch the button for the desired text density, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Number Type], select the format for the numbering, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Print Position], select the printing position, and then touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-30 bizhub C252 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. 7 Control panel settings Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-3 7 Control panel settings 7.1 Specifying settings from the control panel Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for setting the Utility mode parameters for the Box functions. 2 Note For details on registering bulletin board user boxes, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. For details on registering annotation user boxes, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Utility mode parameters The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual. Box permissions Users of various levels can access this machine. Other than machine administrators, box administrators can use Box functions. The following types of users can access boxes. User types Parameter Description Page reference One-Touch Registration New boxes can be created. p. 7-5 Administrator Setting Specify settings for managing the boxes. p. 7-10 p. 7-12 p. 7-13 p. 7-16 Type Description Public user Users for accessing when user authentication settings have not been applied Registered user Users registered by the administrator when user authentication settings have been applied Box administrator Users that can access User mode as a box administrator when user authentication settings have been applied Administrator Administrator managing the machine 7 Control panel settings 7-4 bizhub C252 Additional information To log on to User mode as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user name and type the password specified in "Specifying box administrator settings" on page 7-13. Operations that can be performed *1 Only boxes created by the registered user *2 Box administrators and administrators can perform operations without entering the password, even if a password has been set for the box. 2 Reminder The following operations are performed from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to Chapter 8, "Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web Connection" on page 8-3. Operation Create boxes View/download/ delete documents Change box settings Delete boxes Box type Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user o × o × o × o × Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o Box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o*2 × × × o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-5 7.2 Registering boxes New boxes can be registered. The following types of boxes can be registered. 2 Note The mailbox transmission function can be specified for a box. If user authentication settings have been applied, be sure to type in the user name and password, and press the "Access" key. If authentication settings have not been applied, personal user boxes cannot be created. Type Description Public User Box Shared box that anyone can use Personal User Box Box for an individual that can only be accessed by users that have logged on if user authentication settings have been applied Bulletin Board User Box Bulletin box registered on the Bulletin Board User Box screen displayed from the System User Box tab For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Annotation User Box This box is used when adding an image of the date/time or number to document data saved in Scan mode before routing it. The type of text to be added can be specified during routing. Annotation user boxes are registered in Administrator mode. For details, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. 7 Control panel settings 7-6 bizhub C252 Registering public/personal user boxes The following information can be entered in each screen. 2 Note If user authentication is canceled after personal user boxes are created, the personal user boxes become public user boxes. 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. Item Description User Box No. Touch [User Box No.], and then use the keyboard to type in the user box number. Name Touch [Name], and then use the keyboard that appears to type in the user box name. Password Touch [Password], and then use the keyboard that appears to type in the password. Index Touch [Index], and then select the search characters. Type Touch [Public] or [Personal]. If [Personal] was selected, the owner name appears. To change the user, touch [Change Owner], and then select a different user. Auto Delete Document Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the box. Advanced Functions This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Select whether or not the confidential reception function is used with the box. To use the confidential reception function, type in the password for confidential reception. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-7 To register a box 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch Registration]. 3 Touch [3 User Box]. The User Box screen appears. 7 Control panel settings 7-8 bizhub C252 4 Touch [1 Public/Personal User Box]. 5 Touch [New]. The registration screen 1/2 appears. 6 Specify the desired box settings. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-9 7 Touch [Fwd.]. The registration screen 2/2 appears. 8 Specify the desired settings. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. The box is registered. 7 Control panel settings 7-10 bizhub C252 7.3 Displaying the administrator setting screen To display the administrator setting screen 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Setting]. – An item in the Utility mode menus can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "3 Administrator Setting", press the [3] key in the keypad. 3 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-11 4 The Administrator Setting screen appears. 2 Note If the optional fax kit is not installed, [8 Fax Setting] does not appear. To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and an incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. 7 Control panel settings 7-12 bizhub C252 7.4 Specifying user box settings Boxes that are no longer needed should be deleted. To delete unused user boxes Boxes containing no saved documents can be deleted as unused boxes. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [System Setting]. 2 In the System Setting screen, touch [0 User Box Setting]. 3 In the User Box Setting screen, touch [1 Delete Unused User Box]. 4 To delete the boxes, touch [Yes]. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-13 7.5 Specifying box administrator settings Select whether or not use by the box administrator is permitted. (The default setting is "Restrict".) When logging on as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user name in the user authentication screen, and then type in the password specified in step 5. Relationship with other settings - If "User Authentication" and "Account Track" are both set to "OFF", "Allow" cannot be selected. 2 Note For details on operations that can be performed by box administrators, refer to "Box permissions" on page 7-3. 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. 7 Control panel settings 7-14 bizhub C252 To specify the “User Box Admin. Setting” parameter 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [2 User Box Admin. Setting]. The User Box Admin. Setting screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If [Restrict] was selected, continue with step 4. – If [Allow] was selected, [Password] appears. Skip to step 5 to specify the password. (The default password is "PASSWORD".) 4 Touch [OK]. Use by the box administrator is restricted. This completes the procedure for restricting use by the box administrator. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-15 5 Touch [Password]. A screen appears, allowing the password for the box administrator to be specified. 6 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 7 Type in the password specified in step 6, and then touch [OK]. The password for the box administrator is specified and use by the box administrator is permitted. ! Detail For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4. 2 Note To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel]. 7 Control panel settings 7-16 bizhub C252 7.6 Specifying HDD setting parameters Various hard disk operations are available, such as those for erasing data from the hard disk and for checking the amount of free space on the hard disk. The following parameters are available. ! Detail The following data is erased when the hard disk is formatted. Program destinations Abbreviated destinations Authentication method settings User authentication settings Account track settings User boxes Box settings Documents in boxes Secure print user box settings Bulletin board user box settings Parameter Description Check HDD Capacity Displays the amount of hard disk space that is used and remaining Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Select either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the method for overwriting data on the hard disk. Select whether encrypting or overwriting is given priority when the security kit is installed. Overwrite All Data Overwrites all data HDD Lock Password Specifies the hard disk locking password HDD Encryption Setting Specify the setting for encrypting the data on the hard disk. A setting is required only when the security kit is installed. HDD Formatting Formats the hard disk. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-17 To check the hard disk capacity The amount of space on the hard disk can be checked. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [1 Check HDD Capacity]. The Check HDD Capacity screen appears. 4 Touch [Close]. The HDD Setting screen appears again. 7 Control panel settings 7-18 bizhub C252 To overwrite temporary data The setting for overwriting data on the hard disk can be specified. (The default setting is "Mode 1".) This machine destroys data by overwriting all data in the entire area where an image was stored when that image data on the hard disk is considered unnecessary. In addition, destroying the structure of data other than image data prevents the disclosure of the data in case the hard disk is stolen. Mode 1: Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2: Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with the letter "A" (0x61) % Verified 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [2 Temporary Data Overwrite Setting]. The Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen appears. If the security kit is not installed: If the security kit is installed: Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-19 4 Select the method for overwriting temporary data. – Select "Encryption Priority" when performing high-level security encryption processing. However, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk differs depending on whether "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" is selected. Normally, "Encryption Priority" is selected. – If "Overwrite Priority" is selected, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk is performed depending on whether "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" is selected. Select this setting when the format of the data written to the hard disk is considered important. – If the security kit is installed, select "Encryption Priority" or "Overwrite Priority". 5 Touch [OK]. – If "Encryption Priority" and "Overwrite Priority" was changed, continue with step 6. The mode for overwriting temporary data is specified. 7 Control panel settings 7-20 bizhub C252 6 If a message appears, asking whether to reformat the hard disk, touch [Yes]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [No]. 7 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. 8 When an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match, the Administrator Setting screen appears. In this screen, touch [HDD Format]. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-21 2 Reminder When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 2 Note In order to enable the setting specified in the Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen, "Overwrite Temporary Data" on the Security Details screen must be set to "ON". 7 Control panel settings 7-22 bizhub C252 Overwrite all data The machine can be set to overwrite all data on the hard disk. With this procedure, all information on this machine is erased. Before performing this operation, be sure to consult with your service representative. The methods for overwriting data are described below. Setting Description Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with random 1- byte numbers % Verified Mode 4 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 512 bytes of the specified data Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0xaa Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0xaa % Verified Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-23 To overwrite all data 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [3 Overwrite All Data]. The Overwrite All Data screen appears. 4 Select the desired method for overwriting data on the hard disk, and then click [Overwrite]. – The length of time to perform mode 1 is about 40 minutes. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to overwrite the data. 7 Control panel settings 7-24 bizhub C252 5 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes]. – To return to the Overwrite All Data screen without overwriting the data, touch [No]. The message "Overwriting all data was completed. Turn OFF main SW and ON" appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. The data on the hard disk is overwritten. 2 Reminder While the data is being overwritten, do not use the main power switch to turn the machine off and on. When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function normally. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-25 To specify the hard disk locking password The password for locking the hard disk can be specified. The hard disk locking password is extremely important in order to protect the data on the hard disk. Keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [4 HDD Lock Password]. – The Register HDD Lock Password screen appears. – If a hard disk locking password has already been specified, touch [6 HDD Lock Password] to display a screen that contains the current password. From the displayed screen, the password can be changed or the hard disk locking password can be canceled. 4 Type in the password (20 characters long), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 5 Type in the password specified in step 4, and then touch [OK]. The message "HDD password is registered. Turn main switch OFF and ON" appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. The hard disk locking password is set. 7 Control panel settings 7-26 bizhub C252 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. If the password is lost, significant restoration operations will be required for recovery. 2 Note Do not specify a password that is 20 times the same character. 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function normally. ! Detail For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4. 2 Note To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel]. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-27 To specify hard disk encryption If the security kit is installed, the machine can be set to encrypt the hard disk. The setting for the "HDD Encryption Setting" parameter must be specified by the machine’s administrator. [HDD Encryption Setting] appears when optional security kit SC-503 is installed. If the encryption key is specified or changed, data saved on the hard disk may no longer be available. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Encryption Setting]. The Register Encryption Key screen appears. 4 Type in the encryption key (20 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – The encryption key must contain 20 characters. – Do not specify an encryption key that is 20 times the same character. – Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that it will not be lost. The Register Encryption Key screen appears again. 7 Control panel settings 7-28 bizhub C252 5 Type the encryption key specified in step 4, and then touch [OK]. The message "Turn the main switch OFF and ON." appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen and use the main power switch to turn off the machine. – When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 7 Use the main power switch to turn on the machine. An error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match. 8 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – When an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match, the Administrator Setting screen appears. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-29 9 In the Encryption Key failure screen, touch [HDD Format]. – If [Reset Encryption Key] is touched, the Register Encryption Key screen appears. If authentication of the encryption key failed, specify the encryption key again. 10 Restart the machine. The hard disk is encrypted. 2 Reminder When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 7 Control panel settings 7-30 bizhub C252 To format the hard disk The hard disk can be formatted. When the hard disk is formatted, the data saved on the hard disk is erased. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [5 HDD Formatting]. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to format the hard disk. 4 To format the hard disk, touch [Yes]. – To return to the HDD Setting screen without formatting the hard disk, touch [No]. A screen appears, indicating that the hard disk is being formatted, and the hard disk is formatted. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-31 5 Restart the machine. The hard disk is formatted. 2 Reminder When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 7 Control panel settings 7-32 bizhub C252 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-3 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8.1 Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. When changing settings, operations such as typing text can be performed more easily from your computer. The following Box function settings can be specified. User mode The following settings can be specified by all users. 2 Note A password does not need to be entered when logged on as the box administrator. Only users logged on as a registered user can monitor or create private user boxes. Setting Description User Box tab Open User Box Operations, for example, to download or delete a saved document, can be performed after a box number and password have been specified. In addition, attributes, such as the box password and owner, can be changed. The following boxes can be opened. • Public/personal user boxes Create User Box The following boxes can be created. • Public/personal user boxes 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-4 bizhub C252 Administrator mode The following more advanced settings can be specified by the administrator. Setting Description User Box tab Open User Box Operations, for example, to download or delete a saved document, can be performed after a box number has been specified. In addition, attributes, such as the box password and owner, can be changed. The following boxes can be opened. • Public/personal user boxes Create User Box The following boxes can be created. • Public user boxes User Box Admin. Settings Whether or not box administrator settings have been specified can be viewed. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-5 8.2 Using PageScope Web Connection System requirements ! Detail PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details on the display formats, refer to "Logging on and logging off" on page 8-10. Item Operating environment Network Ethernet (TCP/IP protocol) Computer applications Compatible Web browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6 or later recommended (*) (JavaScript enabled and Cookie enabled), Netscape Navigator Ver.7.02 or later (JavaScript enabled and Cookie enabled) Macromedia® Flash® (plug-in version 7.0 or later required if “Flash” is selected as the display format) (*) If Internet Explorer Ver. 5.5 is being used, Microsoft XML parser MSXML3.X must be installed. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-6 bizhub C252 Accessing PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 In the Address bar, type the IP address of the this machine, and then press the [Enter] key. – http:/// Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Detail When SSL/TLS is enabled, the URL becomes: https:/// Even if "http://" is entered, the URL at "https://" is automatically accessed. 2 Note If user authentication is enabled, a page for entering the user name and password appears before you can operate the machine. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-7 Structure of pages The page that appears immediately after PageScope Web Connection is accessed is called the User mode page. This page appears after logging on to the application as a public user. The pages of PageScope Web Connection are constructed as shown below. ! Detail For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on and logging off" on page 8-10. 12 3 11 5 6 10 8 12 4 7 9 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-8 bizhub C252 No. Item Description 1 Konica Minolta logo Click the logo to go to the Konica Minolta Web site at the following URL. http://konicaminolta.com/ 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Click the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Logon mode The mode (public, registered user or administrator) of the user that is currently logged on is displayed. 4 [Logout] button Click to log off from the current mode. 5 Status display The statuses of this machine’s printer section and scanner section are displayed using icons. 6 Message display If an error occurred in the machine, the status of the malfunction/error and other error information are displayed. 7 Help The page specified in "Online Manual URL" is displayed. 8 Refresh button Click to update the displayed page. 9 Device name The name of the device currently being accessed is displayed. 10 Tabs Select the category of the page to be displayed. The following tabs are displayed in User mode. • System • Job • User Box • Print • Scan 11 Menus Information and settings for the selected tab are listed. The menu that appears differs depending on the tab that is selected. 12 Information and settings Details of the item selected from the menu are displayed. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-9 Web browser cache The newest information may not appear in the PageScope Web Connection pages because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, the following problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. 2 Note If the utility is used with the cache enabled and Administrator mode was timed out, the timeout page may appear even after the utility is accessed again. In addition, since the machine’s control panel remains locked and cannot be used, the machine must be restarted. In order to avoid this problem, disable the cache. 2 Note The menus and commands may vary depending on the Web browser version. For details, refer to Help for the Web browser. For Internet Explorer 1 On the "Tools" menu, click "Internet Options". 2 On the General tab, click [Settings] under "Temporary Internet files". 3 Select "Every visit to the page", and then click [OK]. For Netscape Navigator 1 On the "Edit" menu, click "Preferences". 2 In the "Category" box on the left side of the dialog box, click "Advanced", then "Cache". 3 Under "Compare the page in the cache to the page on the network:", select "Every time I view the page". 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-10 bizhub C252 8.3 Logging on and logging off When PageScope Web Connection is accessed, the page for a public user appears. In order to log on as a registered user or an administrator when user authentication is performed, it is necessary to log off first, then log on again. Logging off 2 Note When logged on, a timeout occurs and you will automatically be logged off if no operation is performed for a specified length of time. The timeout period for User mode and Administrator mode can be specified in the page that appears by clicking "Authentication (Network Tab)", then "Auto Logout" in Administrator mode. To log off 1 Click [Logout] at the upper left of the window. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-11 The user is logged off, and the Login page appears. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-12 bizhub C252 Logging on to user mode (public user) There are two procedures for logging on to User mode: one for a registered user and one for a public user. If user authentication is not performed, log on as a public user. 1 In the Login page, select "Public User". – If necessary, select the language and display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-13 2 Click [Login]. The User mode page appears. 2 Note If "Flash" is selected as the display format, the following will appear using the Flash feature. Flash Player is required to use the Flash feature. Status icons and messages Page display when "Input Tray" is selected in the menu below "Device Information" on the System tab Page display of the Job tab If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting "HTML" as the display format. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-14 bizhub C252 Logging on to user mode (registered user/box administrator) There are two procedures for logging on to User mode: one for a registered user and one for a public user. The following procedure describes how to perform user authentication and log on with a specific user name. 2 Note Click the icon to the right of the "User Name" box, and then select a user name from the list. To log on as a registered user/box administrator 1 In the Login page, type the user name and the password. – To log on as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user name and type the password specified in "Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode)" on page 8-36. – If necessary, select the language and display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-15 2 Click [Login]. The User mode page appears. 2 Note If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting “HTML” as the display format. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-16 bizhub C252 Logging on to administrator mode In order to specify system and network settings, log on to Administrator mode. 2 Note When logged on to Administrator mode, the control panel of this machine is locked and cannot be used. Depending on the status of the machine, you may not be able to log on to Administrator mode. To log on to administrator mode 1 In the Login page, select "Administrator". – If necessary, select the language and display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-17 2 Type in the password for the machine’s administrator, and then click [OK]. The administrator mode page appears. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-18 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and an incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting “HTML” as the display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-19 8.4 Opening a box (User mode) Files in boxes used with Box functions can be viewed, downloaded or deleted. Opening boxes The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes can be viewed. 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a box user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that box is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-20 bizhub C252 Open public/personal user box Public/personal user box list Item Description User Box No. Type in the number of the box to be opened. User Box Password Type in the password if a password has been set for the box. Item Description Page (Display by 50 cases) If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be displayed. Search from Index Displays the list of boxes according the index search characters selected when the box was created. Box list Displays the box number, box name, owner’s name and date/time that the box was created. appears beside boxes that have a password specified. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-21 To open a box 1 Select the box type, and then click [Next]. 2 In the "User Box No." box, type the box number. 3 In the "User Box Password" box, type the password. 4 Click [OK]. A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-22 bizhub C252 Checking box information and downloading documents The basic box information and the list of documents saved in the box can be viewed. In addition, documents can be deleted, downloaded, renamed or moved/copied. 2 Note The documents that can be downloaded are those saved in Scan mode. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-23 Box detail information Document list Item Description Refresh to the new information Click to display the most recent information. User Box No. Displays the number of the box. User Box Name Displays the name of the box. Index Displays the search characters for the box. Documentation Auto Delete Time Displays the length of time until documents are deleted from the box. [User Box Setting] button Click this button to specify basic box settings. [Delete User Box] button Click this button to delete the box. Item Description Document Name Displays the name of the document. Time Stored Displays the date/time that the document was registered. Click this icon to display detailed information for the document. Indicates documents that can be downloaded. Click this icon to download the document to a computer. Specify the type of data to be downloaded and the range of pages, and then click [OK]. Click this icon to delete the document. Click this icon to change the name of the document. Click this icon to move/copy the document to a different box. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-24 bizhub C252 Changing the box settings To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail Information page. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-25 When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and then click [Apply]. 2 Reminder The following appear with personal user boxes. User Box Owner is changed. User Box Type Owner Name Item Description User Box No. Displays the box number. This cannot be changed. User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters. Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to the "Main" group, select the check box. Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the box. User Box Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password for the box. Current Password Type in the current password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. New Password Type in the new password. Enter 8 or less numbers. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be used. Retype New Password Type in the new password again for confirmation. User Box Owner is changed. Select this check box to change the box type or the owner of the box. User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type. Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s name of 64 or less characters. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-26 bizhub C252 Deleting a box The currently open box can be deleted. 1 In the Box Detail Information page, click [Delete User Box]. 2 Check the displayed information, and then click [OK] to delete the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-27 8.5 Creating boxes (User mode) New boxes can be created. Specify settings for the following when creating new boxes. For public/personal boxes 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-28 bizhub C252 Item Description User Box No. Type in a box number between 1 and 999,999,999. Up to 1,000 boxes can be created. User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters. User Box Password Type in a password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be used. Retype User Box Password Type in the password again for confirmation. Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to the "Main" group, select the check box. User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type. Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s name of 64 or less characters. Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-29 To create a box 1 Select the type of box to be created, and then click [Next]. 2 Specify the necessary settings, and then click [Apply]. 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-30 bizhub C252 8.6 Opening a box (Administrator mode) When logged on to Administrator mode, the settings of boxes can be changed or the boxes can be deleted without the box password being entered. Opening boxes The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes can be viewed. Open public/private user box Public/personal user box list Item Description User Box No. Type in the number of the box to be opened. Item Description Page (Display by 50 cases) If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be displayed. Search from Index Displays the list of boxes according the index search characters selected when the box was created. Box list Displays the box number, box name, owner’s name and date/time that the box was created. appears beside boxes that have a password specified. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-31 To open a box 1 Select the box type, and then click [Next]. 2 In the "User Box No." box, type the box number. 3 Click [OK]. A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-32 bizhub C252 Changing the box settings To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail Information page. When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and then click [Apply]. Item Description User Box No. Displays the box number. This cannot be changed. User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters. Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to the "Main" group, select the check box. Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the box. User Box Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password for the box. New Password Type in the new password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be used. Retype New Password Type in the new password again for confirmation. User Box Owner is changed. Select this check box to change the box type or the owner of the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-33 2 Reminder The following appear with personal user boxes. User Box Owner is changed. User Box Type Owner Name 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type. Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s name of 64 or less characters. Item Description 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-34 bizhub C252 Deleting a box The currently open box can be deleted. 1 In the Box Detail Information page, click [Delete User Box]. 2 Check the displayed information, and then click [OK] to delete the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-35 8.7 Creating boxes (Administrator mode) New boxes can be created. Only shared boxes can be created in Administrator mode. To create a box 1 Select the type of box to be created, and then click [Next]. 2 Specify the necessary settings, and then click [Apply]. – For details on the settings, refer to "Creating boxes (User mode)" on page 8-27. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-36 bizhub C252 8.8 Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode) The box can be checked to see whether or not box administrator settings have been specified. ! Detail The box administrator can monitor documents in public and personal user boxes without a password. From the control panel of the machine or the Login page of PageScope Web Connection, log on with the ID "boxadmin", and then type in the specified password. 9 Appendix Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-3 9 Appendix 9.1 Error message list If any of the following error messages appear, perform the operations described below. Message Cause and remedy Cannot connect to the network. A connection to the network could not be established. Check if the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, check that the Network Setting parameters on the Administrator Setting screen have been correctly specified. The destination cannot be selected because the number of destinations has exceeded the max. number of broadcasting possible. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Image could not be saved in User Box due to insufficient capacity in HDD. Please check Job History. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the image. The number of User Box has reached its maximum. The number of user boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary user boxes, and then try registering new boxes. The number of documents in User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a user box has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try saving the document. The number of jobs has reached its maximum. Please wait until a job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job. 9 Appendix 9-4 bizhub C252 9.2 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered accounts and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen: Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size: Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-5 Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). 9 Appendix 9-6 bizhub C252 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. List of available characters space Alphanumeric characters/ symbols Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-7 9.3 Glossary Term Definition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering "anonymous" as the account name. Auto IP A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from the address space of 169.254.0.0. bit Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1. Bit-mapped Font Fonts that are represented by a set of dots to form the character. Dithering may occur if the character size is increased. BMP Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms. You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when saved. Byte Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Configured as 1 byte equals 8 bits. Compact PDF Compression method for reducing the data amount using the PDF format when converting color documents to data. The highest compression efficiency is achieved by identifying the text and image regions and using the resolution and compression method most appropriate for each region. The compact PDF format can be selected when converting documents to data using the scanning functions of this machine. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark variation is said to have a high contrast. Default The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is selected. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers not on the same LAN Density An indication of the amount of darkness in the image Density Adjustment The function that adjusts the color tones of an output device, such as a printer or monitor DHCP Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies the network settings from the server. With collective management of the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid duplication of an address and you can build a network easily. Dither A method of using only black and white to create the illusion of different shades of gray. The process is simpler than with error diffusion; however, some irregularities may occur. 9 Appendix 9-8 bizhub C252 DNS Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment. DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and understand IP addresses. DPI (dpi) Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet LAN transmission line standard File Extension The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file formats. The file extension is added after a period, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". FTP Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network. Gradation The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases, smoother brightness variations can be reproduced. Grayscale Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information from black to white Halftone The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image through varying sizes of black and white dots Hard Disk Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be stored even if the power is turned off. HTTP Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips can be exchanged with the expressive form information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers on to a computer IP Address A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devices, including computers, which are connected to the Internet. J2RE Abbreviation for Java 2 Runtime Environment. One type of JavaVirtual Machine (Java VM) in a program operating environment written in the object-oriented language Java, developed by Sun Microsystems. This is required to run applications that were created with Java. Java A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems that runs on most computers regardless of the installed hardware and operating system. However, in order to run Java applications, an operating environment called "Java Virtual Machine (Java VM)" is required. JPEG Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as photographs. Term Definition Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-9 Kerberos A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on the network. LAN Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/IP network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used to access a database for managing environment information and the email addresses of network users. Macromedia® Flash® Software developed by Macromedia, Inc. and used to create data combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a keyboard and a mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact, and they can be accessed with the Web browser plug-in. Memory Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is turned off the data may or may not be erased. Multi-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains multiple pages OS Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling the system of a computer. PASV Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, preventing the file from being sent. PDF Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically formatted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the Post- Script format, you can use the free Adobe Reader software to view documents. Pixel An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image. Plug-and-play Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a peripheral device is connected to a computer Port Number The number that identifies the transmission port for each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI Abbreviation for Pixels Per Inch. Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. This measurement indicates the number of image pixels contained within 1 inch. Preview A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print or scan job Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device Property Attribute information When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the file. Protocol The rules that allow computers to communicate with other computers or peripheral devices Term Definition 9 Appendix 9-10 bizhub C252 Proxy Server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections Resolution Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print matter correctly Scanning With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen Frequency Indicates the density of dots used to create the image Single-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains only a single page SMB Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft Windows. SSL/TLS Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web server and browser. Subnet Mask The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are higher than the IP address. TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP addresses to identify each network device. Thumbnail A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file (the image displayed when the file was opened) TIFF Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) Depending on the tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN The interface standard for imaging devices, such as scanners and digital cameras, and for applications, such as graphics software. In order to use a TWAIN-compliant device, the TWAIN driver is required. Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer USB Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer. Web Browser Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for viewing Web pages Term Definition Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-11 9.4 Index A Account name 3-3 Account track 3-3 Address book destination 5-11, 6-12 Administrator mode 8-4, 8-16 Administrator setting screen 7-10 Administrator settings 7-13 B Binding 4-20, 4-47 Binding margin 4-21, 4-51 Box administrator 8-14 Box administrator settings 7-13 Box destination 3-11 Box functions 2-5 Box mode screen 4-3 Box name search 4-5 Box registration 7-5 Box types 2-4 C Center binding 4-20, 4-47 Changing document names from machine 4-7 Checking document information from machine 5-23, 6-24 Checking routing information 5-23, 6-24 Combined printing 4-38 Compact PDF 5-26 Copy number 4-15, 4-42 Copying document data 4-10 Cover mode 4-23 Cover pages 4-23 Creating boxes 7-5 D Date 4-26, 4-48 Delete unused user box 7-12 Deleting document data 4-6 Destinations 3-11, 5-7, 5-9, 5-11, 5-15, 5-17, 5-20, 6-8, 6-10, 6-12, 6-16, 6-18, 6-21 Direct input 3-15 Document information check from machine 5-23, 6-24 Document name change from machine 4-7 Document viewing 4-3 Double-sided/single-sided printing 4-16, 4-43 E Editing document data 5-3 E-mail destination 5-15, 6-16 Entering text 9-4 F File format 5-26 File type 5-26 Finishing settings 4-17, 4-44 FTP destination 5-17, 6-18 G Glossary 9-7 Group destination 5-9, 6-10 H Hard disk capacity 7-17 Hard disk password 7-25 Hard disk settings 7-16 HDD settings 7-16 L Login 8-12, 8-14, 8-16 Logout 8-10 9 Appendix 9-12 bizhub C252 M Margin setting 4-22, 4-52 Moving document data 4-8 Multiple document printing 4-38 N Number of copies 4-15, 4-42 O Overwrite 7-18 Overwrite all data 7-22 Overwriting data 7-22 P Page # 4-29, 4-55 Page margin 4-22, 4-52 PageScope Web Connection 8-5 Password 3-3, 7-25 Personal user box 4-3, 5-3, 7-6 Printing document data 4-12 Printing document data from public user box/personal user box 4-3 Program destination 5-7, 6-8 Proof copy 4-36 Public user 8-12 Public user box 4-3, 5-3, 7-6 R Registered user 8-14 Registering boxes 7-5 Routing document data 5-6, 6-6 Routing document data from public user box/personal user box 5-3 Routing information check 6-24 Routing information check 5-23 Routing transmission methods 5-5, 6-4 Routing types 5-4, 6-4 S Sample copy 4-36 Saving copy documents 3-7 Saving document data to specified box 3-15 Saving scans 3-11 Searching for box names 4-5 Single-sided/double-sided printing 4-16, 4-43 SMB destination 5-20, 6-21 Stapling 4-20, 4-47 T Test print 4-36 Text entry 9-4 Time 4-26, 4-48 Transmission methods 5-5, 6-4 U User authentication 3-3 User box administrator setting 7-14 User manual/CD-ROM 1-13 User mode 8-3 User name 3-3 V Viewing document data 4-3 W Web browser cache Copy operations bizhub C252 Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction Energy Star®.................................................................................. 1-3 What is an ENERGY STAR® product? .......................................... 1-3 1.1 Trademarks and registered trademarks......................................... 1-4 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-5 1.2 Available features ............................................................................. 1-8 Selecting the print color ................................................................. 1-8 Automatically selecting the paper.................................................. 1-8 Adjusting copies to the size of the paper ...................................... 1-8 Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios ............... 1-8 Scanning the document in separate batches ................................ 1-8 Center binding................................................................................ 1-9 Sorting copies ................................................................................ 1-9 Stapling copies .............................................................................. 1-9 Punching holes in copies ............................................................. 1-10 Copying multiple document pages onto a single page ............... 1-10 Copying a document containing various page sizes ................... 1-10 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original .. 1-11 Inserting paper between copies of overhead projector transparencies.............................................................................. 1-11 Adding a cover page.................................................................... 1-11 Inserting different paper into copies ............................................ 1-12 Inserting pages from a different document at specified locations in a copy ....................................................................... 1-12 Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side........................................................................... 1-13 Copying with reversed colors ...................................................... 1-13 Printing a mirror image................................................................. 1-13 Copying with a background color................................................ 1-14 Improving the copy color quality.................................................. 1-14 Separately copying a page spread .............................................. 1-14 Creating booklets from copies of pamphlets............................... 1-14 Repeating copy images ............................................................... 1-15 Printing the enlarged image on multiple pages ........................... 1-15 Making copies for filing................................................................ 1-15 Copying with the page layout of a magazine............................... 1-16 Erasing sections of copies ........................................................... 1-16 Adjusting the image to fit the paper size ..................................... 1-16 Printing distribution numbers or copy protection text on copies...................................................................................... 1-17 Contents-2 bizhub C252 Managing jobs .............................................................................. 1-17 Programming copy settings.......................................................... 1-17 Checking the copy settings .......................................................... 1-17 Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens ......................... 1-17 Displaying explanations of functions and settings ....................... 1-17 Interrupting a copy job.................................................................. 1-18 Printing a sample copy ................................................................. 1-18 1.3 Adjust color parameters ................................................................. 1-19 1.4 General information about color.................................................... 1-21 1.5 Relationship between hue, brightness and saturation (color model) .................................................................................... 1-22 1.6 “Red” parameter.............................................................................. 1-23 1.7 “Green” parameter .......................................................................... 1-24 1.8 “Blue” parameter............................................................................. 1-25 1.9 “Color Balance” parameter (CMYK color adjustment) ................ 1-26 1.10 “Brightness” parameter .................................................................. 1-28 1.11 “Contrast” parameter...................................................................... 1-29 1.12 “Saturation” parameter................................................................... 1-30 1.13 “Sharpness” parameter .................................................................. 1-31 1.14 “Hue” parameter.............................................................................. 1-32 1.15 “Copy Density” parameter.............................................................. 1-33 1.16 “Single Color” function ................................................................... 1-34 1.17 “2 Color” function............................................................................ 1-35 1.18 “Background Color” function......................................................... 1-36 1.19 “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function........................................................ 1-37 Monotone copy............................................................................. 1-37 Full-color copy and “Background Color” function........................ 1-38 1.20 “Mirror Image” function.................................................................. 1-39 1.21 Explanation of manual conventions............................................... 1-40 Safety advices............................................................................... 1-40 Sequence of action....................................................................... 1-40 Tips ............................................................................................... 1-41 Special text markings ................................................................... 1-41 1.22 Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper.................. 1-42 “Width” and “Length” ................................................................... 1-42 Paper Orientation.......................................................................... 1-42 bizhub C252 Contents-3 1.23 User manuals .................................................................................. 1-43 User manual [Copy Operations] ........................... 1-43 User manual [Network Scanner Operations]................................ 1-43 User manual [Box Operations] ..................................................... 1-43 User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] .................................. 1-43 User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] ............................... 1-43 User manual [Network Facsimile Operations].............................. 1-43 User manual [Print Operations] .................................................... 1-44 1.24 Legal restrictions on copying........................................................ 1-45 2 Installation and operation precautions 2.1 Safety information ............................................................................ 2-3 Warning and precaution symbols .................................................. 2-3 Meaning of symbols....................................................................... 2-4 Disassemble and modification....................................................... 2-4 Power cord..................................................................................... 2-5 Power source ................................................................................. 2-6 Power plug ..................................................................................... 2-7 Grounding ...................................................................................... 2-7 Installation...................................................................................... 2-8 Ventilation ...................................................................................... 2-9 Actions in response to troubles ..................................................... 2-9 Consumables ............................................................................... 2-10 When moving the machine .......................................................... 2-11 Before successive holidays.......................................................... 2-11 2.2 Regulation notices.......................................................................... 2-12 CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union (EU).................................................................... 2-12 USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (for U.S.A. users) .......................................................... 2-12 INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) ....................................... 2-12 For users in countries not subject to class B regulations............ 2-13 Laser safety.................................................................................. 2-13 Internal laser radiation.................................................................. 2-13 CDRH regulations ........................................................................ 2-14 For European users...................................................................... 2-15 For Denmark users....................................................................... 2-15 For Finland, Sweden users .......................................................... 2-15 For Norway users......................................................................... 2-16 Laser safety labely ....................................................................... 2-17 Ozone release .............................................................................. 2-18 Acoustic noise (for European users only)..................................... 2-18 For EU member states only ......................................................... 2-18 Contents-4 bizhub C252 2.3 Caution notations and labels.......................................................... 2-19 2.4 Space requirements ........................................................................ 2-20 2.5 Operation precautions .................................................................... 2-21 Power source................................................................................ 2-21 Operating environment ................................................................. 2-21 Storage of copies.......................................................................... 2-21 3 Before making copies 3.1 Part names and their functions........................................................ 3-3 Options ........................................................................................... 3-3 Outside of machine......................................................................... 3-6 Inside of machine.......................................................................... 3-12 Finisher FS-603/punch kit PK-501 ............................................... 3-14 Finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601.......................................... 3-16 Saddle stitcher SD-503/mailbin kit MT-501 ................................. 3-18 Finisher FS-514/output tray OT-601/punch kit PK-510................ 3-19 Control panel ................................................................................ 3-22 Basic settings screen (Basic screen) ............................................ 3-25 Icons that appear in the screen .................................................... 3-27 3.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ....................................... 3-28 To adjust the angle of the control panel ....................................... 3-28 3.3 Turning on the Main Power and the Auxiliary Power................... 3-30 To turn on the machine................................................................. 3-30 To scan during warm-up............................................................... 3-32 To turn off the machine................................................................. 3-34 Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 3-35 Automatically canceling the mode screen (automatic system reset)............................................................... 3-35 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)................... 3-36 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)............................ 3-37 Manually conserving energy ......................................................... 3-38 Automatically turning the machine on/off (weekly timer) .............. 3-39 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication) ..................................................................... 3-41 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track) .............................................................................. 3-46 3.4 Loading paper into the 1st tray ...................................................... 3-49 To load paper (1st tray) ................................................................. 3-49 3.5 Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray .................................. 3-55 To load paper (2nd, 3rd or 4th tray) .............................................. 3-55 bizhub C252 Contents-5 3.6 Loading paper into the LCT........................................................... 3-57 To load paper (LCT) ..................................................................... 3-57 3.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................................. 3-59 To load paper (bypass tray) ......................................................... 3-59 4 Basic copy operations 4.1 General copy operation.................................................................... 4-3 To make a copy ............................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................. 4-6 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ......... 4-6 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority ......... 4-8 4.3 Feeding the document ..................................................................... 4-9 To load the document into the ADF............................................... 4-9 To place the document on the original glass............................... 4-11 Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)............................................................. 4-13 Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass ........... 4-18 4.4 Specifying original settings ........................................................... 4-24 Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting) ............................................................. 4-24 Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting) .................... 4-26 Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings) .......................................................... 4-28 To specify an original direction setting ........................................ 4-30 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)........................................................................... 4-32 To specify a margin setting.......................................................... 4-34 To change scan settings for each document............................... 4-36 4.5 Selecting a color setting ................................................................ 4-40 To select a color setting............................................................... 4-41 4.6 Selecting a paper setting............................................................... 4-43 Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) ....................................................... 4-44 Manually selecting the desired paper size................................... 4-45 Contents-6 bizhub C252 4.7 Specifying a zoom setting .............................................................. 4-46 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting) ................................................................... 4-46 Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document (“×1.0” setting) .............................................................................. 4-48 Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting) .............................. 4-49 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (enlarge and reduce settings) ....... 4-50 Typing In the zoom ratio (XY Zoom setting).................................. 4-51 Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings) ........................................................ 4-53 Selecting a stored zoom ratio....................................................... 4-56 Storing the desired zoom ratio ..................................................... 4-57 4.8 Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex settings)............................................................... 4-59 To select single-sided copies ....................................................... 4-60 To select double-sided copies ..................................................... 4-62 4.9 Selecting the quality of the document........................................... 4-65 Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings) ................................................................. 4-65 To specify an original type setting ................................................ 4-67 4.10 Specifying the density settings ...................................................... 4-70 Adjusting the print density (Density settings)................................ 4-71 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings).................................................... 4-73 Adjusting the reproduction quality of text..................................... 4-75 4.11 Selecting a combine originals setting ........................................... 4-77 Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine Originals) ...................................................................... 4-79 4.12 Selecting finishing settings ............................................................ 4-81 Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting).................................... 4-84 Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting) ............................. 4-86 Stapling copies (Staple settings) .................................................. 4-88 To bind copies with staples .......................................................... 4-91 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ................................... 4-93 To punch holes in copies.............................................................. 4-94 4.13 Specifying center binding............................................................... 4-96 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603............................................................................. 4-99 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514........................................................................... 4-101 bizhub C252 Contents-7 4.14 Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) ........................................ 4-103 To reserve a copy job ................................................................ 4-103 4.15 Stopping scanning/printing ......................................................... 4-105 To stop scanning/printing .......................................................... 4-105 4.16 Deleting a stopped job................................................................. 4-106 To delete a stopped job............................................................. 4-106 5 Additional copy operations 5.1 Checking the copy settings (Mode Check) .................................... 5-3 To check the settings..................................................................... 5-3 To change the settings................................................................... 5-5 5.2 Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy) ........................ 5-6 To make test prints ........................................................................ 5-6 5.3 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) ........................................ 5-9 To interrupt a copy job................................................................... 5-9 5.4 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) ............................... 5-11 To store a copy program ............................................................. 5-11 To delete a copy program............................................................ 5-14 5.5 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) ........ 5-15 To recall a stored job ................................................................... 5-15 5.6 Displaying function descriptions (Help)........................................ 5-18 Overview of Help Screens............................................................ 5-18 To display the Main Help Menu screen ....................................... 5-22 To display the Help screen while specifying a setting ................. 5-24 5.7 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) .............. 5-25 Displaying the Accessibility Setting Screen................................. 5-25 To set the “Key Repeat Start/Interval Time” function .................. 5-25 To set the “Enlarge Display Timer Setting” function.................... 5-28 To set the “Message Display Time” function............................... 5-31 To set the “Sound Setting” function ............................................ 5-33 To set the “Touch Panel Adj.” function........................................ 5-36 To set the “Auto Reset Notification” function .............................. 5-38 To set the “Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen” function ........ 5-41 Contents-8 bizhub C252 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 When the message “malfunction detected.” appears (call technical representative) .......................................................... 6-3 To call the technical representative ................................................ 6-5 6.2 When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears.......................... 6-6 Location of Paper misfeed.............................................................. 6-6 Paper misfeed indications .............................................................. 6-8 To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray................................. 6-10 To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit................. 6-11 To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st tray ....................................... 6-12 To clear a paper misfeed in the 2nd tray ...................................... 6-13 To clear a paper misfeed in a paper tray (3rd or 4th tray) ............ 6-14 To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT............................................. 6-15 To clear a paper misfeed in the right-side door............................ 6-16 To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit................................... 6-19 To clear a banner paper misfeed.................................................. 6-22 To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF ............................................ 6-27 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501................................. 6-31 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603................................. 6-35 To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher FS-514........................... 6-39 To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin........................................ 6-42 To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher............................ 6-44 6.3 When the message “Replenish paper.” appears.......................... 6-46 To replenish paper ........................................................................ 6-46 6.4 When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.” appears............................................................................................. 6-47 Memory becomes full while scanning........................................... 6-47 Memory becomes full while queuing a job ................................... 6-48 6.5 When “Please replace following unit(s).” appears ....................... 6-49 6.6 When the message “Need to replace XXXX.” appears................ 6-50 6.7 Simple troubleshooting................................................................... 6-52 Main unit ....................................................................................... 6-52 ADF ............................................................................................... 6-55 Finisher ......................................................................................... 6-55 6.8 Main messages and their remedies............................................... 6-56 bizhub C252 Contents-9 7 Specifications 7.1 Specifications ................................................................................... 7-3 bizhub C252................................................................................... 7-3 Automatic duplex unit .................................................................... 7-6 Option specifications ..................................................................... 7-6 Automatic document feeder DF-601 ............................................. 7-6 Paper feed cabinet PC-103 ........................................................... 7-7 Paper feed cabinet PC-203 ........................................................... 7-8 Paper feed cabinet PC-403 ........................................................... 7-8 Finisher FS-603.............................................................................. 7-9 Punch kit PK-501 ......................................................................... 7-10 Finisher FS-501............................................................................ 7-10 Job separator JS-601 .................................................................. 7-11 Finisher FS-514............................................................................ 7-11 Punch kit PK-510 ......................................................................... 7-12 Saddle stitcher SD-503................................................................ 7-12 Output tray OT-601...................................................................... 7-12 Mailbin kit MT-501 ....................................................................... 7-13 8 Copy paper/original documents 8.1 Copy paper........................................................................................ 8-3 Possible paper sizes ...................................................................... 8-3 Paper types and paper capacities ................................................. 8-5 Special paper ................................................................................. 8-6 Precautions for paper .................................................................... 8-8 Paper storage................................................................................. 8-8 Auto tray switch feature ................................................................. 8-9 Order for Selecting the Paper trays ............................................... 8-9 8.2 Selecting the paper settings.......................................................... 8-10 To automatically detect the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) ....................................................... 8-10 To specify a paper size (set size settings).................................... 8-12 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) .... 8-15 To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)........ 8-18 To specify a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings) ........................................................... 8-22 To specify a setting for special paper .......................................... 8-25 To print double-sided copies manually........................................ 8-27 Contents-10 bizhub C252 8.3 Original documents......................................................................... 8-29 Documents that can be loaded into the ADF ............................... 8-29 Precautions for loading documents into the ADF......................... 8-31 Documents that can be placed on the original glass ................... 8-31 Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass....... 8-32 9 Application functions 9.1 Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function) .............................................................. 9-3 To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function................................. 9-4 9.2 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) ................................ 9-7 To copy using the “Cover Mode” function ..................................... 9-8 9.3 Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet” function) ................................................................. 9-11 To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function.................................... 9-13 9.4 Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page (“Insert Image” function)................................................................. 9-16 To copy using the “Insert Image” function ................................... 9-17 9.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side (“Chapters” function) ...................................................................... 9-21 To copy using the “Chapters” function ........................................ 9-22 9.6 Scanning documents with different settings and printing copies all together (“Program Job” function)................. 9-25 To copy using the “Program Job” function .................................. 9-26 9.7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread (“Book Copy” function) ................................................................... 9-30 To copy using the “Book Copy” function ..................................... 9-31 9.8 Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function) ........................ 9-36 To copy using the “Booklet Original” function.............................. 9-37 9.9 Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function) ............................. 9-40 To copy using the “Image Repeat” function................................. 9-41 9.10 Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster Mode” function) ................................................................ 9-45 To copy using the “Poster Mode” function .................................. 9-45 9.11 Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet” function)......................................................................... 9-51 To copy using the “Booklet” function ........................................... 9-52 9.12 Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)...................................................... 9-54 To copy using the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function......................... 9-55 bizhub C252 Contents-11 9.13 Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function).................. 9-56 To copy using the “Mirror Image” function.................................. 9-56 9.14 Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function)...................................................... 9-60 To copy using the “Background Color” function ......................... 9-60 9.15 Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters) ...... 9-63 To adjust the Adjust Color parameters ........................................ 9-64 Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings (Sample Copy).............................................................................. 9-66 To make sample copies ............................................................... 9-67 9.16 Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function) ......... 9-68 To copy using the “Page Margin” function .................................. 9-69 9.17 Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function).................. 9-71 To copy using the “Erase” function ............................................. 9-71 9.18 Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment settings).......................................................... 9-73 To copy using the Image Adjustment settings............................. 9-74 9.19 Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on copies (Stamp functions) ............................................................... 9-77 Printing the Date/Time (“Date/Time” function)............................. 9-78 To copy using the “Date/Time” function...................................... 9-78 Printing the page number (“Page #” function) ............................. 9-81 To copy using the “Page #” function ........................................... 9-81 Printing the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function) ...... 9-85 To copy using the “Set Numbering” function .............................. 9-85 Printing copy protection text (“Copy Protect” function) .............. 9-87 To copy using the “Copy Protect” function ................................. 9-87 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ....................................................... 10-3 To replace the toner cartridge...................................................... 10-6 10.2 Replacing the staples..................................................................... 10-9 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 ................... 10-10 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 ................... 10-13 To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-514............... 10-17 To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher...................... 10-19 Contents-12 bizhub C252 10.3 Clearing a staple jam .................................................................... 10-22 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-501 ............................... 10-24 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-603 ............................... 10-26 To clear jammed staples in the finisher FS-514 ......................... 10-32 To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher .......................... 10-36 10.4 Emptying the waste containers.................................................... 10-39 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-603 ........................................................................................ 10-42 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-514 ........................................................................................ 10-43 10.5 Replacing the waste toner box .................................................... 10-44 To replace the waste toner box .................................................. 10-46 11 Care of the machine 11.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................... 11-3 Housing......................................................................................... 11-3 Original glass ................................................................................ 11-3 Control panel ................................................................................ 11-4 Document transfer belt ................................................................. 11-5 Original cover pad......................................................................... 11-6 Paper Take-Up roller..................................................................... 11-6 Electrostatic charger wire ............................................................. 11-7 Print head...................................................................................... 11-8 11.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) .................................................... 11-9 Viewing counters .......................................................................... 11-9 To view the counters..................................................................... 11-9 Viewing the coverage rate .......................................................... 11-11 To view the coverage rate........................................................... 11-11 11.3 When the message “Preventive maintenance time.” appears........................................................................................... 11-12 bizhub C252 Contents-13 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12.1 Overview of the Job List screen.................................................... 12-3 Jobs ............................................................................................. 12-3 Multi-Job feature.......................................................................... 12-4 Job list screens ............................................................................ 12-5 12.2 Performing operations on jobs...................................................... 12-8 To delete a job ............................................................................. 12-8 To check the job settings........................................................... 12-10 Displayed information ................................................................ 12-11 To check the job details............................................................. 12-12 To display current jobs (held jobs and active jobs lists) ............ 12-13 To display Job History ............................................................... 12-14 To print a sample copy of a stored job ...................................... 12-15 To print a stored job................................................................... 12-17 To increase priority for printing .................................................. 12-19 13 Utility 13.1 Overview of utility mode parameters............................................ 13-3 List of registration information and parameters ........................... 13-3 13.2 Selecting a destination register .................................................. 13-23 Scan ........................................................................................... 13-23 Fax ............................................................................................. 13-23 User box..................................................................................... 13-24 Displaying the destination register screen................................. 13-25 13.3 Specifying user settings............................................................... 13-27 System setting ........................................................................... 13-27 Display setting............................................................................ 13-30 Initial setting............................................................................... 13-32 Copier setting............................................................................. 13-33 Scanner setting .......................................................................... 13-35 Printer setting............................................................................. 13-35 Displaying the Utility Setting screen .......................................... 13-36 13.4 Specifying administrator settings ............................................... 13-38 System setting ........................................................................... 13-38 Administrator/machine setting................................................... 13-49 One-Touch registration .............................................................. 13-49 User authentication/account track............................................. 13-50 Network setting.......................................................................... 13-53 Copier setting............................................................................. 13-54 Printer setting............................................................................. 13-55 Contents-14 bizhub C252 Fax setting .................................................................................. 13-55 System connection ..................................................................... 13-56 Security setting ........................................................................... 13-56 Displaying the Administrator Setting screen............................... 13-61 13.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................... 13-63 Requisite ..................................................................................... 13-63 13.6 Adjusting the printer ..................................................................... 13-64 Adjusting the starting print position at the leading edge position.................................................................. 13-64 Adjusting the starting print position at the left edge................... 13-66 Adjusting the starting print position for the second side............ 13-68 Adjusting printing according to the media.................................. 13-70 13.7 Adjusting the finisher (FS-603) ..................................................... 13-73 Adjusting the center stapling position ........................................ 13-73 Adjusting the center folding position .......................................... 13-75 13.8 Adjusting the finisher (FS-514) ..................................................... 13-77 Adjusting the center folding position .......................................... 13-77 Adjusting the center stapling position ........................................ 13-81 Adjusting the horizontal punch position ..................................... 13-84 Adjusting the angle of punched holes ........................................ 13-87 13.9 Adjusting the color registration ................................................... 13-89 Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta and cyan ..................................................................................... 13-89 13.10 Adjusting the gradation levels...................................................... 13-92 Requisite ..................................................................................... 13-92 13.11 Authentication method ................................................................. 13-95 User authentication and account track....................................... 13-95 When user authentication and account track are synchronized......................................................................... 13-96 When user authentication and account track are used separately..................................................................... 13-97 To select an authentication method ........................................... 13-98 13.12 User authentication setting ........................................................ 13-102 Administrative setting—user name list ..................................... 13-102 Default function permission ...................................................... 13-104 To specify the default function permissions ............................. 13-104 Authenticating public users ...................................................... 13-106 User registration ....................................................................... 13-107 User counter ............................................................................. 13-113 To check the counter ................................................................ 13-115 bizhub C252 Contents-15 13.13 Account track setting................................................................. 13-117 Account track registration........................................................ 13-117 Account track counter.............................................................. 13-122 To check the counter ............................................................... 13-124 13.14 Password rules ........................................................................... 13-125 Conditions of the password rules ............................................ 13-125 13.15 Enhanced security settings ....................................................... 13-127 13.16 Viewing the status of the consumables.................................... 13-131 Displaying the unit life indicator screen ................................... 13-131 14 Appendix 14.1 Entering text.................................................................................... 14-3 To type text .................................................................................. 14-5 List of available characters .......................................................... 14-5 14.2 Glossary........................................................................................... 14-6 14.3 Index .............................................................................................. 14-12 Contents-16 bizhub C252 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-3 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this manual before using the machine. After reading the manual, store it in the designated holder so that it can easily be referred to when questions or problems arise during operation. The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment. Energy Star® As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR® product? An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub C252 1.1 Trademarks and registered trademarks KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation. This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. License information This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-5 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub C252 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-7 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub C252 1.2 Available features Selecting the print color The color used to print copies can be specified, for example, the copy can be printed in full color or in black and white. For details, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified zoom ratio. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)" on page 4-44. Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting)" on page 4-46. Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the document can be resized as desired. For details, refer to "Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings)" on page 4-53. Scanning the document in separate batches A document with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using the original glass or the document pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as a single job. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13 and "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-9 Center binding Copies can be folded at their center and bound with staples. For details, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603" on page 4-99. Sorting copies The finishing method for copies can be selected. For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting)" on page 4-84, "Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting)" on page 4-86. Stapling copies Multi-page documents can be copied and stapled together. For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 4-88. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub C252 Punching holes in copies Holes for filing can be punched in the copies. For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 4-93. Copying multiple document pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the document can be printed together on a single page. For details, refer to "Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine Originals)" on page 4-79. Copying a document containing various page sizes A document with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together. For details, refer to "Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)" on page 4-24. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-11 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document. For details, refer to "Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings)" on page 4-65 or "Adjusting the print density (Density settings)" on page 4-71. Inserting paper between copies of overhead projector transparencies In order to prevent overhead projector transparencies from becoming stuck to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparency copies. For details, refer to "Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function)" on page 9-3. Adding a cover page Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different paper (for example, colored paper) for only the cover pages. For details, refer to "Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function)" on page 9-7. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub C252 Inserting different paper into copies Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet” function)" on page 9-11. Inserting pages from a different document at specified locations in a copy A document scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in a document scanned earlier for copying. For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page (“Insert Image” function)" on page 9-16. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-13 Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side (“Chapters” function)" on page 9-21. Copying with reversed colors A document can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the document image inversed. With Color setting "Full Color", copies are printed with the hues and brightness inversed. With Color setting "Black" or "Single Color", copies are printed with the hues inversed. For details, refer to "Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)" on page 9-54. Printing a mirror image A document can be copied in its mirror image. For details, refer to "Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function)" on page 9-56. 2 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub C252 Copying with a background color A document can be copied using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). For details, refer to "Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function)" on page 9-60. Improving the copy color quality You can adjust color copies to the quality for the desired image. For details, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Separately copying a page spread A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages. For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread (“Book Copy” function)" on page 9-30. Creating booklets from copies of pamphlets Pamphlets with their staples removed can be copied and bound with staples. For details, refer to "Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function)" on page 9-36. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-15 Repeating copy images A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. For details, refer to "Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function)" on page 9-40. Printing the enlarged image on multiple pages A single document page can be automatically split into parts with each part printed enlarged. For details, refer to "Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster Mode” function)" on page 9-45. Making copies for filing Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. For details, refer to "Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function)" on page 9-68. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub C252 Copying with the page layout of a magazine Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet” function)" on page 9-51. Erasing sections of copies Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes and transmission information in received faxes, can be erased in copies. For details, refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on page 9-71. Adjusting the image to fit the paper size When the copy paper is larger than the original document, copies can be printed so that the document image fills the paper. For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment settings)" on page 9-73. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-17 Printing distribution numbers or copy protection text on copies Pages numbers or copy protection text (hidden text that prevents improper copying) can be printed on copies, or each copy set can be printed with distribution numbers. For details, refer to "Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on copies (Stamp functions)" on page 9-77. Managing jobs The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed. For details, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3. Programming copy settings Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs. For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on page 5-11. Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these screens, the copy settings can also be changed. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)" on page 5-3. Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read, allowing basic operations to be easily performed. For details, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual. Displaying explanations of functions and settings The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens. For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 5-18. 1 Introduction 1-18 bizhub C252 Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed. For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 5-9. Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked. For details, refer to "Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy)" on page 5-6. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-19 1.3 Adjust color parameters This section provides copy samples that are a helpful reference for setting the wide variety of parameters, functions and settings available with this fullcolor copier. Section Description Section Description General Information About Color Provides information on hue, brightness and saturation (p. 1-21) "Contrast" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the contrast level (p. 1-29) "Red" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the red hues (p. 1-23) "Saturation" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the vividness (p. 1-30) "Green" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the green hues (p. 1-24) "Sharpness" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the sharpness of text (p. 1-31) "Blue" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the blue hues (p. 1-25) "Hue" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the hue (p. 1-32) "Color Balance" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the density of the colors CMYK (p. 1-26) "Copy Density" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the copy density (p. 1-33) "Brightness" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the brightness (p. 1-28) "Single Color" Function Provides information on copying with a single selected color (monotone) (p. 1-34) 1 Introduction 1-20 bizhub C252 * Since the print samples provided are photographs, they may slightly differ in color with actual color copies. "2 Color" Function Provides information on copying using only black and one selected color (p. 1-35) "Neg-/Pos. Reverse" Function Provides information on copying a document with the light- and darkcolored areas of the image inversed (p. 1-37) "Background Color" Function Provides information on copying with the selected background color (p. 1-36) "Mirror Image" Function Provides information on producing a copy in the mirror image of the original document (p. 1-39) Section Description Section Description Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-21 1.4 General information about color Everybody has an idea of what hue an object has, for example, an apple is red, a lemon is yellow, and the sky is blue. Hue is the tint by which the color of an is classified as red, yellow, blue, etc. Brightness is the degree of lightness in which makes it a light color or a dark color. For example, when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a grapefruit, it is obvious that the yellow of the lemon is brighter. But what about when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the red of a bean? Obviously, the yellow of the lemon is brighter. Brightness is the this degree of lightness that enables comparison regardless of the hue. What makes the difference between the By saying that the lemon is a more vivid difference between the two colors is stated yellow of a lemon and the yellos of a pear? yellow and the pear is a duller yellow, the in terms of saturation,as opposed to brightness. As opposed to hue and brightness, saturation is the characteristic that indicates the degree of vividness. 1 Introduction 1-22 bizhub C252 1.5 Relationship between hue, brightness and saturation (color model) Hue, brightness and saturation are the elements that we call the "three attributes of color". We can think of their affects using the solid object shown in figure 1, where the outer edge is the hue, the vertical axis is the brightness, and the horizontal axis from the center is the saturation. Assigning colors to the solid object, representing the three attributes of color, shown in figure 1 produces the color model shown in figure 2. Although the level of saturation differs for each hue and degree of brightness, creating a complex color model, we can get a better understanding of the conditions under which the hue, brightness and saturation vary. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-23 1.6 “Red” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of red in the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-24 bizhub C252 1.7 “Green” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of green in the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-25 1.8 “Blue” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of blue in the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-26 bizhub C252 1.9 “Color Balance” parameter (CMYK color adjustment) By mixing the four toner colors (yellow, magenta, and cyan in addition to black) in a full-color copy, the colors of the document can be reproduced. Changing the amount of each color of toner enables the tints in the copy to be finely adjusted. Each color can be adjusted to any of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Adjusting the black tinge Increasing the amount of black Decreasing the amount of black Black Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-27 Y G B R M C 1 Introduction 1-28 bizhub C252 1.10 “Brightness” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the brightness of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-29 1.11 “Contrast” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the image to one of 19 levels between soft/smooth and crisp. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-30 bizhub C252 1.12 “Saturation” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the vividness of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-31 1.13 “Sharpness” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the amount of contours in text and images to one of 7 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-32 bizhub C252 1.14 “Hue” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the hue of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-33 1.15 “Copy Density” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the light and shading of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-34 bizhub C252 1.16 “Single Color” function This function allows you to copy a document using only one of the 21 colors available. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. Yellow Magenta Cyan Red Green Orange Pumpkin Yellow Green Teal Blue Aquamarine Pink Purple Plum Maroon Copper Red Forest Green Brown Camel Sepia 2 Sepia 1 Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-35 1.17 “2 Color” function This setting allows you to produce copies with the black areas of the document printed in black and the color areas of the document printed in one of the six colors available. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. Yellow Magenta Red Cyan Green Blue HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY 1 Introduction 1-36 bizhub C252 1.18 “Background Color” function This function allows you to copy a document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function)" on page 9-60. Yellow Magenta Cyan Red Green Orange Pumpkin Yellow Green Teal Blue Aquamarine Pink Purple Plum Maroon Forest Green Brown Camel Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-37 1.19 “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function This function allows you to copy a document with the light-colored areas and the dark-colored areas of the image inversed. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)" on page 9-54. Monotone copy Yellow Magenta Cyan Red Green Orange Pumpkin Yellow Green Teal Blue Aquamarine Pink Purple Plum Maroon Copper Red Forest Green Brown Camel Sepia 2 Sepia 1 1 Introduction 1-38 bizhub C252 Full-color copy and “Background Color” function Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-39 1.20 “Mirror Image” function This function allows you to copy a mirror image of the original document. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function)" on page 9-56. 1 Introduction 1-40 bizhub C252 1.21 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-41 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. 1 Introduction 1-42 bizhub C252 1.22 Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below. “Width” and “Length” Whenever paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual, the first value always refers to the width of the paper (shown as "Y" in the illustration) and the second to the length (shown as "X"). Paper Orientation Lengthwise (w) If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w. Crosswise (v) If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-43 1.23 User manuals The following User manuals have been prepared for this machine. User manual [Copy Operations] This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating procedures for the various copy functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual [Network Scanner Operations] This manual contains details on specifying network settings for standard equipment and on operations for scanning functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network functions and for using Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB. User manual [Box Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the boxes. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the boxes on the hard disk. User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for faxing. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for fax functions when the fax kit is installed. User manual [Network Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for network faxing. - Refer to this User manual for details on operating procedures for using the network fax functions (Internet faxing, SIP faxing and IP address faxing). 1 Introduction 1-44 bizhub C252 User manual [Print Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard built-in printer controller. - For details on the printing functions, refer to user manual (PDF file) on User Software CD-ROM. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-45 1.24 Legal restrictions on copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. Financial Instruments - Personal checks - Traveler’s checks - Money orders - Certificates of deposit - Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness - Stock certificates Legal Documents - Food stamps - Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) - Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies - Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled) - Passports - Immigration papers - Motor vehicle licenses and titles - House and property titles and deeds General - Identification cards, badges, or insignias - Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel. ! Detail In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain documents, such as paper currency, this machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature. Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with, images may be distorted. 1 Introduction 1-46 bizhub C252 2 Installation and operation precautions Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-3 2 Installation and operation precautions 2.1 Safety information This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this manual. KM_Ver.01E_C 2 Note Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased product. Warning and precaution symbols The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety warnings. 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-4 bizhub C252 Meaning of symbols Disassemble and modification 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Symbol Meaning Example Meaning A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution. This symbol warns against possible causes of burns. A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action. This symbol warns against dismantling the device. A black circle indicates an imperative course of action. This symbol indicates you must unplug the device. Warning Symbol • Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the product. Some products have a high-voltage part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or blindness. • Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source could cause blindness. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-5 Power cord 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a power cord is not supplied, only use the power cord and plug that is specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to use this cord could result in a fire or electrical shock. • Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this machine and NEVER use it for any other product. Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock. • Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result in a fire or breakdown. Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-6 bizhub C252 Power source 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock. • Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall ask qualified electrician for the installation. • Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause a fire or electrical shock. Contact your authorized service representative if an extension cord is required. • Consult your authorized service representative before connecting other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overload could result in a fire. Caution Symbol • The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency occurs. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-7 Power plug 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Grounding 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an electrical shock could result. • Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock. Caution Symbol • Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the power cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. • Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire. Warning Symbol • Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding terminal. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-8 bizhub C252 Installation 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this product. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the product could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. Caution Symbol • After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury. • Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. • Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown. • Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction. • Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, as a fire could result. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-9 Ventilation 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Actions in response to troubles 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Caution Symbol • Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time could injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular intervals. Warning Symbol • Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. • Do not keep using this product, if this product has been dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-10 bizhub C252 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Consumables 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Caution Symbol • The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature, which may cause burns. When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a "Caution HOT" caution label. Warning Symbol • Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame. The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage. Caution Symbol • Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easy reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your health. • Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They could cause these products to malfunction. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-11 When moving the machine 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Before successive holidays When the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is not installed: 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Caution Symbol • Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. • When moving this product, always hold it by the locations specified in the user manual or other documents. If the unit falls it may cause severe personal injury. The product may also be damaged or malfunction. Caution Symbol • Unplug the product when you will not use the product for long periods of time. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-12 bizhub C252 2.2 Regulation notices CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union (EU) This product complies with the following EU directives: 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives. This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union. This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules. USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (for U.S.A. users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. % This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-13 For users in countries not subject to class B regulations 7 WARNING Interference with radio communications: % This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. % This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules. Laser safety This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual. Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Internal laser radiation 7 WARNING This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. % The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit. % The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM: Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances. Specification Maximum Average Radiation Power 8.0 μW at the laser aperture of the print head unit Wavelength 775-800 nm 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-14 bizhub C252 CDRH regulations This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 2-13 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. 7 CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 10 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm. Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit Print Head Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-15 For European users 7 CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 10 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm. For Denmark users 7 ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. % Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene. Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 10 mW og bølgelængden er 775-800 nm. For Finland, Sweden users LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT 7 VAROITUS Tämä on puolijohdelaser. % Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 10 mW ja aallonpituus on 775-800 nm. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-16 bizhub C252 7 VARNING Det här är en halvledarlaser. % Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 10 mW och våglängden är 775-800 nm. 7 VAROITUS Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. % Älä katso säteeseen. 7 VARNING Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. % Betrakta ej strålen. For Norway users 7 ADVARSEL! Dette en halvleder laser. % Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 10 mW og bølgelengde er 775-800 nm. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-17 Laser safety labely A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine, as shown below. * Only for the U.S.A. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-18 bizhub C252 Ozone release 7 CAUTION Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room % A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room well ventilated. 7 ATTENTION Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil. % Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée. Acoustic noise (for European users only) Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779. For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please refer to the information of your local community or contact our dealers regrading the proper handling of end-oflife electric and electronic equipments. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-19 2.3 Caution notations and labels Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the following positions. Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as removing paper misfeeds are performed. It is illegal to copy certain types of documents. Never copy such documents. Do not alter or remove any covers or panels attached to this machine, otherwise you may be exposed to laser radiation. Do not burn used imaging units. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous. Do not burn used toner cartridges. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous. CAUTION CAUTION WARNING Do not burn the used waste-toner box. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous. CAUTION Do not position the used waste-toner box so that it is standing on end or tilted, otherwise toner may spill. WARNING WARNING The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns. CAUTION 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-20 bizhub C252 2.4 Space requirements To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part replacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. 2 Reminder Be sure to allow a clearance of 100 mm (4 in.) or more at the back of this machine for the ventilation duct. C252+DF-601+FS514+PC-403+SD-503+OT-601 Unit: mm (inch) 190 (7-1/2) 1212 (47-3/4) 341 (13-1/2) 394 (15-1/2) 755 (29-3/4) 100 (4) 312 (12-1/4) 1208 (47-1/2) Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-21 2.5 Operation precautions To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the precautions described below. Power source The power source requirements are as follows. - Voltage fluctuation: Maximum ± 10% (at 220 to 240 V AC) - Frequency fluctuation: Maximum ± 3 Hz (at 50 Hz) – Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as possible. Operating environment The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as follows. - Temperature: 10°C (50°F) to 30°C (86°F) with fluctuations of no more than 10°C (18°F) within an hour - Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 20% within an hour Storage of copies To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below. - Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading. - Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner on copies. - Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black-and-white copies. Therefore, when a color copy is folded, the toner at the fold may peel off. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-22 bizhub C252 3 Before making copies Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-3 3 Before making copies 3.1 Part names and their functions Options 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 Before making copies 3-4 bizhub C252 No. Part Name Description 1 Automatic Document Feeder DF-601 Automatically feeds one document sheet at a time for scanning, and automatically turns over doublesided documents for scanning Referred to as the "ADF" throughout the manual. 2 Original Cover OC-501 Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in place Referred to as the "original cover" throughout the manual. 3 Working Table WT-501 Provides an area to temporarily place a document or other materials 4 Fax Multi Line ML-501 Installed to increase the telephone lines available for faxing 5 Desk DK-502 Allows this machine to be set up on the floor Referred to as the "desk" throughout the manual. 6 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-103 The top tray can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper, and the bottom tray can be used as storage. Referred to as the "single paper feed cabinet" throughout the manual. 7 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-203 Both the top and bottom trays can each be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper. Referred to as the "double paper feed cabinet" throughout the manual. 8 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper Referred to as the "LCT" throughout the manual. 9 Finisher FS-514 Feeds out finished printed pages. The "Sort" setting (separating by copy set), "Group" setting (separating by page), and Staple settings (corner stapling and two-point stapling) are available. 10 Output Tray OT-601 Copy output tray installed onto the finisher FS-514 and used for separating printed pages Referred to as the "optional finishing tray" throughout the manual. 11 Punch Kit PK-501 Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto finisher FS-603 12 Mailbin Kit MT-501 Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to divide printed pages and feed them into the appropriate tray assigned to a specific individual or group (only with computer printing) Referred to as the "mailbin" throughout the manual. 13 Saddle Stitcher SD-503 Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to allow copies to be bound or folded at the center Referred to as the "saddle stitcher" throughout the manual. 14 Finisher FS-603 Feeds out printed pages. The "Offset" setting (separating), Staple settings (stapling), and "Fold & Staple" function (binding) are available. • In order to install the finisher, the main unit must be installed on the desk, on the LCT, on the single paper feed cabinet, or on the double paper feed cabinet. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-5 * Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustration. 2 Reminder In order to maintain the functionality and quality of the machine, be sure to use the desk or paper feed cabinet when installing the machine on the floor. 2 Note Either FS-501 or FS-603 can be installed on this machine as options. A kit is required in order to install FS-501 or FS-603. For details, contact your technical representative. 15 Punch Kit PK-510 Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto finisher FS-514 16 Finisher FS-501 Finishes printed pages according to the selected Output setting (sorting or stapling), then feeds out the pages • In order to install the finisher, the main unit must be installed on the desk, on the LCT, or on the single paper feed cabinet or the double paper feed cabinet. 17 Job Separator JS-601 Copy exit tray installed on finisher FS-501 Referred to as the "job separator" throughout the manual. 18 Main unit The document is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C252" throughout the manual. 19 Fax Kit FK-502* Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine 20 Mount Kit MK-706* Required to mount the fax kit and local interface kit 21 Mount Kit MK-704* Installed when using this machine as a fax machine 22 Scan Accelerator Kit SA-501* Creates images at high speed when sending scans, and allows scan jobs saved in boxes to be printed. 23 Local Interface Kit EK-702* Used for making a local connection between this machine and the computer 24 Dehumidifer Heater 1C* Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to prevent humidity from collecting in the paper 25 Security Kit SC-503* Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can be used more safely. No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-6 bizhub C252 Outside of machine * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover and LCT installed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-7 No. Part Name Description 1 Original cover pad Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in place 2 Automatic duplex unit Turns over the paper for double-sided printing 3 Multiple bypass tray Used when printing onto paper with a size not loaded into a paper tray or onto thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes or label sheets Holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper, 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards or label sheets, or 10 envelopes Referred to as the "bypass tray" throughout the manual. (See p. 3-59.) 4 LCT Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of plain paper 5 Tray release button Pressed in order to pull out the paper tray for the LCT 6 2nd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper (See p. 3-55.) 7 1st tray Can be loaded with up to 250 sheets of plain paper, can be set to different paper sizes, and can be loaded with up to 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets, or envelopes (See p. 3-49.) 8 Front door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge or turning the main power switch on and off. (See p. 10-6.) 9 Copy exit tray Collects printed pages 3 Before making copies 3-8 bizhub C252 * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional ADF and double paper feed cabinet installed. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 10 11 12 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-9 No. Part Name Description 10 Document feed tray Loaded with documents facing up (See p. 4-9.) 11 Document exit tray Collects documents that have been scanned 12 Misfeed-clearing cover Opened when clearing document misfeeds 13 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Pressed to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 14 Automatic duplex unit release lever Used to open the automatic duplex unit door when clearing paper misfeeds 15 Automatic duplex unit door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the automatic duplex unit 16 Upper right-side door release lever Used to open the upper right-side door 17 Center right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the 2nd tray 18 Center right-side door release lever Used to open the center right-side door 19 Lower right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the 3rd or 4th trays or from the LCT 20 Lower right-side door release lever Used to open the lower right-side door when clearing paper misfeeds 21 4th tray/storage tray Used for storage when the single paper feed cabinet is installed Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper when the double paper feed cabinet is installed (See p. 3-55.) 22 3rd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper (See p. 3-55.) 23 Control panel Used to specify the various settings (See p. 3-22.) 24 Adjustable document guide Adjusted to the width of the document (See p. 4-9.) 3 Before making copies 3-10 bizhub C252 * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional ADF, LCT, fax multi line and dehumidifier heater installed. 25 27 28 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 29 39 38 26 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-11 No. Part Name Description 25 ADF connector Used for connecting the ADF hookup cord 26 Filter 1 Collects the toner dust generated in the machine 27 Power connector Used for connecting the power cord 28 Dehumidifier heater power switch Used to turn the dehumidifier heater on and off. Turning on the dehumidifier heater reduces moisture in the paper. This switch is used when the optional dehumidifier heater is installed. 29 Filter 2 Collects the toner dust generated in the machine 30 TEL jack 2 Used for connecting a telephone 31 LINE jack 2 Used for connecting a general subscriber line. This jack is used when the optional fax multi line is installed. 32 TEL jack 1 Used for connecting a telephone 33 LINE jack 1 Used for connecting the general subscriber line 34 IEEE1284 port (type C) Used for connecting the parallel cable from the computer 35 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1-compliant Used for connecting a USB cable from the computer 36 Internal controller port Used for connecting the internal controller 37 Network connector (10 Base-T/100 Base -TX) Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning 38 Ozone filter Collects the ozone generated in the machine 39 Finisher connector Used for connecting the finisher hookup cord 3 Before making copies 3-12 bizhub C252 Inside of machine No. Part Name Description 1 Original glass Place a document on the glass so that it can be scanned. (See p. 4-11.) 2 Document transfer belt Feeds the document loaded into the ADF 3 Fusing unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing unit 4 M2 release levers Used when printing on envelopes. Used when clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing unit. 5 Main unit right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from inside the main unit 6 Unlocking knob Used when removing the imaging units 7 Imaging unit Creates the print image 8 Charger-cleaning tool Used to clean the electrostatic charger wire, for example, when incorrect copies are produced (See p. 11-7.) 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 9 8 10 13 11 12 14 15 16 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-13 9 Print head glass cleaning tool Used to clean the surface of the print head glass, for example, when replacing the imaging unit 10 Waste toner box Collects used waste toner 11 Waste toner box release lever Used when removing the waste toner box 12 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off (See p. 3-30) 13 Total counter Shows the total number of pages that have been printed 14 Locking tab Used when removing the toner cartridges 15 Toner cartridges There are four toner cartridges: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). The combination of the four toners generates full-color images. 16 Document scales Position the document so that it is aligned with the scales. Also, use the scales to measure the loaded document. (See p. 4-11.) No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-14 bizhub C252 Finisher FS-603/punch kit PK-501 No. Part Name Description 1 Exit tray 1 Collects printed pages 2 Upper door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds (See p. 6-35.) 3 Horizontal transport unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the horizontal transport unit (See p. 6-35.) 4 Hole-punch waste container Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that has accumulated from using the Punch settings (See p. 10-42.) 5 Misfeed-clearing guide Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-35.) 6 Right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-35.) 2 3 4 5 7 6 1 13 12 10 11 9 8 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-15 * Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in the illustration. 7 Exit tray 2 Collects copies printed using the "Fold & Staple" setting 8 Misfeed-clearing dial in folding section Turned when clearing paper misfeeds in the folding section (See p. 6-35.) 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler unit when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.) 10 Misfeed-clearing dial 1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-35.) 11 Misfeed-clearing dial 2 Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge, or for moving the staple cartridge holder out to the front (See p. 10-26.) 12 Stapler unit Pulled out when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.) 13 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.) 14 Punch kit* Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch kit PK-501 is installed onto finisher FS-603 No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-16 bizhub C252 Finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601 No. Part Name Description 1 Front door FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 2 Misfeed-clearing dials FN5 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 3 Exit tray 2 Collects printed pages 4 Exit tray 1 Collects printed pages 5 Exit tray 3 Feeds out printed pages when job separator JS- 601 is installed onto finisher FS-501 6 Job separator cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the job separator (See p. 6-31.) 7 Misfeed-clearing guide FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 13 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-17 8 Misfeed-clearing guide FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 9 Upper cover FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 10 Horizontal transport unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the horizontal transport unit (See p. 6-31.) 11 Misfeed-clearing guide FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 12 Stapler Used to staple pages 13 Jammed-staple-clearing dial Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge, or for moving the stapler to the center (See p. 10-10, p. 10-24.) No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-18 bizhub C252 Saddle stitcher SD-503/mailbin kit MT-501 Saddle stitcher SD-503 Mailbin kit MT-501 No. Part name Description 1 Copy output tray Collects copies 2 Misfeed-clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher No. Part name Description 3 Mailbins Collects printed pages 4 Misfeed-clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 5 Lever [FN7] Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 4 3 5 2 1 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-19 Finisher FS-514/output tray OT-601/punch kit PK-510 1 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 8 3 Before making copies 3-20 bizhub C252 Finisher FS-514 Output tray OT-601 Punch kit PK-510 Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in the illustration. No. Part name Description 1 Output tray 1 Collects copies that are fed out 2 Output tray 2 Collects copies that are fed out 3 Dial [FN6] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 4 Dial [FN5] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 5 Dial [FN4] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 6 Dial [FN2] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 7 Lever [FN1] Raised when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 8 Hole-punch waste container Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that has accumulated from using the punch settings 9 Lever [FN3] Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 10 Stapler Moved to the front when clearing jammed staples 11 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler when replacing the staple cartridge or clearing jammed staples 12 Dial Turned to move the stapler to the front when clearing jammed staples No. Part name Description 13 Optional output tray Collects copies No. Part name Description 14 Punch Kit* Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch kit PK-510 is installed onto finisher FS- 514 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-21 Precautions for using the finisher: - When moving the finisher, do not grab the exit tray. - Do not place objects below the output trays of the finisher. - Do not place objects on top of the saddle stitcher or mailbin kit. 3 Before making copies 3-22 bizhub C252 Control panel No. Part Name Description 1 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine is in Low Power mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 2 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 3 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 4 [Box] key Press to enter Box mode. While the machine is in Box mode, the indicator on the [Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. 5 [Fax] key Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the Facsimle Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. 6 [Scan] key Press to enter Scan mode. While the machine is in Scan mode, the indicator on the [Scan] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 20 1918 17 15 13 22 23 24 16 14 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-23 7 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. 8 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 9 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 10 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 11 [Stop] key Press the [Stop] key during copying to stop the copy operation. 12 [Start] key Press to start copying. When this machine is ready to begin copying, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, copying cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3. 13 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch 14 Data indicator Flashes in green while a print job is being received Lights up in green while a print job is queued to be printed or while it is printing 15 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single sample copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. (See p. 5-6.) 16 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 17 [C] (clear) key Press to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 18 [Mode Check] key Press to display screens showing the specified settings. 19 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 20 [Mode Memory] key Press to register the desired copy settings as a program or to recall a registered copy program. (See p. 5-15.) 21 Contrast dial Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel. 22 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-24 bizhub C252 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 23 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying user accessibility functions. 24 [Help] key Press to display the Main Help Menu screen, where descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. (See p. 5-18.) No. Part Name Description Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-25 Basic settings screen (Basic screen) When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel. TYPE 1 TYPE 2 2 3 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 10 5 9 8 6 7 4 3 Before making copies 3-26 bizhub C252 ! Detail The Basic screen (TYPE1 or TYPE2) that appears can be set with the "Copy Initial Screen Setting" parameter in the Display Setting screen (displayed from the User Setting screen). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with TYPE1 and TYPE2; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "TYPE1" is selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when "TYPE1" is selected. For details on switching between the two types of Basic screens, refer to "Display setting" on page 13-30. If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a solid line. No. Item Name Description 1 Sub display area The results of operations and settings are displayed. 2 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed. Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available. (See p. 12-3.) 3 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations that must be performed are displayed here. 4 Functions/settings display Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed. Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 5 Image display An image of the specified settings, such as stapling and hole punching, are displayed. 6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, uncollating, stapling, or hole punching. (See p. 4-81.) 7 [Fold & Staple] button Touch to specify the function for folding and binding pages. 8 [Save in User Box] button Touch to save the data of scanned image in a box. Various commands are available to specify the box where the data is to be saved and whether or not the data is printed when it is saved. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. 9 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the document in separate batches. A document scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job. (See p. 4-13.) 10 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-27 Icons that appear in the screen Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode Indicates that this machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray Indicates that not much paper remains in the paper tray Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON" 3 Before making copies 3-28 bizhub C252 3.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then push down on the control panel. The control panel stops at the middle position. 1 Upper position (base position) 2 Middle position 3 Lower position Control panel release lever Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-29 2 To adjust the control panel to an even steeper angle, pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then push down on the control panel. The control panel stops at the lower position. 3 To return the control panel to the upper position, pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull up on the control panel. 3 Before making copies 3-30 bizhub C252 3.3 Turning on the Main Power and the Auxiliary Power This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. To turn on the machine The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned on. The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 1 Open the machine’s front door, and then set the main power switch to [ | ]. 2 Close the front door. 3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button. Check that the touch panel is turned on. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-31 ! Detail When the control panel is turned on by pressing the [Power] (auxiliary power) button, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears. After a few seconds, the message "Now warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green, indicating that a job can now be queued. The default settings are those that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to “n”) and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For details, refer to "Initial setting" on page 13-32. The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory. 2 Note A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed. For details, refer to "To scan during warm-up" on page 3-32. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. The machine takes about 110 seconds to warm up at normal room temperature (23°C) when the control panel is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key after the machine is turned on using the main power switch. 3 Before making copies 3-32 bizhub C252 To scan during warm-up 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange. ? How is the machine turned on? % For details on turning on the machine, refer to "To turn on the machine" on page 3-30. 2 Check that the message "Now warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel . – After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green. 3 Position the document to be copied. ? How is the document positioned? % For details on positioning the document to be copied, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 4 Specify any necessary copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies. ? How is the number of copies specified? % For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General copy operation" on page 4-3. 6 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs. 7 Check that the document has finished being scanned, and then position the next document. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-33 8 Specify new copy settings and the desired number of copies, and then press the [Start] key. – After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed in the order that they were queued. ? How is the printing of a job stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. ! Detail While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and a document can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed. The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Current Jobs list of the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3. 3 Before making copies 3-34 bizhub C252 To turn off the machine 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button. – Check that the touch panel is turned off. 2 Open the machine’s front door. 3 Set the main power switch to [o]. 4 Close the front door. 2 Reminder When the main power switch is turned off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to turn it on after turning it off. If there is no wait period between turning the main power switch off, then on again, the machine may not function properly. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted. ! Detail The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off. Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-35 Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset) If the [Reset] key is not pressed and no operation is performed for a specified length of time, settings that have not been programmed, such as the number of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings. This is the automatic panel reset operation. As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute. ! Detail The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. Automatically canceling the mode screen (automatic system reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority. This is the automatic system reset operation. As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute. ! Detail The mode screen that is displayed when the automatic system reset operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 3 Before making copies 3-36 bizhub C252 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is the Low Power mode. The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes. To recover from Low Power mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 30 seconds at normal room temperature (23°C)). 2 Note As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode. Settings in the Administrator mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27, page 13-38. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-37 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes. To recover from Sleep mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 110 seconds at normal room temperature (23°C)). 2 Note The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes have elapsed. The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27, page 13-38. 3 Before making copies 3-38 bizhub C252 Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode. % Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button). – As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode. ! Detail Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the [Power Save] key is pressed can be set from the Administrator mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-39 Automatically turning the machine on/off (weekly timer) The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator or limitations on the use of the machine can be specified. This is the weekly timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the weekly timer is being used. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. ? How is the weekly timer set? % For details on setting the weekly timer, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours. ? How is the password for non-business hours specified? % For details on specifying the password for non-business hours, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 3 Touch [OK]. The message "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input amount of time prior to entering Sleep Mode." appears on the touch panel. 3 Before making copies 3-40 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode again. Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes. ? How can a single digit be input? % First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the setting changes to 5 minutes. In addition, a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified. 5 Touch [OK]. The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel. 2 Note As the factory default, the weekly timer is not set. If the message "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input amount of time prior to entering Sleep Mode." or "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input password to interrupt timer." appears after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed, the weekly timer is set. ! Detail During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual. From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from Administrator mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours" parameter is "OFF" (the screen is not displayed). Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-41 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication) If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered can use this machine. 0 When user authentication has been set, only users that enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 Contact your administrator for account passwords. 0 A total of 1000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [User Name]. – If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [List] do not appear. 3 Before making copies 3-42 bizhub C252 – If "Active Directory" was selected for external server authentication, [Domain Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch [Domain Name] to display the names of servers registered with "Active Directory", and then select the desired server. For details on specifying settings for an external server, refer to "To select an authentication method" on page 13-98. 2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-43 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 5 Press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 3 Before making copies 3-44 bizhub C252 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes]. The user authentication screen appears again. ! Detail For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User authentication/account track" on page 13-50. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-45 2 Note The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and then log on by using the account track input screen. User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication Setting parameters in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. For details on specifying public user settings, refer to "To select an authentication method" on page 13-98 and "Authenticating public users" on page 13-106. If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. 3 Before making copies 3-46 bizhub C252 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track) If account track has been set by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled. This is account track. 0 When account track has been set, only users that enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 Contact your administrator for account passwords. 0 A total of 1000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [Account Name]. – If the Administrator mode settings have been set to "Password Only", touch [Input], and then continue with step 4. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-47 2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 3 Before making copies 3-48 bizhub C252 5 Press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes]. The account track screen appears again. ! Detail If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of Administrator mode was set to "Password Only", log on is possible by only entering the password. For details, refer to "User authentication/account track" on page 13-50. The accounts can be managed using the User Authentication Setting and Account Track Setting functions in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "User authentication/account track" on page 13-50. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-49 3.4 Loading paper into the 1st tray To load paper (1st tray) 1 Pull out the 1st tray. 2 Press down on the paper-lifting plate until it locks into place. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded. ? How is non-standard sized paper loaded? % First load the paper, and then adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper. Paper-lifting plate Paper take-up roller Lateral guide 3 Before making copies 3-50 bizhub C252 4 For paper exceeding A3 size, adjust the trailing-edge guides as shown in the illustration. 5 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. – Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. ? How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % No more than 250 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. No more than 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets or envelopes can be loaded. % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 6 Close the 1st tray. – If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 7. Trailing-edge guide , mark Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-51 7 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 8 Push up the fusing unit cover. 9 Push down the left and right release levers M2 to the position. 10 Close the fusing unit cover. 11 Close the upper right-side door. – After printing envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers to their center positions. M2 3 Before making copies 3-52 bizhub C252 ! Detail When loading paper exceeding A3 size into the 1st tray, the paper can have a width up to 311.1 mm and a length up to 457.2 mm. For details on specifying the paper size for the 1st tray, refer to "To specify a paper size (set size settings)" on page 8-12. If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For details, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hands. If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper. Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed, otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur. When loading envelopes, load them in the w orientation with the flap side down, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side up, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-53 When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector transparencies in the w orientation. When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation. 3 Before making copies 3-54 bizhub C252 Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-55 3.5 Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray To load paper (2nd, 3rd or 4th tray) 1 Pull out the paper tray. 2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded. 3 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. Lateral guide Film , mark 3 Before making copies 3-56 bizhub C252 – Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. ? How many sheets of paper can be loaded? % No more than 500 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. In addition, no more than150 sheets of thick paper can be loaded. % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 4 Close the paper tray. 2 Reminder If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper. For details on the paper that can be loaded into the 2nd tray, 3rd tray and 4th tray, refer to "Copy paper/original documents" on page 8-3. Be careful not to touch the film. 2 Note To print on overhead projector transparencies and envelopes, use the bypass tray or the 1st tray. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-57 3.6 Loading paper into the LCT To load paper (LCT) 0 If the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, even while the main power switch is on, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure that the machine is turned on with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. 1 Press the tray release button. 2 Pull out the LCT. 3 Load the paper into the right side of the LCT so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. Film , mark 3 Before making copies 3-58 bizhub C252 4 Load the paper into the left side of the LCT so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. – Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. 5 Close the LCT. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film. Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. For details on the paper that can be loaded into the LCT, refer to "Copy paper/original documents" on page 8-3. 2 Note If the machine has entered Low Power mode or Sleep mode, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure to first cancel Low Power mode or Sleep mode. , mark Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-59 3.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies or label sheets. To load paper (bypass tray) 1 Open the bypass tray. – When loading large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. Tray extension Lateral guides 3 Before making copies 3-60 bizhub C252 4 Select the paper type. – To print on colored paper, envelopes, or letterheads, touch [ ], and then select the paper type. – If “A6 Card w” is selected, the paper type is automatically set to "Thick 2". – If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 5. – For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on page 8-15. – For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "To specify a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings)" on page 8-22. – For details on special paper, refer to "Special paper" on page 8-6. ? What should be done if media other than postcards are inserted? % Select the appropriate paper type. ? What paper type is selected when label sheets are loaded? % Select "Thick 1". Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-61 5 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 6 Push up the fusing unit cover. 7 Push down the left and right release levers M2 to the position. 8 Close the fusing unit cover. 9 Close the upper right-side door. M2 3 Before making copies 3-62 bizhub C252 2 Reminder After printing on envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers to their center positions, otherwise decreased image quality may result when printing on plain paper. Do not load so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the + mark. Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation. A maximum of 20 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-63 When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector transparencies in the w orientation. A maximum of 20 overhead projector transparencies can be loaded into the bypass tray. Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed, otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur. 3 Before making copies 3-64 bizhub C252 When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side down, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on. A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray. Flap side Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-65 When loading label sheets, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load label sheets in the v orientation. A maximum of 20 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray. Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. 2 Note The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. Side to be printed on 3 Before making copies 3-66 bizhub C252 ! Detail For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray, refer to "To specify a paper size (set size settings)" on page 8-12. For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 8-3. 4 Basic copy operations Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-3 4 Basic copy operations 4.1 General copy operation This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided document using basic copy operations. 2 Note Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 4-6. To make a copy 1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode. 2 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 4 Basic copy operations 4-4 bizhub C252 3 Specify the necessary copy settings. – The default settings when this machine is purchased are listed below. [Color]: Auto Color [Paper]: Auto Paper Select [Zoom]: Full size (e 1.000) [Simplex/Duplex]: 1 1 [Quality/Density]: Text/Photo – For details on specifying Original settings, refer to "Specifying original settings" on page 4-24. – For details on selecting a Color setting, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. – For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to "Selecting a paper setting" on page 4-43. – For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 4-46. – For details on specifying a Simplex/Duplex setting, refer to "Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex settings)" on page 4-59. – For details on selecting the quality of the document, refer to "Selecting the quality of the document" on page 4-65. – For details on specifying the density settings, refer to "Specifying the density settings" on page 4-70. – For details on selecting a Combine Originals setting, refer to "Selecting a combine originals setting" on page 4-77. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to "Selecting finishing settings" on page 4-81. – For details on specifying the "Fold & Staple" function, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. – For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer to "Application functions" on page 9-3. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-5 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. 5 Press the [Start] key. – To stop the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – The next copy operation can be queued while a copy operation is being performed. For details, refer to "Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation)" on page 4-103. 4 Basic copy operations 4-6 bizhub C252 4.2 Operations that cannot be combined Certain copy settings cannot be used together. Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring. - The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.) Operations where the setting specified last is given priority The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting is described below. 1 Select the [ 2 Position] Staple setting. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-7 2 Set the "Booklet" function. The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically cancelled, and the "Booklet" function is set. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. 4 Basic copy operations 4-8 bizhub C252 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined, those settings cannot be specified together. The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the "Booklet" function is described below. 1 Set the "Booklet" function. 2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. The message "This mode is not available with Booklet." appears and the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be selected. The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple setting is canceled. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-9 4.3 Feeding the document The document can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the document correctly according to the type of document being copied. To load the document into the ADF 0 The ADF is an option. 0 For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. 0 Do not load documents that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 0 If the document is not loaded correctly, the document may not be fed in straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the document. – If large-sized documents are to be loaded, pull out the document support. Document Feed Method Features Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page document can be fed automatically. This feed method can also be used with double-sided documents, and is perfect for multi-page double-sided documents. Using the original glass The document is placed directly on the original glass, then scanned. This method is best with books and other documents that cannot be fed through the ADF. Document support 4 Basic copy operations 4-10 bizhub C252 2 Load the document face up in the document feed tray. – Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 3 Adjust the document guides to the size of the document. – For details on loading documents of mixed sizes, refer to "Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)" on page 4-24. – For details on loading thick documents, refer to "Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting)" on page 4-26. – For details on selecting the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. – For details on selecting the position of the binding margin, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)" on page 4-32. Adjustable document guide Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-11 To place the document on the original glass 0 For details on the types of documents that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. 0 When placing the document on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the document is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct document size will not be detected. 0 Do not place objects weighing more than 2 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread placed on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the original cover, or ADF if it is installed. When a document is being scanned with the original cover or ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous. 1 Lift open the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. 2 Position the document face down onto the original glass. – Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the left side of the machine. When loaded in the v orientation: When loaded in the w orientation: 4 Basic copy operations 4-12 bizhub C252 3 Align the document with the mark in the back-left corner of the document scales. – For details on selecting the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. – For details on selecting the position of the binding margin, refer "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)" on page 4-32. – For transparent or translucent documents, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the document over the document. – For bound documents spread over two facing pages, such as a book or magazine, position the top of the document toward the back of this machine and align the document with the mark in the back-left corner of the document scales, as shown. 4 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. Document scales Blank sheet of paper Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-13 Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting) A large document can be divided and scanned in a number of batches. A maximum of 100 document pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by copying with the "Separate Scan" setting, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. 0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) or 38 sheets of thick paper (210 g/m2). 0 Either "Auto Print" or "Batch Print" can be selected as the print setting when scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting. The default setting is "Auto Print". For details on selecting the print setting for scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. – To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it. 4 Basic copy operations 4-14 bizhub C252 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while the document is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5. 4 Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this step until all pages of the document have been scanned. – If the document cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the upper-right corner of the Basic screen. – To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "To change scan settings for each document" on page 4-36. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-15 – The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original Size 5 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-16 bizhub C252 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Yes] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. Otherwise, touch [No] is touched to return to step 3. 6 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-17 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. Otherwise, touch [Cancel Change] to cancel the changes to the settings. 4 Basic copy operations 4-18 bizhub C252 Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page document on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided document pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies. 0 Either "Auto Print" or "Batch Print" can be selected as the print setting when scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting. The default setting is "Auto Print". For details on selecting the print setting for scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. 1 Lift open the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. 2 Position the first page or the first side of the document face down onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "To place the document on the original glass" on page 4-11. 3 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. When loaded in the v orientation: When loaded in the w orientation: Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-19 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. 5 Touch [1%2]. – The screens that appear differ depending on the options that are installed. 4 Basic copy operations 4-20 bizhub C252 6 Touch [Binding Direction], select the binding position for the copies, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "To select double-sided copies" on page 4-62. 7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-21 10 Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this step until all pages of the document have been scanned. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the upper-right corner of the Basic screen. – To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "To change scan settings for each document" on page 4-36. – The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original Size 11 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-22 bizhub C252 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Yes] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. Otherwise, touch [No] is touched to return to step 9. 12 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-23 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. Otherwise, touch [Cancel Change] to cancel the changes to the settings. 4 Basic copy operations 4-24 bizhub C252 4.4 Specifying original settings The following procedure describes how to specify the type of document to be copied. Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting) Documents of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. The possible combinations of document sizes differ depending on the widest document loaded (position of the adjustable document guides of the ADF). 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 0 If the document is not loaded correctly, the document may not be fed in straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the largest page. – If large-sized documents are to be loaded, pull out the document support. – For details on the document sizes that can be mixed in the ADF, refer to "Documents that can be loaded into the ADF" on page 8-29. 2 Arrange the document pages so that the side to be copied (first page) faces up, as shown in the illustration. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-25 3 Load the document face up in the document feed tray. Slide the adjustable document guides against the edges of the document. – Load the document pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. Adjustable document guide 4 Basic copy operations 4-26 bizhub C252 Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting) When copying thick documents with a weight of 129 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 loaded into the ADF, select the "Thick Original" setting. 0 When the "Thick Original" setting is selected, a maximum of 38 document pages can be loaded into the ADF. For details on thick documents, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. Adjustable document guide Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-27 3 Touch [Thick Original]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-28 bizhub C252 Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings) When copying double-sided documents, making double-sided copies, or using a Combine Originals setting, specify the document orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 2 Note The default setting is the first setting (with the top of the document at the top (toward the back of the machine)). Document Loading Orientation Using the ADF Using the Original Glass Icon Description Select this setting for a document loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for a document loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. • Select this setting for a document loaded into the ADF with the top of the document toward the left side of this machine. • Select this setting for a document placed on the original glass with the top of the document toward the right side of this machine. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-29 • Select this setting for a document loaded into the ADF with the top of the document toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for a document placed on the original glass with the top of the document toward the left side of this machine. Using the ADF Using the Original Glass Icon Description 4 Basic copy operations 4-30 bizhub C252 To specify an original direction setting 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Direction]. The Original Direction screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-31 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-32 bizhub C252 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings) If a double-sided document is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the document by specifying the binding margin position for the document. 2 Note The default setting is "Auto". Document Binding Margin Position Margin Setting Icon Description Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the top. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-33 When the document length is 297 mm or less: Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 2 Note If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. When the document length is more than 297 mm: Margin Setting Icon Description 4 Basic copy operations 4-34 bizhub C252 To specify a margin setting 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. – When loading a document with a binding margin, position the top of the document toward the back of the machine. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Margin]. The Page Margin screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-35 4 Touch the button for the desired margin position, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-36 bizhub C252 To change scan settings for each document When copying using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page documents are placed on the original glass, the scan settings can be changed for each document. The following procedure describes how to change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-37 5 Touch the key of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting, and then touch [OK]. – The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original Size 4 Basic copy operations 4-38 bizhub C252 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change]. Simplex/Duplex screen Original Bind Position screen Center Erase screen Original Size Setting screen Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-39 – For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 4-46. For details on specifying a zoom ratio, refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on page 9-71. 4 Basic copy operations 4-40 bizhub C252 4.5 Selecting a color setting The following five Color settings are available. 2 Note The default setting is "Auto Color". Color Setting Description Auto Color Select this setting to automatically detect whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white, and then select the appropriate Color setting ("Full Color" or "Black"). Full Color Select this setting to print the copy in full color, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. 2 Color Select this setting to print all areas of the scanned document determined to be in color with the specified color, and print all areas determined to be black in black. (The color used for the areas printed in color are: red, yellow, blue, magenta, green or cyan. Refer to page 1-35.) Black Select this setting to print the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. Single Color Select this setting to print copies in the specified color, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. (The color used for printing the copy can be set to one of the 21 available. Refer to page 1-34.) When the "Single Color" setting is selected, the following two methods for reproducing gradations in documents are available. Relative luminosity: The document will be copied using monocolor concentration variations to express color differences (color shading that can be seen with the eye) and gradation levels. This enables the color of markers, the blue lines in graphing paper and the red of stamps to be distinctly reproduced in copies. Average brightness: The document will be copied using monocolor concentration variations to only express gradation levels, regardless of the color differences in the original document. This is useful for producing monocolor copies of documents containing gradation differences, such as magazines and newspapers, and for offsetting the yellow tint in documents that have yellowed. To select this method, touch [Solid]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-41 To select a color setting The following procedure describes how to select a Color setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Color]. The Color screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired Color setting. 4 Basic copy operations 4-42 bizhub C252 – If the "2 Color" setting was selected, touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. One of the colors for the "2 Color" setting is black, which cannot be changed. In this step, touch the button for the second color. – If the "Single Color" setting was selected, touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ], and then select the desired color. If desired, touch [Solid]. – If the "Solid" setting is not selected, the relative luminosity method is selected. – To use the average brightness method for reproducing gradations in monocolor documents, touch [Solid]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-43 4.6 Selecting a paper setting The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. 2 Note If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto Paper Select" setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected.) This setting is useful for paper trays loaded with special paper. For details, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25. The default setting is "Auto Paper Select". For details on the operations that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 4-6. The "Auto Zoom" and "Auto Paper Select" settings cannot be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Zoom" setting was selected, the Zoom screen appears. In the Zoom screen, specify the desired zoom setting. 4 Basic copy operations 4-44 bizhub C252 Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) The size of the loaded document is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "×1.0" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the document is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto Paper Select]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-45 Manually selecting the desired paper size 0 By also selecting the "Auto Zoom" setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto Zoom" setting, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)" on page 4-44. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-46 bizhub C252 4.7 Specifying a zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. The following procedure describes how to specify the Zoom setting. Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting) The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 The "Auto Zoom" and "Auto Paper Select" settings cannot be selected together. If the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected, the Paper screen appears. In the Paper screen, specify the desired Paper setting. 0 If the "Auto Zoom" setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the document, load the document with the same orientation as the paper. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-47 2 Touch [Auto Zoom]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-48 bizhub C252 Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document (“×1.0” setting) A copy that is the same size as the document (e1.000) is produced. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e0.001 intervals. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [×1.0]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-49 Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting) A document image can be printed slightly smaller (x0.930) than the original document size. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e 0.001 increments. 0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between e0.900 and e0.999). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Minimal]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-50 bizhub C252 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (enlarge and reduce settings) The most appropriate zoom ratio can be selected for copying from a common standard document size to a standard paper size. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e0.001 increments. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio according to the document and paper sizes. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-51 Typing In the zoom ratio (XY Zoom setting) By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between e0.250 and e4.000 can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. 0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing the zoom ratio, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-52 bizhub C252 3 Use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-53 Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings) By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction (between e0.250 and e 4.000) and for the vertical direction (between e0.250 and e4.000). By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be adjusted as shown in the following illustration. 0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-54 bizhub C252 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000) for the X direction. 4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000) for the Y direction. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-55 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-56 bizhub C252 Selecting a stored zoom ratio Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired. In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e 0.001 increments. 0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-57 Storing the desired zoom ratio Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting can be stored. 0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The default zoom ratios (e4.000, e2.000 and e0.500) are stored. When a new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button. 0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between e0.900 and e0.999. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-58 bizhub C252 3 Use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000). – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [Set Zoom]. 5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The specified zoom ratio is stored. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-59 4.8 Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex settings) The type of document and copy can be specified. The following four Simplex/Duplex settings are available. The following procedures describe how to select a Simplex/Duplex setting. Simplex/Duplex Description 1%1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided documents. 1%2 Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided documents. 2%1 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided document. 2%2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided documents. 4 Basic copy operations 4-60 bizhub C252 To select single-sided copies 0 The default setting is "1%1". 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. 2 Touch [1%1] or [2%1]. – If "2%1" is selected, specify the binding direction and the original direction, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 297 mm or less. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-61 – The screens that appear differ depending on the options that are installed. – For a double-sided document, touch [Binding Direction], select the binding position for the document, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 4 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-62 bizhub C252 To select double-sided copies 0 The default setting is "1%1". 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. 2 Touch [1%2] or [2%2]. – Specify the binding direction and the original direction, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 297 mm or less. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-63 – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is set at the top or at the left. 3 Touch [Binding Direction]. – For a single-sided document, select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – For a double-sided document, select the binding positions for the document and the copy, and then touch [OK]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-64 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-65 4.9 Selecting the quality of the document Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings) Select the setting for the text and image type of the document to better adjust the copy quality. The Original Type settings are available. 2 Note The default setting is "Printed Photo" in the "Text/Photo" category. Icon Description Text Select this setting when copying documents containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo Photo Paper Select this setting when copying photos from documents containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced. Printed Photo Select this setting when copying printed documents containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Photo Photo Paper Select this setting when copying photos from documents onto photographic paper. Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. A smooth copy image is produced. Printed Photo Select this setting when copying printed documents, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. 4 Basic copy operations 4-66 bizhub C252 The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting. Special Quality Map Select this setting when copying documents with a background color or documents containing pencil markings or fine colored lines. A sharp copy image is produced. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying documents consisting only of text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, providing text that is easy to read. Copied Paper Select this setting when copying images (documents) printed with this machine. Icon Description Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-67 To specify an original type setting 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded document. – For a document that contains only text, touch [Text]. – For a document that contains both text and photos, touch [Text/Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-68 bizhub C252 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – For a document that contains photos, touch [Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-69 – For a document that contains maps or faint text, touch [Special Quality] to display the Special Quality screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK]. The Quality/Density screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-70 bizhub C252 4.10 Specifying the density settings The density can be adjusted to print a copy that is darker or lighter than the current print result. The following three density adjustments are available. The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings. Density Settings Description Density The density of the print image can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Background Removal The density of the background color of the document can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Std.] to select the seventh setting from the "Light" end. Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the document being copied. Text Enhancement Select one of nine settings for the reproduction quality of text when copying documents consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background). Each time [Lighter Text] or [Darker Text] is touched, the text density is lightened or darkened by one level. To emphasize the text on the background, touch [Darker Text] to adjust the setting toward +. To de-emphasize the text on the background, touch [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward –. Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-71 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 2 Touch [Change] under "Density". The Density screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-72 bizhub C252 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-73 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 2 Touch [Change] under "Background Removal". The Background Removal screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-74 bizhub C252 3 Select the desired background density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the third setting from the right (default setting), touch [Std.]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the document being copied. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-75 Adjusting the reproduction quality of text 0 The default setting is "0". 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 2 Touch [Text Enhancement]. The Text Enhancement screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-76 bizhub C252 3 Select the desired text density setting. – Each time [Lighter Text] or [Darker Text] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting ("0") of the nine levels. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-77 4.11 Selecting a combine originals setting Document images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. ! Detail When a Combine Originals setting is selected, the auto display zoom ratio is selected, and the document image is copied at a reduced size. The auto display zoom ratios for each setting are listed below. 2 in 1: e0.707 4 in 1: e0.500 8 in 1: e0.353 2 Note The default setting is the Auto Display Zoom Ratio. By using the "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode, the machine can be set so that the auto display zoom ratios are not recalled. For details, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. 4 Basic copy operations 4-78 bizhub C252 The following three Combine Originals settings are available. Combine Originals Setting Description 2 in 1 Select this setting to print two document pages on one page. 4 in 1 Select this setting to print four document pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction settings) can be specified. 8 in 1 Select this setting to print eight document pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction settings) can be specified. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-79 The following procedure describes how to select a Combine Originals setting. Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine Originals) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 2 Select the desired combination of pages. – Select the page arrangement according to the orientation and number of pages. If "4 in 1" or "8 in 1" was selected, the page arrangement for "Vertical" and "Horizontal" can be viewed in the sub display area. However, this appears only if the "Sub Screen Display Type" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Setting value". 4 Basic copy operations 4-80 bizhub C252 – If "4 in 1" or "8 in 1" was selected, touch [Horizontal] or [Vertical] to specify the page arrangement. – To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-81 4.12 Selecting finishing settings Various settings are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the copy exit tray. 2 Note The factory default setting is "Group". ! Detail If no finisher is installed and the following conditions are met, printed copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 2 Note From Administrator mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being shifted when the finisher FS-514 is installed. As a factory default, "Offset by Each Job Setting" is set to "ON". For details on specifying the setting for offset feeding when the finisher FS-514 is installed, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 4 Basic copy operations 4-82 bizhub C252 The following five Finishing settings are available. Finishing Setting Description Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page document (collated). Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page document (uncollated). Offset If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-83 The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings. 2 Note The Staple settings and Punch settings differ depending on the installed finisher. Available Staple and Punch settings Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples. Punch Select this setting to punch holes (4 holes) in the copies for filing them. Finishing Setting Description Finisher FS-603 Finisher FS-501 Finisher FS-514 Staple settings" Corner" & "2 Position" o — o Staple setting "Corner" o o o Punch setting With punch kit PK-501 installed o — With punch kit PK-510 installed o 4 Basic copy operations 4-84 bizhub C252 Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting) 0 The factory default setting is "Group". 0 If "Offset" is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following conditions are met. 0 A4- or B5-size paper is used. 0 Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Sort]. – To separate each set of copies, touch [Offset]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-85 – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-86 bizhub C252 Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting) 0 The default setting is "Group". 0 If "Offset" is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following conditions are met. 0 A4- or B5-size paper is used. 0 Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-87 2 Touch [Group]. – To separate each set of pages, touch [Offset]. – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-88 bizhub C252 Stapling copies (Staple settings) Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. When Finisher FS-603 is installed Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected with either measurement) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A4 w/v, B5 w/v 1,000 sheets 150 mm A3 w, B4 w 500 sheets 75 mm Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets One place towards the back One place towards the front Two places A4 w or smaller 2 sheets 100 sets 40 sets 40 sets 3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 40 sets 40 sets 6 to 10 sheets 60 sets 40 sets 40 sets 11 to 20 sheets 30 sets 30 sets 30 sets 21 to 30 sheets 30 sets 30 sets 30 sets 31 to 50 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets B4 w or larger 2 sheets 100 sets 50 sets 50 sets 3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 40 sets 40 sets 6 to 10 sheets 40 sets 40 sets 40 sets 11 to 20 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 21 to 25 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-89 When Finisher FS-501 is installed ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. A Staple setting cannot be used together with the "Offset" setting. If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the document is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled, otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired. For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected with either measurement) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A4 w/v, B5 w/v 1,000 sheets 150 mm A3 w, B4 w 500 sheets 75 mm Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets 2 sheets 100 sets 200 sheets 3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 400 sheets 6 to 10 sheets 60 sets 600 sheets 11 to 20 sheets 40 sets 800 sheets 21 to 30 sheets 33 sets 1,000 sheets 4 Basic copy operations 4-90 bizhub C252 When Finisher FS-514 is installed Examples of the possible number of bound pages - 50 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper - 2 sheets of 209 g/m2 paper + 48 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper - Maximum of 30 sheets of 91 to 150 g/m2 paper ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 148.5 mm and 431.8 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. A Staple setting cannot be used together with the "Offset" setting. If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the original is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled, otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity Finishing tray 1 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v 32 mm 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Finishing tray 2 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v A4 w or less: 132 mm B4 w or more: 64.5 mm 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Optional finishing tray 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v 24 mm 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-91 To bind copies with staples 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position]. – To cancel the Staple settings, touch [Corner] or [2 Position] again to deselect it. [2 Position] is available only if finisher FS-603 or finisher FS-514 is installed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". 4 Basic copy operations 4-92 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Position], and then touch the button for the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled. – If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel changes to the stapling position, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-93 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ! Detail In order for holes to be punched in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 280 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the document is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired. For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 2 Note Holes can be punched in the paper that is fed out if punch kit PK-501 is installed on optional finisher FS-603 or punch kit PK-510 is installed on optional finisher FS-514. Paper Weight Paper Size 60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 A3 w, A4 v 4 Basic copy operations 4-94 bizhub C252 To punch holes in copies 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [4holes]. – To cancel the Punch setting, touch [4holes] again to deselect it. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-95 3 Touch [Position], and then touch the button for the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched along the long side of the paper. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of the paper. – If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel changes to the punched hole position, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-96 bizhub C252 4.13 Specifying center binding The paper that is fed out can be folded in half and stapled at two places along the vertical center. “Center Staple” + “Fold” settings (folded in half and stapled at the center in two places) “Fold” setting (folded in half) Document (The “Booklet” function is automatically set.) “Center Staple” setting (stapled at the center in two places) Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-97 When Finisher FS-603 is installed * The number of sheets that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight. 64 g/m2 paper: 15 sheets 80 g/m2 paper: 10 sheets ! Detail In order for copies to be bound at the center, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 210 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 279 mm and 432 mm. Paper Weight Paper Size Number of Bound Pages 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w 2 sheets to 15 sheets* Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets 2 sheets to 5 sheets 20 sets 6 sheets to 10 sheets 10 sets 11 sheets to 15 sheets* 10 sets 4 Basic copy operations 4-98 bizhub C252 When Finisher FS-514 is installed Examples of the possible number of bound pages - 2 to 15 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages) - 1 sheet of 50 to 209 g/m2 paper + 14 sheets of 50 to 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages) - Maximum of 13 sheets of 91 to 120 g/m2 paper - Maximum of 10 sheets of 121 to 150 g/m2 paper - Maximum of 8 sheets of 151 to 209 g/m2 paper ! Detail In order for copies to be bound at the center or folded in half, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 257 mm and 431.8 mm. 2 Note The "Fold & Staple" setting is available when finisher FS-603 is installed or if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. The "Fold" setting is available when the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected in either measurement) 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 B5 w, A4 w, B4 w, or A3 w 200 sheets or 20 sets 91 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 — Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-99 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603 0 When the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected, the following default settings are automatically selected. 1%2", "Sort", "Booklet", Auto display zoom ratio when a Booklet setting is selected (e0.707) 0 If "Yes" is selected under "Center Erase", an area of 10 mm along the binding is erased. 0 If paper misfeeds often occur when "No" is selected under "Center Erase", select "Yes" to reduce the number of paper misfeeds. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Fold & Staple]. The Center Erase screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired Center Erase setting. – To erase the area along the center, touch [Yes]. To not erase the area along the center, touch [No]. – To cancel the "Fold & Staple" setting, touch [OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-100 bizhub C252 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-101 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514 0 When the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected, the following default settings are automatically selected. "1%2", "Sort", "Booklet", Auto display zoom ratio when a Booklet setting is selected (e0.707) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Fold & Staple]. The Center Erase screen appears. 2 Specify the desired center binding and folding settings. – To staple copies at the center in two places, touch [Center Staple]. – To fold copies in half, touch [Fold]. – To fold copies in half and staple them at the center in two places, touch [Center Staple] and [Fold]. – To cancel the "Fold & Staple" setting, touch [OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-102 bizhub C252 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-103 4.14 Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the document can be scanned while a copy operation is being performed so that it can be printed once the current copy operation is finished. To reserve a copy job 0 Up to 61 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved. 0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded document is finished. A copy job cannot be reserved while a document is being scanned. 0 If Utility Setting parameter "Copy Operating Screen" is set to "ON", [Program Next Job] appears. Touch [Program Next Job], and then specify the copy settings for the next copy job. For details on specifying the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter, refer to "Display setting" on page 13-30. 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 0 To cancel a reserved copy job, display the Basic screen for the reserved copy job, and then press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Performing operations on jobs" on page 12-8. 1 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and outputting the current copy job. – The Basic screen for reserving a copy job appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-104 bizhub C252 2 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears, copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins. – When the current copy job is finished, the copy settings for the next copy job are automatically displayed and the copy operation begins. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-105 4.15 Stopping scanning/printing The following procedure describes how to stop scanning the document and stop the printing operation. To stop scanning/printing 0 If a document is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning. 0 For details on deleting a stopped job, refer to "Deleting a stopped job" on page 4-106. 1 Press the [Stop] key while a document is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key 4 Basic copy operations 4-106 bizhub C252 4.16 Deleting a stopped job The following procedure describes how to delete a stopped job. To delete a stopped job 0 For details on stopping a job being printed, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. 0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 0 To continue the stopped job, press the [Start] key. 1 Press the [Stop] key while a document is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. The selected job is deleted. 5 Additional copy operations Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-3 5 Additional copy operations 5.1 Checking the copy settings (Mode Check) From the Mode Check screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. To check the settings 1 Press the [Mode Check] key. 5 Additional copy operations 5-4 bizhub C252 The Mode Check screen appears. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-5 2 After checking the settings, touch [Job End] or press the [Mode Check] key. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail There are four Mode Check screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. The buttons for functions where the setting has been changed from the default appear selected. To change the settings 1 Press the [Mode Check] key. 2 Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ] until the button for the function to be changed is displayed. 3 Touch the button for the setting that you wish to change. The screen for specifying the setting appears. 4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting. 5 Additional copy operations 5-6 bizhub C252 5.2 Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed to be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. To make test prints 1 Position the document to be copied. (Refer to page 4-9 for details.) 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. A single proof copy is printed. 4 Check the sample copy. – If the sample copy was printed as desired, skip to step 8. – To change the copy settings, continue with step 5. 5 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the sample copy is printed. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-7 6 In the Change Job Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change]. ? Why is the button for the setting that I wish to change not displayed? The copy setting cannot be changed. % If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof copy. Then, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy settings, and then specify the desired settings. 7 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another sample copy. – If copying stops while the proof copy screen is displayed after the proof copy was printed, press the [Reset] key. Otherwise, from the list of jobs on the sub display area, select the proof copy job that stopped, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes]. 5 Additional copy operations 5-8 bizhub C252 – If an automatic system reset operation is performed while the proof copy for a job is being checked, that job is stored in the memory. – If the "System Auto Reset" parameter is set to "OFF", the job is added to the Held Jobs list after no job is performed for one minute. – To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – If multiple copies have been specified, another sample copy can be printed. – The number under "# of Sets" in the Change Setting screen is the number of copies that will be printed when [Print] is touched. – The number under "Number of Sets" in the screen that appeared when a sample copy is printed indicates the number of copies that are sample copies/total number of copies specified. – The number under "Number of Pages" in the screen that appeared when a sample copy is printed indicates the number of copies that are sample copies/the number of pages in the sample copy. 8 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-9 5.3 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. ! Detail For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished, refer to "To increase priority for printing" on page 12-19. To interrupt a copy job 1 Position the document to be copied. (For details, refer to page 4-9.) 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. – If a job is being printed, the message "Job is stopping." appears. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops. ? What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is pressed? % When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and settings are reset to their defaults. ? Why is the [Interrupt] key not available? % The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while a document is being scanned. 3 Select the desired copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. Printing begins for the job that the previous job was interrupted for. 5 After the interrupting job is finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off, and Interrupt mode is canceled. The settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted. 5 Additional copy operations 5-10 bizhub C252 2 Note If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-11 5.4 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) Up to 15 copy programs can be registered. A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs. To store a copy program 1 Using the touch panel buttons and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program. ? Can the current settings be checked? % To check the currently specified copy settings, press the [Mode Check] key. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)" on page 5-3. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch [Program Registration]. The Program Name screen appears. ? Why is [Program Registration] not available? % If 15 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program. For details on deleting copy programs, refer to "To delete a copy program" on page 5-14. 5 Additional copy operations 5-12 bizhub C252 4 Use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program. – A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy program. (For details, refer to page 14-3.) 5 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears. ? Can the copy program name be corrected? % To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4. ? Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked? % To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Check Job]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)" on page 5-15. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-13 ? How is job deleted? % Touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Del.]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes] to delete the selected copy program. 6 Touch [OK] or [Cancel]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key. ! Detail Copy programs cannot be changed. If a copy program is selected where the "Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs" parameter has been set, [Edit Name] and [Del.] do not appear. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled. Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed. 5 Additional copy operations 5-14 bizhub C252 To delete a copy program 1 In the Recall Copy Program screen, touch the button for the copy program to be deleted. 2 Touch [Del.]. A message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program. 3 Touch [Yes]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy settings registered in the copy program are erased. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-15 5.5 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) To recall a stored job Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying. 1 Position the document to be copied. (For details, refer to page 4-9.) 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the desired copy settings. – If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, skip to step 8. 5 Additional copy operations 5-16 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Check Job]. The Mode Check screens for the copy job appear. The buttons for functions where the setting has been changed from the default appear selected. 5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program. 6 Touch [Job End]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. ? Can different settings be displayed? % To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. 7 Again touch the button for the program with the desired copy settings. – If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy program recalled. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-17 8 Touch [OK]. The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins with the recalled copy settings. 2 Note To stop recalling the copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key, or touch [Cancel]. The copy settings cannot be changed from the Mode Check screens. 5 Additional copy operations 5-18 bizhub C252 5.6 Displaying function descriptions (Help) Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed. There are two methods for displaying the Help screens. - Main Help Menu screen (from the Basic screen) - Setting Help screens (from screens other than the Basic screen) Overview of Help Screens The Help feature provides of the following menus. Main Help Menu screen (1st level) Item Description [Copy], [Scan], [Fax], [Box], [Job List], [Banner Printing] Displays the Help menu for the corresponding mode [Name and function of each part] Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part Use to check the description of the main unit and its options. [Service/Administrator Information] Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-19 ! Detail Items in the Main Help Menu and the Help Menu screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item. To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [ ]. Touch [Exit] to quit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed. Help Menu screen (2nd level) (Example: [Copy]) Item Description [Basic], [Combine Originals], [Quality/Density], [Application] Displays the first Help screen for each description [Functionality Map] Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available functions and settings 5 Additional copy operations 5-20 bizhub C252 ! Detail The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed. Help screens (3rd level) (Example: [Copy], then [Basic]) ! Detail The numbers to the right of the screen title ("1/4" in the previous screen) indicate the number of the currently displayed screen/total number of Help screens for the displayed item. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. To view detailed descriptions (in the 4th level of the Help screens), touch [Detail], if it appears in the screen. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-21 Function maps (Example: [Copy]) A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps. Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view. ! Detail There are six Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the six screens that is currently displayed. To display the previous screen, touch [ ]. To display the next screen, touch [ ]. Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen. To return to the Help Menu screen, touch [ ] in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen. 5 Additional copy operations 5-22 bizhub C252 To display the Main Help Menu screen When a Help screen can be displayed, appears in the upper-left corner of the screen. 0 The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed. While scanning, while printing, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode 0 While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available. [Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display], [Mode Check] 1 With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key. The Main Help Menu screen appears. 2 Touch [Copy] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Help Menu [Copy] screen appears. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of Help Screens" on page 5-18. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-23 3 Touch the button for the desired information or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen. 4 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-24 bizhub C252 To display the Help screen while specifying a setting Help can be displayed for the copy settings that are being specified. 1 Display the setting screen for the desired copy setting, and then press the [Help] key. A Help screen containing details of the functions and operations. ? Why is there no Help information for some functions in the Help Menu screen? % Depending on the displayed screen, there may be no Help information for some functions. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of Help Screens" on page 5-18. 2 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key. – To display the next screen higher in the menu structure than the displayed Help Menu screen, touch [ ]. The screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed appears again. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-25 5.7 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch panel. Displaying the Accessibility Setting Screen % Press the [Accessibility] key. The Accessibility Setting screen appears. To set the “Key Repeat Start/Interval Time” function The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to change to the next number can be specified. The factory default setting for "Time To Start" is 0.8 second and the factory default setting for "Interval" is 0.3 second. 0 The settings specified for the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" function are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Key Repeat Start/Interval Time] or press the [1] key in the keypad. 5 Additional copy operations 5-26 bizhub C252 The Key Repeat Start/Interval Time screen appears. 3 Touch [+] and [–] to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature. – Both settings can be set between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in 0.1- second intervals. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-27 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. The function and setting names and the illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual. ! Detail To return to the Basic screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key or the [Reset] key. 5 Additional copy operations 5-28 bizhub C252 To set the “Enlarge Display Timer Setting” function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed, a message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to specify the length of time that the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode is displayed. The factory default setting is "OFF". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Timer Setting] or press the [2] key in the keypad. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-29 The Enlarge Display Timer Setting screen appears. 3 Select the desired setting. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode, touch [OFF]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 sec.], [60 sec.], [90 sec.] or [120 sec.]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-30 bizhub C252 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. The function and setting names and the illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-31 To set the “Message Display Time” function It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. The factory default setting is "3 sec.". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Message Display Time] or press the [3] key in the keypad. The Message Display Time screen appears. 5 Additional copy operations 5-32 bizhub C252 3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed. – Select whether messages are displayed for 3 seconds or for 5 seconds. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-33 To set the “Sound Setting” function Specify the sound that is produced when a key is pressed. In addition, you can set whether or not a sound is produced when a control panel key is pressed or a touch panel button is touched. The factory default setting for "Accept Sound Setting" is "ON". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Sound Setting] or press the [4] key in the keypad. The Sound Setting screen appears. 5 Additional copy operations 5-34 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Key Accept Sound/Key Refuse Sound] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Key Accept Sound/Key Refuse Sound screen appears. 4 Specify the setting for "Accept Sound Setting". – To produce a sound, touch [ON]. To not produce a sound, touch [OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-35 5 Touch [OK]. The Sound Setting screen appears again. 6 Touch [Close]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 7 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-36 bizhub C252 To set the “Touch Panel Adj.” function If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Touch Panel Adj.] or press the [5] key in the keypad. The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears. ? Why does the machine not respond when [Touch Panel Adj.] is touched? The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel. % Press the [5] key in the keypad. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-37 3 Touch the four check points ( ), making sure that a sound is produced with each. – The check points ( ) can be touched in any order. – To reset the adjustment, press the [C] (clear) key, and then touch the four check points ( ). If the check points have been touched correctly, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green. 4 Press the [Start] key. The touch panel is adjusted, and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the technical representative. ! Detail To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key or the [Reset] key. 5 Additional copy operations 5-38 bizhub C252 To set the “Auto Reset Notification” function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. In addition, it is possible to specify when the message is displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. The factory default setting is "OFF". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Auto Reset Notification] or press the [6] key in the keypad. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-39 The Auto Reset Notification screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode, touch [OFF]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 sec.], [60 sec.], [90 sec.] or [120 sec.]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close], or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-40 bizhub C252 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual [Enlarge Display Operations]. If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset operation, the display of the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode is given priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not displayed. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-41 To set the “Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen” function When the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings to their defaults. The factory default setting is "No". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen] or press the [7] key in the keypad. The Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen screen appears. 5 Additional copy operations 5-42 bizhub C252 3 Select whether or not the message is displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close], or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual [Enlarge Display Operations]. If [No] is touched in the message requesting confirmation to enter Enlarge Display mode, the screens are not changed. 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-3 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 When the message “malfunction detected.” appears (call technical representative) If a malfunction that cannot be corrected by the user occurred, the message "Malfunction detected. Please call your Technical Representative." appears. (call technical representative screen) The phone number and fax number for the usual technical representative appears in the center of the call technical representative screen. Display in Enlarge Display mode If a malfunction occurs, the screen shown below appears. 6 Troubleshooting 6-4 bizhub C252 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-5 To call the technical representative 1 Write down the malfunction code (for example, C-0001) in the call technical representative screen. 2 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button to turn off the control panel. 3 Use the main power switch to turn off the machine. 4 Unplug the machine. 5 Contact the technical representative, and inform them of the malfunction code. 2 Reminder Since the machine may be damaged, contact the technical representative according to the procedure described above as soon as the call technical representative screen appears. 6 Troubleshooting 6-6 bizhub C252 6.2 When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears If a misfeed occurs during copying or printing, the message "Misfeed detected." appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen. (misfeed screen) At this time, copying and printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared. Location of Paper misfeed A flashing “o” indicates the location of the paper misfeed. In addition, a lit “o” indicates areas where paper may have been misfed and that should be checked. Example: Screen when a paper misfeed occurs in a paper tray 2 Note The procedure for clearing a misfed paper differs depending on where the misfeed occurs. Determine the misfeed location by looking at the illustration displayed with the error message, and then clear the misfeed according to the appropriate procedure. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-7 Display in Enlarge Display mode If a paper misfeed occurs, the screen shown below appears. Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration. 6 Troubleshooting 6-8 bizhub C252 Paper misfeed indications 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 7 9 10 8 No. Description 1 A paper misfeed in the ADF (p. 6-27) 2 A paper misfeed in the fusing unit (p. 6-19) 3 A paper misfeed in the main unit (p. 6-16) 4 A paper misfeed in the bypass tray (p. 6-10) 5 A paper misfeed in the LCT (p. 6-15) 6 A paper misfeed in finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601 (p. 6-31) 7 A paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit (p. 6-11) 8 A paper misfeed in the 1st tray (p. 6-12) 9 A paper misfeed in the 2nd tray (p. 6-13) 10 A paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray (p. 6-14) 11 A paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 (p. 6-35) Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-9 12 13 14 No. Description 12 A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher (p. 6-44) 13 A paper misfeed in the mailbin (p. 6-42) 14 A paper misfeed in finisher FS-514 (p. 6-39) 6 Troubleshooting 6-10 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray 1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray. 2 If the misfed paper cannot be removed, open the upper right-side door, and then carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the upper right-side door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-11 To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit 1 Open the automatic duplex unit door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the automatic duplex unit door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-12 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st tray 1 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the upper right-side door. 4 Pull out the 1st tray, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the 1st tray. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hands. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-13 To clear a paper misfeed in the 2nd tray 1 Pull up the center right-side door release lever, and then open the center right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the center right-side door. 4 Pull out the 2nd tray, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the 2nd tray. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film with your hands. 6 Troubleshooting 6-14 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in a paper tray (3rd or 4th tray) 1 Pull up the lower right-side door release lever, and then open the lower right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the lower right-side door. 4 Pull out the paper tray, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the paper tray. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-15 To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT 1 Pull up the lower right-side door release lever, and then open the lower right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the lower right-side door. 4 Press the tray release button, pull out the LCT, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the LCT. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-16 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the right-side door 1 Pull out the paper tray being used, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 2 Load the paper into the paper tray again, and then close the tray. 3 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 4 Open inside cover M1. Paper take-up roller M1 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-17 5 Pull out any paper caught in the timing roller section. 7 CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. %Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Timing roller Fusing unit 6 Troubleshooting 6-18 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative. The paper is wrapped around the timing roller. The paper is folded or shredded by the timing roller. Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller (in the 1st tray) or the film (in the 2nd, 3rd and 4th trays and in the LCT) with your hands. Decreased copy quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Image transfer belt Image transfer roller Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-19 To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit 1 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 2 Push up the fusing unit cover, and then pull out any misfed paper. 3 Push up the M2 release levers. Since the M2 release levers may be difficult to move, push them up forcefully one at a time. – Do not manually return the M2 release levers to their original positions. They will return to their original positions when the fusing unit cover is closed. – When returning the M2 release levers to their original positions, do not move them with your hand. 4 Pull out any misfed paper. 6 Troubleshooting 6-20 bizhub C252 5 Pull inside cover M3 toward you to open it, and then pull out any paper caught in the fusing unit. 6 Close the fusing unit cover. – When closing the fusing unit cover, also return the M2 release levers to their original positions. 7 Close the upper right-side door. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-21 7 CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. %Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. 2 Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative. The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit. The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit. The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit. Decreased copy quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Fusing unit Image transfer belt Image transfer roller 6 Troubleshooting 6-22 bizhub C252 To clear a banner paper misfeed 1 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. – If the end of the paper cannot be seen or cannot be grabbed, pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow. 2 Open inside cover M1. M1 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-23 3 Pull out any paper caught in the timing roller section. 4 Push up the M2 release levers. Since the M2 release levers may be difficult to move, push them up forcefully one at a time. – Do not manually return the M2 release levers to their original positions. They will return to their original positions when the fusing unit cover is closed. – When returning the M2 release levers to their original positions, do not move them with your hand. 5 Push up the fusing unit cover, and then pull out any misfed paper. Timing roller 6 Troubleshooting 6-24 bizhub C252 6 Pull out any misfed paper. 7 Pull inside cover M3 toward you to open it, and then pull out any paper caught in the fusing unit. 8 Close the fusing unit cover. – When closing the fusing unit cover, also return the M2 release levers to their original positions. 9 Close the upper right-side door. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-25 7 CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. %Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Fusing unit 6 Troubleshooting 6-26 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative. The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit. The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit. The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit. 2 Reminder Decreased copy quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller. Image transfer belt Image transfer roller Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-27 To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF 7 CAUTION Precaution when lowering the document exit tray and the document feed tray. % While lowering the document exit tray and the document feed tray, do not press on the document exit tray support or the document feed tray support, otherwise your hand may be pinched by the trays. 1 Open the misfeed-clearing cover on the left side of the ADF, and then carefully pull out any documents from the document feed tray. 2 Open the misfeed-clearing cover on the right side of the ADF. Turn the dial counterclockwise to feed out any misfed documents, and then carefully pull out the documents. 3 Push down on the guide. Turn the dial to feed out any misfed documents, and then carefully pull out the documents. Guide 6 Troubleshooting 6-28 bizhub C252 4 Carefully open the document exit tray and the document feed tray as far as possible. – Make sure that the trays remain open with the document exit tray support and the document feed tray support locked into place. 5 Turn the dial to feed out any misfed documents, and then carefully pull out the documents. 6 Lower the document exit tray and the document feed tray. Document Document feed tray support exit tray support Document Document feed tray support exit tray support Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-29 7 Open the ADF, and then carefully pull out any misfed documents. 8 Remove any documents on the original glass, and then close the ADF. 9 Close the left-side and right-side misfeed-clearing covers. 10 Reload the documents according to the instructions that appear on the touch panel. 6 Troubleshooting 6-30 bizhub C252 ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-31 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any misfed paper. 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover. 4 Open front door FN4. 6 Troubleshooting 6-32 bizhub C252 5 Turn misfeed-clearing dials FN5 clockwise at the same time. ? What should be done if the paper can be seen from the exit tray? % Turn misfeed-clearing dials FN5 counterclockwise at the same time to feed out any misfed paper. 6 Close front door FN4. 7 While holding misfeed-clearing guide FN7 open, pull out any misfed paper. 8 Open upper cover FN1. 9 Open misfeed-clearing guide FN2, and then pull out any misfed paper. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-33 10 While holding misfeed-clearing guide FN3 open, pull out any misfed paper. 11 Close upper cover FN1. 12 If job separator JS-601 is installed: Open the job separator cover. – If job separator JS-601 is not installed, skip to step 15. 13 Remove any misfed paper. 14 Close the job separator cover. 15 While holding misfeed-clearing guide FN6 open, pull out any misfed paper. 6 Troubleshooting 6-34 bizhub C252 16 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 7 CAUTION Metallic parts on the inside of the upper cover are very hot. %Touching any part other than the paper may result in burns. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-35 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any misfed paper. 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover. 4 Open the front door of the finisher. 6 Troubleshooting 6-36 bizhub C252 5 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue. ? What should be done if the misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned too far? % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely adjust it. 6 Open the upper door of the finisher, and then pull out any paper in the feed section. 7 Close the upper door. 8 Remove all paper fed into the exit tray 1. Removal indicator Misfeedclearing dial 1 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-37 9 Open the misfeed-clearing guide for the finisher, and then remove any misfed paper. 10 Open the right-side door, and then pull out any misfed paper in the transport section. 11 If the paper could not be removed in step 10, turn the misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section clockwise. Feed the paper into the exit tray 2, and then pull it out. 12 Close the front door of the finisher. Misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section 6 Troubleshooting 6-38 bizhub C252 13 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder If the message "Misfeed detected." appears, be sure to open the front door, turn the misfeed-clearing dial until the removal indicator is completely blue, and then remove the paper. If the paper is pulled out with too much force, the finisher may be damaged. Do not pull paper remaining in the transfer unit out with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may be damaged. Be careful that your fingers are not pinched when the front door is closed. For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-39 To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher FS-514 1 Pull the finisher release lever 1 to unlock the finisher. 2 Grab the finisher at "2", and then slide the finisher away from the main unit. – To move the finisher away from the main unit, be sure to grab it at "2". Do not grab the mailbins or saddle stitcher to move the finisher, otherwise they may be damaged. 3 Open the front door. 4 Raise lever FN1, turn dial FN2, and then pull out any paper. 1 2 FN1 FN2 6 Troubleshooting 6-40 bizhub C252 5 Lower guide FN3, and then pull out any paper. – If the punch kit is installed, pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. 6 Return guide FN3 to its original position. – If the punch kit is installed, insert hole-punch waste container FN3.1 in its original position. 7 Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover, and then pull out any paper. FN3 FN3.1 FN4 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-41 8 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then pull out any paper. 9 Return the finisher to its original position. – When returning the finisher to its original position, do not grab the handle on the front door, the control panel, the mailbins, or the saddle stitcher. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. FN6 FN5 6 Troubleshooting 6-42 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin 1 Open the front door. 2 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 3 While pressing down lever FN7, pull out any paper. 4 Pull handle FN8 to open the misfeedclearing door. FN6 FN5 FN7 FN8 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-43 5 Pull out any paper in the mailbin. 6 Close the misfeed-clearing door. 7 Close the front door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-44 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher 1 Open the front door. 2 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 3 Remove all paper from the finishing tray. 4 Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then pull out any paper. FN6 FN5 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-45 5 Close the misfeed-clearing door. 6 Close the front door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-46 bizhub C252 6.3 When the message “Replenish paper.” appears If a tray has run out of paper while copying or after printing, the message "Replenish paper." appears. To replenish paper % Check which paper tray appears highlighted in the touch panel, and then load it with paper. ! Detail For details on loading paper into the paper trays, refer to "Loading paper into the 1st tray" on page 3-49, "Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray" on page 3-55, "Loading paper into the LCT" on page 3-57, and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-47 6.4 When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.” appears This machine uses the memory to produce copies. When the amount of memory available is limited while copy operations are being performed, the message "Not enough memory to continue the job." or "The job has been deleted. Not enough remaining memory." appears. Continue the operation according to the corresponding instructions. Memory becomes full while scanning This message appears when the memory becomes full and scanning stops while scanning in Copy mode. To print all pages that have been scanned, touch [Print]. To delete the job for the scanned pages, touch [Delete]. Display in Enlarge Display mode 6 Troubleshooting 6-48 bizhub C252 Memory becomes full while queuing a job This message appears when the memory becomes full and the scanned job was deleted while scanning a document for a job to be queued. Check the number of pages counted for the document, and then adjust the number of pages in the job to be queued. Display in Enlarge Display mode Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-49 6.5 When “Please replace following unit(s).” appears When it is almost time to replace supplies or a part within this machine, the message shown in the following illustration appears, warning about the replacement period. Display in Enlarge Display mode ! Detail When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement. After the message "Please replace following unit(s).", the message "Need to replace XXXX." appears and the machine stops operating. The number of pages that can be printed from the time that the message "Please replace following unit(s)." appears until the time that the message "Need to replace XXXX." appears differs depending on the printing conditions and the supplies or part. 6 Troubleshooting 6-50 bizhub C252 6.6 When the message “Need to replace XXXX.” appears When it is time to replace supplies or a part within this machine, the message shown in the following illustration appears, indicating that the part or supplies should be replaced, and the machine stops operating. As an example, the message indicating that the yellow imaging unit should be replaced (when replaceable by the user) is shown below. Display in Enlarge Display mode When the time to replace supplies or a part is reached, a screen similar to the one shown below appears. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-51 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration. 2 Note When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement. 2 Reminder Do not throw away used supplies or parts. Instead, keep them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative. 6 Troubleshooting 6-52 bizhub C252 6.7 Simple troubleshooting Main unit Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The machine does not start up when the main power switch is turned on. Is no power supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [Power] (auxiliary power) key been turned on? Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. The machine does not start copying. Is the right-side door of the machine open? Securely close the right-side door of the machine. Is there no paper that matches the document? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light. Is the copy density set too light? Touch [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 4-71.) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 3-49, p. 3-55, p. 3-57 and p. 3-59.) The printed output is too dark. Is the copy density set too dark? Touch [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 4-71.) Was the document not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the document so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 4-11.) The printed output is blurry. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 3-49, p. 3-55, p. 3-57 and p. 3-59.) Was the document not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the document so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 4-11.) Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-53 There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output. There are streaks in the printed output. Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 11-3.) Is the document transfer belt dirty? Clean the document transfer belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 11-5.) Was the original document printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or overhead projector transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the document. (See p. 4-11.) Is a double-sided document being copied? If a thin double-sided document is being copied, the information on the back side may be reproduced in the copy. Touch [Light] on the Background Removal screen to select a lighter background density. (See p. 4-73.) Is the electrostatic charger wire dirty? Use the charger-cleaning tool to clean the electrostatic charger. (See p. 11-7.) The image is not aligned properly on the paper. Is the document incorrectly positioned? Correctly position the document against the document scales. (See p. 4-11.) Load the document into the ADF, and slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the document. (See p. 4-9.) Is the document incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the document cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the document on the original glass. (See p. 4-11.) Is the original glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 11-3.) Are the adjustable document guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the document? Slide the document guides against the edges of the document. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled. Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace the paper with paper that is not damp. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy 6 Troubleshooting 6-54 bizhub C252 The edge of the printed output is dirty. Is the document transfer belt dirty? Clean the document transfer belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 11-5.) Was the selected paper size larger than the document (with a Zoom setting of "×1.000")? Select a paper size that is the same size as the document. Otherwise, select the "Auto Zoom" setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 4-46.) Is the orientation of the document different from the orientation of the paper (with a Zoom setting of "×1.000")? Select a paper size that is the same size as the document. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the document. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the document size to the selected paper size. (See p. 4-46.) Otherwise, select the "Auto Zoom" setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 4-46.) Even though the paper misfeed was cleared, copies cannot be produced. Are there paper misfeeds at other locations? Check the touch panel for other paper misfeed indications, and then remove any misfed paper at all other locations. (See "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8.) Printing with the "2%1" or "2%2" Simplex/Duplex settings are not possible. Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with user authentication/account track set. Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum color-copy (black-copy) allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-55 ADF Finisher If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your technical representative. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The document is not fed. Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the document one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the document is correctly placed on the original glass. Is the document correctly loaded? Position the document correctly. (See p. 4-9.) Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The finisher cannot be used. Is no power supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. The pages cannot be stapled. Have the staples run out? Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 10-9.) The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90º. Are the staples positioned as specified? Select the desired position for the staples. (See p. 4-88.) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned. Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the side of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the side of the paper so that there is no gap. Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes are not punched. (when punch kit is installed on finisher) Did the message "Remove punch scraps." appear? Empty the hole-punch waste container. 6 Troubleshooting 6-56 bizhub C252 6.8 Main messages and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Original left on glass. The document was left on the original glass. Remove the document from the original glass. Matching paper size is not available. Select paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select a different copy size or load paper of a suitable size. Place paper in Bypass Tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. Original size cannot be detected. Select paper size. 1) The document is not positioned correctly. 2) A document with a nonstandard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. 1) Position the document correctly. 2) Select the correct paper size. Image will not fit on selected paper size. Place the originals different direction. The image does not fit in the paper. Load the document turned 90°. This mode is not available with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. Output Tray has reached its maximum capacity. Please remove all pages from % tray. Since the maximum amount of copies for the indicated finisher exit tray has been exceeded, the machine is unable to make copies. Remove all copies from the indicated tray. Input User Name and Password to login and press the Access key. User authentication settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication)" on page 3-41.) Input Account Name and Password to login and press the Access key. Account track settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and its correct password are entered. Type in your account name and password. (See "Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track)" on page 3-46.) Your account has reached its maximum color-copy (black-copy) allowance. The limit on the number of copies that can be made has been reached. Contact your administrator. Close % Section properly. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are installed correctly. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-57 Please insert Fusing Unit and close all doors. The fusing unit is not installed correctly. Reinstall the supplies or parts, or contact your technical representative. Please install toner cartridge, and close all doors. The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Please insert Waste Toner Box and close all doors. The waste-toner box is not installed correctly. Please insert Image Transfer Belt Unit and close all doors. The image transfer belt unit is not installed correctly. Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Load paper into the indicated tray. (See "Loading paper into the 1st tray" on page 3-49, "Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray" on page 3-55, "Loading paper into the LCT" on page 3-57, and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59.) Toner cartridge (X) needs to be replaced soon. The toner for the indicated color is about to run out. Prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. There is no Toner. Since the toner for the indicated color has run out, the machine is unable to make copies. Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. Stapler empty. Replace Staple Cartridge or cancel Staple mode. The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. See "Replacing the staples" on page 10-9. Misfeed detected. Since a paper misfeed occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the paper misfeed. (See "When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears" on page 6-6.) Reinsert the following # of originals. After clearing a paper misfeed, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the document that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated document pages into the ADF. Malfunction detected. Please call your Technical Representative. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your technical representative of the code displayed on the touch panel. Now Downloading Program Data from Firmware server. 1) CS Remote Care was activated by the technical representative. 2) Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while this message is displayed. After turning off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, turn off the main power switch, and then contact the technical representative. Message Cause Remedy 6 Troubleshooting 6-58 bizhub C252 If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. Cannot be accessed due to unauthorized access. Please contact your Administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. The Administrator Password is not valid due to unauthorized access. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again. Message Cause Remedy 7 Specifications Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-3 7 Specifications 7.1 Specifications bizhub C252 Specifications Type Desktop/freestanding scanner/printer Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photoconductor OPC Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp Copying system Dry-type electrophotographic method Developing system HMT developing method (HMT-OR) Fusing system Roller fixing Resolution Scanning: 600 dpi; Printing: 600 dpi e 600 dpi equivalent Document Types: Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Size: Maximum A3 w (11 e 17 w) Weight: 2 kg (three-dimensional objects) Paper Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2)**, thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2)*, thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2)*, thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2)*, overhead projector transparencies*, letterheads, colored paper, envelopes*, label sheets*, banner paper (127 to 160 g/m2) * Can only be fed through the 1st tray or the bypass tray ** Can only be fed through the bypass tray. Copy sizes 1st tray: A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 Width: 90 to 311.1 mm; Length: 139.7 to 457.2 mm 2nd tray: A3 w to B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Bypass tray: A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), Banner paper, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 Width: 90 to 311.1 mm; Length: 139.7 to 1200 mm 7 Specifications 7-4 bizhub C252 *1 There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 mm e 330 mm, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact the technical representative. *2 The indicated space requirements represent the space required to pull away the finisher and to open the upper right-side door, front door and the paper drawers. Paper tray capacity 1st tray: Plain paper: 250 sheets Thick paper 1/2/3, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets, envelopes: 20 sheets or less 2nd tray: Plain paper: 500 sheets Bypass tray: Plain paper: 100 sheets Thick paper 1/2/3, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets: 20 sheets or less Envelopes: 10 sheets or less Banner paper: 1 sheet Copy exit tray capacity Plain paper: 350 sheets; Thick paper: 20 sheets; Overhead projector transparencies: 1 sheet Warm-up time Less than 110 seconds (at room temperature (23 degrees Celsius)) Image loss width Leading edge: 4.2 mm; Trailing edge: 4.2 mm*3; Rear edge: 3 mm*4; Front edge: 3 mm*4 First copy Full color: 11.7 seconds or less Black: 8.4 seconds or less Print speed Full color/black: 13 ppm (A3 w), 14 ppm (B4 w), 25 ppm (A4 v), 16 ppm (A4 w), 25 ppm (B5 v), 14 ppm (B5 w), 25 ppm (A5 v), 19 ppm (A5 w) (using the 1st tray) Magnification ratios e1.0 (full size): e1.000 ± 1.0% or less Enlarge: e1.154, e1.224, e1.414, e2.000 Reduce: e0.866, e0.816, e0.707, e0.500 Minimal (e0.930)* Zoom: e0.250 to e4.000 (in 0.001 increments) Stored zoom ratios: 3 * "Minimal" zoom ratio (e0.900 to e 0.999) Multiple copies 1 to 999 sheets Density control Copy density: Manual (9 levels); Background density: Automatic and manual (9 levels) Power requirements 220 to 240 V, 10 A, 50 Hz Power consumption Less than 1,500 W Dimensions 650 mm (W) e 755 mm (D) e 771 mm (H) Space requirements*2 1.743 mm (W) e 1.149 mm (D) Memory (available hard disk space) 512 MB (40 GB) Weight Approx. 95 kg Specifications Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-5 *3 3 mm only when receiving faxes *4 4.2 mm only when printing In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice. 7 Specifications 7-6 bizhub C252 Automatic duplex unit There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact the technical representative. Option specifications Automatic document feeder DF-601 Specifications Paper types Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to A5 w/v, A3 Wide (12 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w/v Width: 139.7 to 311.1 mm; Length: 148 to 457.2 mm Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 17 W Dimensions 110 mm (W) e 440 mm (D) e 345 mm (H) Weight Approx. 3 kg Specifications Document feed methods Plain paper: Single-sided and double-sided documents Thick paper: Single-sided documents (129 to 210 g/m2) "Mixed Original" function: Combination of single-sided and double-sided documents Document types Single-sided: Plain paper (35 to 210 g/m2) Double-sided or mixed: Plain paper (50 to 110 g/m2) Document sizes Single-sided/double-sided documents: A3 w to B6 w Mixed document sizes: Refer to Table 1. Capacity of document feeder Single-sided/double-sided documents: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Thick originals: Maximum 38 sheets (210 g/m2) Mixed document sizes: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 60 W Dimensions 586 mm (W) e 519 mm (D) e 135 mm (H) Weight Approx. 14 kg Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-7 Table 1: Possible combinations for mixed document sizes o: Possible —: Not possible Paper feed cabinet PC-103 Maximum Document Width / Document Size A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w A3 w o o — — — — — — A4 v o o — — — — — — B4 w o o o o — — — — B5 v o o o o — — — — A4 w o o o o o o — — A5 v — — o o o o — — B5 w — — o o o o o — A5 w — — — — — — o o Specifications Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to A5 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Tray paper capacity 3rd tray: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (W) e 548 mm (D) e 263 mm (H) Weight Approx. 24 kg Unit structure 1 paper tray 7 Specifications 7-8 bizhub C252 Paper feed cabinet PC-203 Paper feed cabinet PC-403 Specifications Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to A5 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Tray paper capacity Upper tray (3rd tray): 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Lower tray (4th tray): 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (W) e 548 mm (D) e 263 mm (H) Weight Approx. 28 kg Unit structure 2 paper trays Specifications Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A4 v Tray paper capacity 2,500 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 45 W Dimensions 570 mm (W) e 548 mm (D) e 263 mm (H) Weight Approx. 28 kg Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-9 Finisher FS-603 * The number of pages that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight. If 64 g/m2 paper is used, 6 to 15 pages can be bound together. If 80 g/m2 paper is used, 6 to 10 pages can be bound together. Specifications Exit trays Exit tray 1, exit tray 2 Settings Normal settings: "Group", "Sort", "Offset/Group", "Offset/ Sort", "Offset/Staple", and "Saddle Staple" Paper types Exit tray 1: "Group/Sort" setting: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2), envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets "Offset/Sort" setting, "Offset/Group" setting: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Staple: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Exit tray 2: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes Exit tray 1: "Group" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Sort" setting: A3 w to A5 v "Staple" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v Exit tray 2: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w Paper capacity Exit tray 1: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2): 1,000 sheets of A4 w-size paper or smaller, or 500 sheets of B4 w-size paper or larger Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2), envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets: 20 sheets Exit tray 2: 10 copies (6 to 15 bound pages)* 20 copies (2 to 5 bound pages) Amount of shift 20 mm Staple settings Exit tray 1: Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A4 w/v, B5 w/v (2 to 50 pages), A3 w, B4 w (2 to 25 pages) Exit tray 2: Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A3 w to A4 w (2 to 15 pages) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 65 W Dimensions 601 mm (W) e 603 mm (D) e 933 mm (H) Weight Approx. 42 kg (including the horizontal transport unit) Consumables Staples MS-5D (5,000 staples for stapling 50 sheets) e 1 7 Specifications 7-10 bizhub C252 Punch kit PK-501 Finisher FS-501 Specifications Number of punched holes 4 Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w, A4 v Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 90 mm (W) e 560 mm (D) e 170 mm (H) Weight Approx. 3 kg Specifications Exit trays Exit tray 1, exit tray 2 Settings "Sort", "Group", "Offset/Sort", "Offset/Group", and Staple settings Paper types Exit tray 1: "Group" setting: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, envelopes, label sheets Exit tray 2: "Sort", "Group", "Offset/Sort", "Offset/Group" settings: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2) Staple settings: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes Exit tray 1: A3 wide to B5 w/v Exit tray 2: A3 wide to B5 w/v Paper capacity Exit tray 1: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2): 250 sheets Thick paper 1/2/3 (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, envelopes, label sheets: 20 sheets Exit tray 2: Plain paper (80 g/m2): 1,000 sheets of A4 w or smaller, or 500 sheets of B4 w or larger Amount of shift 30 mm Staple settings Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A3 w to B5 w/v (2 to 30 sheets) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 63 W Dimensions 538 mm (W) e 637 mm (D) e 978 mm (H) Weight Approx. 38 kg (including the horizontal transport unit) Consumables Staples MS-3C (3,000 staples for stapling 30 sheets) e 1 Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-11 Job separator JS-601 Finisher FS-514 Specifications Exit trays Exit tray 3 Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to B5 w/v Paper capacity 100 sheets Dimensions 341 mm (W) e 527 mm (D) e 149 mm (H) Weight Approx. 2 kg Specifications Finishing trays Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2 Feed settings "Sort", "Group", "Sort"/"Offset", "Group"/"Offset", and "Sort" and Staple Paper types Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2) Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, label sheets, letterheads Punch settings: Plain paper (50 to 209 g/m2) Staple settings: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 to 120 g/m2)* * "Cover Mode" function: Thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide w (12-1/4 e 18 w) Paper capacity Output tray 1: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): 200 sheets Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads: 20 sheets Output tray 2: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): 1,000 sheets of A4 w or smaller, or 500 sheets of B4 w or larger Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads: 20 sheets Amount of shift 30 mm Staple settings Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A3 w to A5 v (2 to 50 sheets) Punch settings Paper sizes: A3 w, A4 v, B5 w Number of punched holes: 4 Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 66 W Dimensions 352 mm (W) e 471 mm (D) e 573 mm (H) When the tray is pulled out: 435 mm (W) Weight 33.2 kg Consumables Staples SK-602 (containing 5,000 staples) e 1 7 Specifications 7-12 bizhub C252 Punch kit PK-510 Saddle stitcher SD-503 Output tray OT-601 Specifications Punched holes 4 Paper types Plain paper (50 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w, A4 v, B5w Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 114 mm (W) e 461 mm (D) e 106 mm (H) Weight Approx. 1.9 kg Specifications Number of bins 1 bin Paper types Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w Paper capacity Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): Maximum 200 sheets or 20 sets Staple settings Number of bound pages: 2 to 15 sheets Dimensions 445 mm (W) e 203 mm (D) e 478 mm (H) When the tray is pulled out: 576 mm (W) e 281 mm (D) Weight 7.4 kg Consumables MS-2C cartridge (for 2,000) e 1 Power requirements Supplied from finisher Specifications Number of bins 1 bin Paper capacity Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): Maximum 200 sheets Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, or label sheets, letterheads: Maximum 20 sheets Dimensions 282 mm (W) e 368 mm (D) e 57 mm (H) Weight 0.7 kg Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-13 Mailbin kit MT-501 Specifications Number of bins 4 bins Paper types Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A4 v, B5 v, A5 w Paper capacity Maximum 125 sheets per bin Dimensions 340 mm (W) e 509 mm (D) e 387 mm (H) Weight Approx. 8 kg (unit weight) Power requirements Supplied from finisher 7 Specifications 7-14 bizhub C252 8 Copy paper/original documents Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-3 8 Copy paper/original documents 8.1 Copy paper Use paper that meets the following specifications. Possible paper sizes Non-standard-sized paper: * Banner paper Paper width: 210 mm to 297 mm Paper length: 457.3 mm to 1200 mm Paper Source Paper Width Paper Length Bypass tray* 90.0 mm to 311.1 mm 139.7 mm to 1200 mm 1st tray 90.0 mm to 311.1 mm 139.7 mm to 457.2 mm 2nd tray — — Single/Double paper feed cabinets LCT Double-sided copies 139.7 mm to 311.1 mm 148 mm to 457.2 mm 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-4 bizhub C252 Standard-sized paper: *1 There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact the technical representative. *2 Can be used when optional punch kit is installed on finisher. Paper Source Paper Size Bypass tray A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 1st tray A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 2nd tray A3 w to B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Single/Double paper feed cabinets A3 w to A5 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v LCT A4 v Double-sided copies A3 w to A5 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8- 1/2 w, Foolscap (220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w)*1 Finisher FS-603 Exit tray 1: "Group"/"Sort" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Offset/Group" setting, "Offset/Sort" setting: A3 w to A5 v "Offset/Sort/Staple" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v Punch setting: A3 w, A4 v*2 Exit tray 2: A3 w to A4 w Finisher FS-501 Exit tray 1: "Group"/"Sort" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) Exit tray 2: "Offset/Group" setting, "Offset/Sort" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Staple" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v Job separator JS-601 A3 w to B5 w/v Finisher FS-514 Finishing tray 1, 2 and optional Output Tray A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Group"/"Sort" settings: A3 w to A5 v Staple settings: A3 w to A5 v Punch settings: A3 w, A4 v, B5 w*2 Output Tray OT-601 Saddle Stitcher SD-503 Fold & staple: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w Mailbin Kit MT-501 A4 v, B5 v, A5 w Copy exit tray (standard) A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-5 Paper types and paper capacities Paper Type Plain Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Weight (g/m2) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 91 g/m2 to 150 g/m2 151 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 Paper Source, Etc. Bypass tray 100 sheets 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 1st tray 250 sheets 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 2nd tray 500 sheets — — — Single/Double paper feed cabinets 500 sheets/ 1,000 sheets — — — LCT 2,500 sheets — — — Double-sided copies o o o o Paper Type Overhead Projector Transparencies Postcards Envelopes Label Sheets Banner Paper 127 g/m2 to 160 g/m2 Paper Source, Etc. Bypass tray 20 sheets or less (A4 v only) 20 sheets or less 10 envelopes or less 20 sheets or less 1 sheet 1st tray 20 sheets or less (A4 v only) 20 sheets or less 10 envelopes or less 20 sheets or less — 2nd tray — — — — — Single/Double paper feed cabinets — — — — — LCT — — — — — Double-sided copies — — — — — 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-6 bizhub C252 Special paper Paper other than plain paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as overhead projector transparencies and colored paper in order to prevent operating errors. Paper Type Icon Description Plain Paper Single Side Only Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double-sided copying (for example, when one side has already been printed on) is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is given priority when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected during double-sided copying. Special Paper Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Letterhead Select this setting when paper already printed with a company name or preset text is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Colored Paper Select this setting when colored paper is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. OHP Select this setting when overhead projector transparencies are loaded. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Thick 1 Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 91 g/m2 to 150 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Thick 2 Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 151 g/m2 to 209 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-7 Thick 3 Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Envelope Select this setting when envelopes are loaded. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Duplex 2nd-Side Normal Select these settings when loading paper that has already been printed on one side. "Duplex 2nd-Side" can be selected only normal, thick 1, thick 2 or thick 3 paper is loaded in the 1st tray or the bypass tray. Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Paper Type Icon Description 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-8 bizhub C252 Precautions for paper The following types of paper should not be used, otherwise decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage to the machine may occur. - Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still blank) - Paper that has been printed on by a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc. attached Paper storage Observe the following precautions when storing the paper. - Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. - If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur. Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity. - Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds. - Keep paper out of the reach of children. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-9 Auto tray switch feature If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the optional LCT is installed, a maximum of 3,400 copies (with A4 v paper) can be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF" parameter in the Utility mode is set to "Allow".) Operating Conditions - The paper is the same size. - The paper is positioned in the same orientation. - The paper is the same type. - Paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically switched. ! Detail For details on the specifying the paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically switched, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27. Order for Selecting the Paper trays As a factory default, when a different paper tray is automatically selected, the next paper tray in the following list is chosen. 2nd tray % 3rd tray % 4th tray % 1st tray ! Detail To change the order in which the paper trays are selected, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-10 bizhub C252 8.2 Selecting the paper settings This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in each paper tray. ! Detail For details on loading the paper into the 1st tray, refer to "Loading paper into the 1st tray" on page 3-49. For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. To automatically detect the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) The size of the paper loaded into the 1st tray and the bypass tray can be detected automatically. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for automatically detecting the paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-11 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To specify automatic detection for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Auto Detect]. As a default, "Auto Detect" is selected. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-12 bizhub C252 To specify a paper size (set size settings) The paper size for the 1st tray and the bypass tray can be set so that the paper tray can be used with the specified paper size. This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such as with postcards or paper in inch sizes). The following procedure describes how to specify the postcard setting for the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-13 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Standard Size]. The Standard Size screen appears. 5 Touch [ ] twice, and then touch [A6 Card w]. – Touch [ ] and [ ] until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. – If “A6 Card w” is selected, "Thick 2" is automatically selected. If paper other than postcards is loaded, change the paper type setting. For details on the paper type settings, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. The paper size for the 1st tray is set. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-14 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-15 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) Non-standard-sized paper can be loaded into the 1st tray or the bypass tray. If non-standard-sized paper is loaded, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. The following procedure describes how to specify the size of non-standard paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-16 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Make sure that [X] is selected, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 457.2 mm) – Touch [Y] to select it, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side Y. (90.0 mm to 311.1 mm) – If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. – If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-17 ? Can paper sizes be stored? % Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. % To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key. % The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names, refer to "To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on page 8-18. % For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on page 8-18. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-18 bizhub C252 To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to re-enter the setting. The following procedure describes how to store a non-standard paper size for the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To specify a setting for special paper for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-19 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Custom Size]. 5 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store]. – Make sure that [X] is selected, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 457.2 mm) – Touch [Y] to select it, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side Y. (90.0 mm to 311.1 mm) – Check the illustration in the screen for the sides that are considered X and Y. – If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. – If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-20 bizhub C252 6 Touch the memory key where the paper size is to be stored. – To change the name of a memory key, touch [Custom Name], and then touch the key to be renamed. Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-21 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-22 bizhub C252 To specify a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings) Oversized paper can be loaded into the 1st tray or the bypass tray. Oversized paper is a size larger than the standard size and allows copies of standard-sized documents to be printed so that there is no loss at the edges. For example, if A3 Wide paper is used, an area up to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm can be printed, allowing the entire area of an A3-size document to be printed. If oversized paper is loaded, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for oversized paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-23 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Oversized Paper]. The Oversized Paper screen appears. 5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – To select a paper size in inches, touch [Inches]. The list of paper sizes in inches appears. 6 To change the size, touch [Change Size]. The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-24 bizhub C252 7 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad to type in the size. – To specify a paper size of 12 e 18 w, touch [12 e 18 w]. – If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. The allowable range differs depending on the paper sizes. – If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available to be selected again without having to be typed in. In addition, the size can be changed. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-25 To specify a setting for special paper If a setting for special paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and other special paper, is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto Paper Select" setting or the ATS feature. However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for oversized paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-26 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Specify the appropriate setting for the type of special paper loaded. – Touch the button for the desired special paper. ? What types of paper can be loaded in the paper tray? % There are limits on the types of paper that can be loaded in a paper tray. For details on the type of paper that can loaded, refer to "Specifications" on page 7-3, "Paper feed cabinet PC-103" on page 7-7. % If postcards were loaded, select "Thick 2". 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Reminder If overhead projector transparencies or thick paper is loaded into the paper tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-27 To print double-sided copies manually If the document to be copied cannot be fed through the automatic duplex unit, touch [Duplex 2nd-Side] to print double-sided copies. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for paper already printed on one side and loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – A paper tray set to "Duplex 2nd-Side" is not selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. – To specify a setting for special paper for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-28 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Duplex 2nd-Side]. 5 Select the setting for the type of used paper that is loaded. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-29 8.3 Original documents When making copies, load the document into the ADF or position it on the original glass. To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. Documents that can be loaded into the ADF There are three methods for using the ADF. - Normal method - For documents of mixed sizes - For documents on thick paper There are limits on the types of documents that can be loaded with each method. Normal method For documents of mixed sizes Single-Sided Documents Double-Sided Documents Document paper type/Weight Plain Paper: 35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Plain Paper: 50 g/m2 to 110 g/m2 Document size A3 w to B6 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) Single-Sided Documents Double-Sided Documents Document paper type/Weight Plain Paper: 50 g/m2 to 110 g/m2 Document size Refer to "Mixed originals paper sizes". Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-30 bizhub C252 Mixed originals paper sizes The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used with the "Mixed Original" setting. o: Possible —: Not possible ! Detail *1Indicates the width of the widest document size of the mixed originals (width of the adjustable document guides of the ADF) *2Indicates document sizes that can be specified together with the maximum document width For documents on thick paper Maximum Document Width* / A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w Document Size*2 A3 w o o — — — — — — A4 v o o — — — — — — B4 w o o o o — — — — B5 v o o o o — — — — A4 w o o o o o o — — A5 v — — o o o o o — B5 w — — o o o o o o A5 w — — — — — — — o Single-Sided Documents Document paper type/Weight Thick paper: 129 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 Document size A3 w to B6 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v Paper capacity 38 sheets (210 g/m2 paper) Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-31 Precautions for loading documents into the ADF The following types of documents should not be loaded into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds or damage to the document may occur. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents - Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper - Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper - Documents printed on paper thicker than 211 g/m2 - Documents printed on paper thicker than 111 g/m2 during double-sided copying - Documents that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Documents that are bound in a book or booklet - Documents that are bound together with glue - Document pages that have been cut or contain cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Documents with binder holes - Documents that have just been printed with this machine 2 Reminder Before loading folded documents, such as those folded in half or in three, into the ADF, be sure to flatten the pages. Documents that can be placed on the original glass To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. Original Glass Documents Document type Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Document size A3 w to A5 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w Maximum weight 2 kg 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-32 bizhub C252 Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass Observe the following precautions when placing the document on the original glass. - The size of documents printed on paper in inch sizes (such as 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14, 8-1/2 e 11) cannot be automatically detected. The setting must be specified by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative. - If a document of non-standard paper size is loaded, the "Auto Paper Select" and "Auto Zoom" settings cannot be used since the document size cannot be detected automatically. If a document of non-standard paper size is loaded, select the size of the paper to be copied. - If highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper, are loaded, the document size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the document. - Do not place objects exceeding 2 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. - If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely hard, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 9 Application functions Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-3 9 Application functions 9.1 Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function) In order to prevent copies printed onto overhead projector transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying, paper (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparencies ! Detail For details on loading overhead projector transparencies, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 8-5, "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. 9 Application functions 9-4 bizhub C252 To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function 0 The Finishing setting cannot be changed. 0 The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Load overhead projector transparencies into the bypass tray or the 1st tray. Load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray. – Use interleaf paper with the same size as the overhead projector transparencies, and load them in the v orientation. 3 Touch [OHP], and then touch [OK]. – If the overhead projector transparencies are loaded into the 1st tray, touch [Paper], select the 1st tray, and then touch [Change Tray Settings]. The Paper screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-5 4 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 5 Touch [OHP Interleave]. The OHP Interleave screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-6 bizhub C252 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [OFF]. 7 Touch [OK]. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-7 9.2 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) Copies can be made using paper different from the cover pages and main body of the document (excluding the cover pages) and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy. The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available. Setting Description Front (Copy) The first page of the document is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet. With double-sided copying, the second page of the document is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. Back (Copy) The last page of the document is copied onto paper for the back cover sheet. With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the document is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the document contains an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. 9 Application functions 9-8 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Cover Mode” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the document into separate paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the document, and load them in the same orientation. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on loading paper when using thick paper for the cover page, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 8-5, "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-9 4 Touch [Cover Mode]. The Cover Mode screen appears. 5 Select the desired cover sheet format. – The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. – To cancel changes to the copy settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Cover Mode" function, touch [OFF]. 6 Depending on the desired setting, touch [Front Cover Paper] or [Back Cover Paper]. The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-10 bizhub C252 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 9 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-11 9.3 Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet” function) Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with singlesided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown below. If "Copy" is set, the document is copied as shown below when the specified paper is inserted for the specified page. When page 6 is specified If "Blank" was set, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. When page 5 is specified Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 6th page of the copy, and the 6th page of the document is copied onto it. Double-sided copies The back side of the 3rd page of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 6th and 7th pages of the document are printed onto it. Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 6th page of the copy. Double-sided copies The back side of the 3rd page of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the copy. 9 Application functions 9-12 bizhub C252 ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 15 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-13 To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Load the paper to be inserted and the paper for the main body of the copy into separate paper trays. – Make sure that the paper loaded for the insertion and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on loading paper when using thick paper for the insertions, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 8-5 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-14 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Insert Sheet]. The Insert Sheet screen appears. 5 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the paper is to be inserted. – When [Select] is touched, the entered page is specified. – After the page number is specified, the page numbers are arranged in order, starting with the lowest number. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch [Edit], touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered twice, the same page number is specified, and there is no change to the print result. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the document, paper is not inserted. 6 Touch [Insert Paper]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [OFF]. The Insert Paper screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-15 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 8 Touch [Copy] or [Blank] under "Insert Type". – If "Copy" is set, the document is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page. – If "Blank" is set, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-16 bizhub C252 9.4 Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page (“Insert Image” function) A multi-page document later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in a document first scanned with the ADF. The inserted document is added after the specified pages. ! Detail A separate document can be inserted at a maximum of 15 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-17 To copy using the “Insert Image” function 1 Load the document into the ADF. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Insert Image]. The Insert Image screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-18 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [OFF]. – The inserted document is added after the specified page. – When [Select] is touched, the entered page is specified. – After the page number is specified, the page numbers are arranged in order, starting with the lowest number. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch [Edit], touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the total number of pages in the document to be inserted is greater than the number of pages that are specified, the remaining pages of the insertion document are added at the end of the document. – If the total number of pages in the document to be inserted is less than the number of pages that are specified, nothing is inserted at the specified locations greater than the total number of pages in the document. – If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion documents are added at the specified location. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-19 – If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main document, the corresponding insertion document page is added at the end of the document copy. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 9 Place the document to be inserted on the original glass. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 9 Application functions 9-20 bizhub C252 10 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 11 Touch [Finish]. – To insert a multi-page document, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion document are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 12 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-21 9.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side (“Chapters” function) When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper. ! Detail A maximum of 15 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 9 Application functions 9-22 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Chapters” function Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Chapters]. The Chapters (editing) screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-23 4 Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters. – When [Select] is touched, the entered page is specified. – After the page number is specified, the page numbers are arranged in order, starting with the lowest number. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch [Edit], touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – Set "Simplex/Duplex" to "1 % 2". – If the same page number is entered twice, the same page number is specified, and there is no change to the print result. – If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the document, that page number is ignored. 5 Touch [Copy Insert] or [None] under "Chapter Paper". – If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [OFF]. 9 Application functions 9-24 bizhub C252 – If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK]. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-25 9.6 Scanning documents with different settings and printing copies all together (“Program Job” function) Loaded document pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the document or Finishing settings or the "Set Numbering" function can be set after the entire document is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 2 Note Ten document batches can be set. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001REPORT Document 2 Document 1 Document 3 9 Application functions 9-26 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Program Job” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – When saving scanned data in a box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 9,000 pages are saved in the box. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Program Job], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, touch [Proof Copy] key. Scanning begins. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-27 5 Select [Fix], and then touch [OK]. – To change the copy settings, select [Retry], and then touch [Change Setting]. – If the document is placed on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. 6 Position the next document batch, and then touch [Change Setting]. 9 Application functions 9-28 bizhub C252 7 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, touch [Proof Copy] key. – Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all document batches have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the upper-right corner of the screen. In addition, the number of document batches can be checked beside "Number of Sep. Scans". – If not enough space is available in the memory, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the document data. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change]. Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, select [Fix], and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 8 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-29 9 Select [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To change the copy settings, select [No], and then touch [Change Setting]. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Touch [Print], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned document. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Touch [Execute] or press the [Start] key. – If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop printing, select [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 9 Application functions 9-30 bizhub C252 9.7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread (“Book Copy” function) An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper. The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding just a front cover or both front and back covers. Setting Description Book Spread Copies of the left and right pages of the page spread are printed on the same page without being separated. Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the document page order. The document is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used. Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the document page order. Front and Back Cover The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the document page order. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-31 To copy using the “Book Copy” function 0 Place the document on the original glass. 1 Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – To add copies of the covers, load them first. ? How are the front and back covers copied? % Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the document. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-32 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Book Copy]. The Book Scanning screen appears. [Booklet Original] appears if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If [Separation], [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Cover] is selected, "Position" appears. Select the binding position of the document. – If necessary, touch [Erase] or [Center Erase] under "Book Erase". Select the desired area to be erased, touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased, and then touch [OK]. – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then type in the setting. – If a Book Erase function is specified, touch [Image Adjustment] in the Application screen, touch [Standard Size], and then specify the size of the document. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-33 – To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [OFF]. ? What do the Book Erase functions do? % The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies. The "Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together. ? How are settings specified for the “Erase” function? % Refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on page 9-71. In addition, if the "Erase" function in the Application screen is specified, [Erase] under "Book Erase" will be selected. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Center Erase screen 9 Application functions 9-34 bizhub C252 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. – For details on scanning the document, refer to "Scanning a multipage document from the original glass" on page 4-18. Scanning begins. ? How are documents with multiple pages scanned? % Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the document are scanned. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-35 11 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. – If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 12 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-36 bizhub C252 9.8 Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function) A pamphlet with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of the original pamphlet. ! Detail For details on stapling, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. The number of sheets that can be stapled together is no more than 15 and differs depending on the paper type. For details, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. Setting Description Center Erase ON The pages are copied with a 10-mm margin at the center of the document (area bound with staples). Center Erase OFF Copies are made of the entire page, including the center of the document (area bound with staples). Staples Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-37 To copy using the “Booklet Original” function 0 This function is available if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 1 Position the document to be copied. – Load a booklet with the staples removed. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – When using the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page. – When using the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top. 9 Application functions 9-38 bizhub C252 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 3 Touch [Booklet Original]. The Booklet Original screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-39 4 Touch either [Center Erase ON] or [Center Erase OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Booklet Original" function, touch [OFF]. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. – If the document is placed on the original glass, scanning begins. Touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key to begin printing. – For details on scanning the document from the original glass, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. 9 Application functions 9-40 bizhub C252 9.9 Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function) A single document image can be copied repeatedly onto a single sheet of paper. The copies are produced with the number of repeats automatically adjusted according to the document and paper sizes and the zoom ratio. The following repeating formats and settings are available. Setting Description With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around the image appears as a margin. Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however, a part of the image may be cut off. Document "With Margin" setting "Without Margin" setting Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-41 To copy using the “Image Repeat” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 4 Touch [Image Repeat]. The Image Repeat screen appears. [Booklet Original] appears if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514 or optional finisher FS-603 is installed. 9 Application functions 9-42 bizhub C252 5 Select the layout method. 6 Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. – If the document size does not appear under "Scan Range"or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set Range], and then specify the area to be scanned from any of the screens. – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size is automatically detected when the [Start] key is pressed, so no document size appears under "Scan Range". – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-43 – To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [OFF]. ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch [ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen 9 Application functions 9-44 bizhub C252 ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-45 9.10 Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster Mode” function) A document image can be divided, and each section of the image can be printed enlarged. The finished size can be specified by the image size, zoom ratio or paper size. To copy using the “Poster Mode” function 1 Position the document onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-46 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Poster Mode]. The Poster Mode screen appears. [Booklet Original] appears if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 4 Touch [Image Size], [Zoom] or [Paper Size] under "Finished Size". – The factory default setting for the finished size is "A2". Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-47 – Touch [Image Size], select the finished image size, and then touch [OK]. – If [Inches] is touched, a screen containing preset sizes in inches appears. – If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value. – Touch [Zoom], use the keypad to type in the desired value, and then touch [OK]. 9 Application functions 9-48 bizhub C252 – Touch [Paper Size], select the finished paper size, and then touch [OK]. 5 Check the document size under "Original Size" and then touch [OK] – If the document size does not appear or to specify the document size, touch [Standard Size] and then specify the document size from any of the screens. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-49 – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size does not appear. If a standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is automatically detected after the [Start] key is pressed. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen 9 Application functions 9-50 bizhub C252 ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch [ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 7 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-51 9.11 Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet” function) The page order of the scanned document is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. ! Detail Generally, a multiple of 4 document pages is required with a single-sided document, and a multiple of 2 document pages is required with a doublesided document. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. For details on stapling, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. The binding margin width is automatically specified. 9 Application functions 9-52 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Booklet” function 0 This function is available if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. 3 Touch either [Left Bind] or [Right Bind]. – If the document contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top, regardless of which setting is selected. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [OFF]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-53 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-54 bizhub C252 9.12 Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function) A document can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. ! Detail If the "Single Color" function is set, the colors are inversed with the selected color. If the "Background Color" function is set, the colors, including the selected background color, are inversed. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-55 To copy using the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. 3 Touch [Neg-/Pos. Reverse]. ? How is the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function canceled? % Touch [Neg-/Pos. Reverse] again. 4 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-56 bizhub C252 9.13 Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function) A copy can be printed in the mirror image of the original document. To copy using the “Mirror Image” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-57 3 Touch [Mirror Image]. The Mirror Image screen appears. 4 Check the document size under "Original Size", and then touch [OK]. – If the document size does not appear or to specify the document size, touch [Standard Size], and then specify the document size from any of the screens. – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size does not appear. If a standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is automatically detected after the [Start] key is pressed. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 9 Application functions 9-58 bizhub C252 – To cancel the "Mirror Image" function, touch [OFF]. ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch[ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-59 ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-60 bizhub C252 9.14 Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function) This function allows you to copy a document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). ! Detail For sample images of the "Background Color" function, refer to "“Background Color” function" on page 1-36. To copy using the “Background Color” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-61 3 Touch [Background Color]. The Background Color screen appears. 4 Select the desired background color. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Background Color" function, touch [OFF]. ? Can other background colors displayed? % Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ] to display a different list of colors. 5 Touch [OK]. 9 Application functions 9-62 bizhub C252 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-63 9.15 Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters) You can adjust the quality of color copies as desired. There are 10 Adjust Color parameters that can be used in any combination. In addition, you can check the specified settings by printing a sample copy. ! Detail To print a sample copy in order to check the print result with the current settings, touch [Sample Copy]. For details about sample copies, refer to "Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings (Sample Copy)" on page 9-66. Setting Description Brightness This parameter can be used to make the image either lighter or darker. Contrast This parameter can be used to make the image either crisper or smoother. Saturation This parameter can be used to adjust the vividness of the colors in the image. Red This parameter can be used to adjust the level of red in the image. Green This parameter can be used to adjust the level of green in the image. Blue This parameter can be used to adjust the level of blue in the image. Hue The hue is divided into red, blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can be made either more reddish or more bluish. Copy Density This parameter can be used to adjust the copy density. Sharpness This parameter emphasizes the edges of text so that they can be read more easily. In addition, this parameter can be used to make an overly sharp image softer or a blurry image clearer. Color Balance This parameter can be used to adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K). • Increasing the amount of yellow and magenta or decreasing the amount of cyan increases the red tinge. • Increasing the amount of yellow and cyan or decreasing the amount of magenta increases the green tinge. • Increasing the amount of magenta and cyan or decreasing the amount of yellow increases the blue tinge. • Increasing the amount of yellow or decreasing the amount of magenta and cyan increases the yellow tinge. • Increasing the amount of black increases the black tinge. 9 Application functions 9-64 bizhub C252 To adjust the Adjust Color parameters As an example, the procedure for adjusting the Brightness parameter is described below. 1 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. 2 Touch [Adjust Color]. From the Adjust Color screen, select the desired parameter. The Adjust Color screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-65 3 Touch [Brightness] in the Adjust Color screen. The Darker <-> Lighter (Brightness) screen appears. 4 Touch [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] to change the setting. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Brightness" parameter, touch [OFF]. – The "Sharpness" parameter can only be specified in single increments. – In the Color Balance screen, touch the button for a color, and then specify the adjustment setting. ? How can a setting be specified for the Adjust Color parameter? % To change the setting, touch [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] to specify a setting between -3 and +3 in increments of 1 or 1/3. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 2 Note Even though the setting can be specified in increments of 1/3, the setting will appear at the nearest full increment in the Adjust Color screen. 9 Application functions 9-66 bizhub C252 Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings (Sample Copy) You can make a sample copy of your document to see how it will appear with the currently specified color adjustment settings. As an example, the procedure for the Brightness parameter is described below. ! Detail For details on displaying the screen for each Adjust Color parameter, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 2 Note [Sample Copy] does not appear in the Color Balance screen. When the Sample Copy screen is displayed, no key other than [Reset] or [Start] can be used. Place the document on the original glass with the image to be checked positioned within the sample area. The sample copy will be printed even if the edges of the document extend off the original glass. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-67 To make sample copies 1 Touch [Sample Copy] in the Darker ´ Lighter (Brightness) screen. The Sample Copy screen appears. 2 Load paper of a size listed under "Paper that can be used" into the paper tray. 3 Place the document within the sample area of the original glass. 4 Press the [Start] key. 2 Note After the sample copy is printed, the parameter screen appears again. Each sample copy that is printed is counted in the print counter. 9 Application functions 9-68 bizhub C252 9.16 Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function) Copies can be printed with a filing margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted by specifying the position of the filing margin. In addition, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a filing margin. ! Detail If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI “Left” setting “Top” setting “Right” setting Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-69 To copy using the “Page Margin” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Page Margin]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Page Margin screen appears. 3 Specify the position of the filing margin. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Page Margin" function, touch [OFF]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. 9 Application functions 9-70 bizhub C252 ? What happens when “Auto” is specified? % The factory default setting is "Auto". Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Using the keypad, specify the margin width. – If "None" is selected, the margin width is set to 0 mm. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a filing margin. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the filing margin was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. ? How can the entered margin position be corrected? % Without changing the margin width, change the margin position. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-71 9.17 Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function) Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the document, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the document or a different width can be erased along each side of the document. To copy using the “Erase” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Erase screen appears. A A A: 0.0 mm to 50.0 mm 9 Application functions 9-72 bizhub C252 3 Specify the area to be erased. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Erase" function, touch [OFF]. ? What happens when [Frame] is selected? % The same width is erased on all four sides of the document. The factory default setting is "Frame". ? Can the settings be combined? % "Frame" cannot be combined with the other settings ("Top", "Left", "Right" or "Bottom"). 4 Touch [-], [+] or [None] to specify the width to be erased. – To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position, specify different settings for "Top", "Left", "Right", and "Bottom". – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-73 9.18 Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment settings) When the copy paper is larger than the original document, copies can be made with the document image centered and enlarged to fill the paper. The image can be adjusted in any of the following ways. Setting Description Full Size The area that contains the entire image is centered and enlarged to the size of the paper. "Centering" is also selected automatically. Center Zoom The image is enlarged to the size of the paper so that the paper is filled. However, some parts of the image may be lost. "Centering" is also selected automatically. Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged. Full Size Center Zoom Centering 9 Application functions 9-74 bizhub C252 To copy using the Image Adjustment settings 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – If "Full Size" or "Center Zoom" is to be set, position the document on the original glass. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjustment]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Image Adjustment screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If "Full Size" or "Center Zoom" is selected, "Centering" is also selected. – Only "Centering" can also be selected. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel] – To cancel the Image Adjustment settings, touch [OFF]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-75 4 Check the document size under "Original Size", and then touch [OK]. – If the document size does not appear or to specify the document size, touch [Standard Size], and then specify the document size from any of the screens. – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size does not appear. If a standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is automatically detected after the [Start] key is pressed. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen 9 Application functions 9-76 bizhub C252 ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch [ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-77 9.19 Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on copies (Stamp functions) The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made. The following Stamp functions are available and can be combined. Setting Description Reference Date/Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages. Refer to p. 9-78. Page # Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number. Refer to p. 9-81. Set Numbering Print a four-digit distribution number in the background of each set of copies. Refer to p. 9-85. Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents improper copying), such as a preset stamp or the date. Refer to p. 9-87. 9 Application functions 9-78 bizhub C252 Printing the Date/Time (“Date/Time” function) To copy using the “Date/Time” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. The Date/Time screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-79 4 Touch the buttons for the desired settings under "Date Type", "Time Type" and "Pages". – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Date/Time" function, touch [OFF]. – To print the stamp only on the front cover page, touch [Cover Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. ? Can the time be omitted? % If "None" is selected, the time is not printed. 5 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. 9 Application functions 9-80 bizhub C252 – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", use the keypad or touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment setting, and then touch [OK]. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adj.]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the adjustment value was incorrectly entered, touch [No Adj.] or press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 7 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-81 Printing the page number (“Page #” function) To copy using the “Page #” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 Touch [Page #]. The Page # screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-82 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting page number. – If necessary, touch [Chapter], and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number. – The setting for "Page #" can be set to a number between –99999 and 99999, and the setting for "Chapter" can be set to a number between –100 and 100. When specifying a starting number, switch the number between positive and negative by pressing the [ ] key. If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "–1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Page #" function, touch [OFF]. 5 Specify the page number format. 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-83 – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", use the keypad or touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment setting, and then touch [OK]. – To also specify settings for Application functions "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters", touch [Insert Sheet Setting], and then select the settings for the pages to be printed. – Blank pages inserted using the "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. – If "Except for Front Cover" or "Do Not Print Page #" is selected under "Cover Mode", page numbers are printed starting with "2" in single-sided copies and starting with "3" in double-sided copies. 9 Application functions 9-84 bizhub C252 – If "Do Not Print Page #" is selected, inserted pages are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. If "Skip the page(s)" is selected, inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are not printed on them. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adj.]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the adjustment value was incorrectly entered, touch [No Adj.] or press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Stamp screen appears again. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-85 Printing the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function) ! Detail The distribution number is normally printed as a four-digit number. If "Start Number" is set to "1", "0001" is printed. To copy using the “Set Numbering” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 Touch [Set Numbering]. The Set Numbering screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-86 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting number. – The starting number can be set between 0 and 9999. – To print the stamp only on the front cover page, touch [Cover Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Set Numbering" function, touch [OFF]. 5 Touch a button under "Text Color" and under "Pages" to specify the desired settings. – Pages printed with the "Black" Color setting and "Red" or "Blue" selected under "Text Color" are counted as 2-color prints. – If the color of the stamp text is different from the second color selected when "Color" was set to "2 Color", copies are included in the Full Color counter. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-87 Printing copy protection text (“Copy Protect” function) ! Detail If the "Copy Protect" function is set, hidden text is printed in order to prevent improper copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The copy protection text is printed on all pages. Specific pages cannot be specified. To copy using the “Copy Protect” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 1 2 1 REPORT 3 3 Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft 2 2 Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft 1 1 REPORT 9 Application functions 9-88 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Copy Protect]. The Copy Protect screen appears. 4 Select the format for the copy protection text. – To cancel the "Copy Protect" function, touch [OFF]. Touching [OFF] in the settings screen for the format of copy protection text only cancels the settings in that screen. – The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – If more than eight text lines are selected, the new ones are added at the top of the column, replacing the ones at the bottom. – If [Registered Stamp] or [Fixed Stamp] was touched, a screen containing buttons for the available stamps appears. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-89 – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. – If [Date/Time] was touched, the Copy Protect>Date/Time screen appears. Select the desired settings under "Date Type" and "Time Type", and then touch [OK]. – The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the document is scanned. – If [Serial Number] key is touched, the serial number for this machine is printed. – For details on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative. – If necessary, touch [Detail Settings], and then change the copy protection settings. Touch the desired button in the Copy Protect>Detail Setting screen, and then change the setting in the screen that appears. 9 Application functions 9-90 bizhub C252 – The factory default settings are listed below. [Color]: Black, [Density]: Standard, [Pattern]: Embossed (Pattern Contrast 0), [Size]: Normal, [Pattern Overwrite]: Front Color screen Density screen Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-91 – The settings under "Pattern Contrast" in the Pattern screen can only be specified in single increments between –2 and +2. Pattern Size screen Pattern Overwrite screen Pattern screen 9 Application functions 9-92 bizhub C252 – If necessary, touch [Position], and then change the printing angle in the Position screen. Select desired angle, and then touch [OK]. – If necessary, touch [Change Position/Delete] in the Position screen, and then change the arrangement of the text in the Position Change/Delete screen. – If there are no more than four lines in the selected copy protection text, the angle can be changed. – To change the arrangement, touch [Change Position], select the copy protection text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-93 – To add space to the copy protection text, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the arrow that appeared beside the specified formats for the copy protection text, and then touch [Insert]. – To delete the copy protection text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-94 bizhub C252 2 Note If the document is a single color and "Magenta" or "Cyan" was selected as the color for the copy protection text, the copies will be counted as having two colors in the Total counter. The same will occur if the document is a single color other than black and the color for the copy protection text is set to "Black". 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-3 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10.1 Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner is about to run out, the advanced warning message shown below appears. ! Detail About 1000 (A4) pages can be printed after the message "Toner Cartridge (X) needs to be replaced soon." appears. When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. When the message "There is no toner." appears, the machine stops operating. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-4 bizhub C252 When the toner is empty, the warning message shown below appears and copies can no longer be made. 2 Note When the message appears, replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail For details on replacing the toner cartridges, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 10-6. Display in Enlarge Display mode When the toner is empty, the screen shown below appears. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-5 Touch to display the message shown below. 7 CAUTION Handling toner and the toner cartridges % Do not throw toner or the toner cartridge into a fire. % Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns. 7 CAUTION Precautions for toner spills % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. 2 Reminder Do not replace the toner cartridge until the message "There is no Toner." appears. In addition, do not replace the toner cartridge of any color other than the one indicated in the message on the touch panel. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-6 bizhub C252 To replace the toner cartridge The procedure for replacing any of the toner cartridges (yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) or black (K)) is the same. Example: Replacing the black toner cartridge 0 When replacing the black toner cartridge, be sure to replace filter 2. A new filter 2 is included in the package with the black toner cartridge. 0 When replacing the black toner cartridge, be sure to clean the electrostatic charger wire. For details on cleaning the electrostatic charger wire, refer to "Electrostatic charger wire" on page 11-7. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Pull up the locking tab of the empty toner cartridge to unlock it. Pull out the toner cartridge as far as possible, and then pull it up to remove it. ? How are used toner cartridge disposed of? % Do not throw away used toner cartridges. Instead, keep them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-7 3 Prepare the new toner cartridge. – Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the label in the cartridge compartment. ? Can a toner cartridge of a different color be installed? % The toner cartridge of a color different than the one that was removed cannot be installed. If the wrong toner cartridge is installed with extreme force, the machine may be damaged. 4 Remove the new toner cartridge from its packaging, and then shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times. – The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted. If it has, be sure to shake the toner cartridge until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge. 5 Align the toner cartridge with the slots in the machine, and then insert the cartridge until the locking tab locks into place. – When inserting the new toner cartridge, fully insert it until it snaps into place. 6 Close the front door. ? Why can’t the door be closed securely? % Check that the toner cartridge is fully inserted. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-8 bizhub C252 2 Note Check that a toner cartridge of the same color as the one to be replaced has been prepared. 2 Reminder Be careful about the installation location of the toner cartridges, since it is different for other colors. The shape of the black toner cartridge is different from the shapes of the toner cartridges for the other colors. When installing the new filter 2, fully insert it until it snaps into place. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-9 10.2 Replacing the staples When finisher is installed and is about to run out of staples, the message shown below appears. Display in Enlarge Display mode ! Detail Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-10 bizhub C252 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Turn the jammed-staple-clearing dial to the left in order to position stapler at the center. 3 Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you from stapler, as described in the touch panel messages. Staple cartridge holders Stapler Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-11 4 Remove the staple cartridge from the staple case. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Fully insert the staple cartridge as far as possible. 6 Peel the tape off of the staple cartridge. 7 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. Staple cartridge 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-12 bizhub C252 8 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-13 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 1 Open the front door of the finisher. 2 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue. ? What should be done if the misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned too far? % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely adjust it. 3 Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible. Removal indicator Misfeedclearing dial 1 Stapler unit 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-14 bizhub C252 4 Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder, lift it up, and then pull it out. 5 Press the button marked "PUSH" on the side of the staple cartridge holder. The staple case is released. 6 Pull up the staple case. Staple cartridge holder Staple cartridge holder Staple case Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-15 7 Remove the staple cartridge from the staple case. 8 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Fully insert the staple cartridge as far as possible. 9 Press the staple case down. 10 Peel the tape off of the staple cartridge. Staple cartridge 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-16 bizhub C252 11 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. 12 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 13 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position. 14 Close the front door. 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-17 To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-514 1 Open the front door. 2 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you to remove it. – Only touch the blue parts of the staple cartridge. 3 Remove the empty cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 4 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-18 bizhub C252 5 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 6 Close the front door. 2 Reminder Replace the staple cartridge only after the message has appeared. If the staple cartridge is replaced before the message appears, the machine may be damaged. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-19 To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher 1 Raise the copy output tray, and then push down the staple cartridge holder and remove it. 2 Press in the area marked "PUSH" to unlock the staple cartridge holder. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. PUSH 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-20 bizhub C252 4 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. 5 Slowly pull off the seal. 6 Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then push it up until it locks into place. – When inserting the staple cartridge holder, be sure to insert it so that it faces the correct direction. 7 Return the copy output tray to its original position. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-21 8 Pull the handle of the misfeedclearing door to open it, and then close it. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-22 bizhub C252 10.3 Clearing a staple jam If a staple jam occurs in the finisher, the message shown below appears. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-23 2 Reminder Be careful when clearing jammed staples since injuries may result. If the staples become jammed, follow the procedure described below. If the paper is pulled out with too much force, the stapler may be damaged. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-24 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-501 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Turn the jammed-staple-clearing dial to the left in order to position stapler at the center. 3 Pull the staple cartridge holder out toward you. Stapler Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-25 4 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out one sheet of staples. 5 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position. 6 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. 7 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your technical representative. Sheet of staples Shutter 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-26 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-603 0 If the message "Staple mode cannot be used." appears, be sure to perform the following procedure. If the following procedure is not followed and the paper is pulled out with too much force, the stapler unit may be damaged. 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any misfed paper. 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover. 4 Open the misfeed-clearing guide for the finisher, and then remove any misfed paper. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-27 5 Open the front door of the finisher. 6 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue. ? If the misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned too far % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely adjust it. 7 Remove all paper fed into the exit tray 1. Removal indicator Misfeedclearing dial 1 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-28 bizhub C252 8 Open the Right-side door, and then pull out any misfed paper in the transport section. 9 Clockwise turn the misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section. Feed out into the exit tray 2 the paper that could not be fed out in step 8, and then pull out the paper. 10 Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible. Misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-29 11 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 2 clockwise until the cartridge removal indicators are aligned. The staple cartridge moves to a position from where it can be removed. ? What should be done if the misfeed-clearing dial 2 is turned too far? % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 2 counterclockwise to adjust it so the cartridge removal indicators are aligned. 12 Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder, lift it up, and then pull it out. 13 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge. Removal 2 position Staple cartridge holder 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-30 bizhub C252 14 Pull out toward you the two staples jammed at the end of the staple cartridge. ? What happens if both staples are not removed? % Stapling cannot continue correctly. 15 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge to its original position. 16 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. 17 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 18 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-31 19 Close the front door. 20 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder Do not pull out paper with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may be damaged. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-32 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in the finisher FS-514 1 Remove all paper from the finisher. 2 Open the front door. 3 Raise lever FN1, turn lever FN2, and then pull out any paper. 4 Lower guide FN3, and then pull out any paper. FN1 FN2 FN3 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-33 – If the punch kit is installed, pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. 5 Return guide FN3 to its original position. – If the punch kit is installed, insert hole-punch waste container FN3.1 in its original position. 6 Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover, and then pull out any paper. 7 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then pull out any paper. FN3.1 FN4 FN6 FN5 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-34 bizhub C252 8 Turn the dial to the left to move the stapler toward the front. 9 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you to remove it. – Only touch the blue parts of the staple cartridge. 10 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out one sheet of staples. 11 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-35 12 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 13 Close the front door. 2 Reminder If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your technical representative. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-36 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher 1 Open the front door. 2 Raise lever FN1, turn lever FN2, and then pull out any paper. 3 Lower guide FN3, and then pull out any paper. – If the punch kit is installed, pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. FN1 FN2 FN3 FN3.1 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-37 4 Return guide FN3 to its original position. – If the punch kit is installed, insert hole-punch waste container FN3.1 in its original position. 5 Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover, and then pull out any paper. 6 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then pull out any paper. 7 Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then pull out any paper. 8 Close the misfeed-clearing door. FN4 FN6 FN5 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-38 bizhub C252 9 Raise the finishing tray, and then push down the staple cartridge holder and remove it. 10 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out one sheet of staples. 11 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position. 12 Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then push it down until it locks into place. 13 Return the copy output tray to its original position. 14 Close the front door. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-39 10.4 Emptying the waste containers If the hole-punch waste container in punch kit installed on finisher becomes full, the message shown below appears (if it can be emptied by the user). 2 Note The setting for emptying the hole-punch waste container should be specified by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative. The default setting is "Service". If a message appears, immediately contact the technical representative. Display for the Punch Dust Box setting 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-40 bizhub C252 Display while a job is being performed ! Detail When performed by user If the hole-punch waste container has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting, empty the hole-punch waste container. To cancel the Punch setting and continue the job, touch [Cancel Punch]. When performed by technical representative If the hole-punch waste container has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job, touch [Cancel Punch]. However, the continued job is printed without holes being punched. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-41 Display in Enlarge Display mode 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-42 bizhub C252 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-603 Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste container. 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Pull out the hole-punch waste container. 3 Empty the hole-punch waste container. 4 Install the hole-punch waste container into its original position. 5 Slide the finisher back against the machine. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-43 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-514 Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste container. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. 3 Empty the hole-punch waste container. 4 Insert the hole-punch waste container at its original position. 5 Close the front door. FN3.1 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-44 bizhub C252 10.5 Replacing the waste toner box When it is almost time to replace the waste toner box (and if it is replaceable by the user), the message shown in the following illustration appears, warning about the replacement period. 2 Reminder When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail The number of copies that can be made from the time that the message "Please have Waste Toner Box replaced soon." appears until the time that the message "Waste Toner Box needs replacing. Follow the Replacing Instruction." appears differs depending on the specified copy settings and the part/supplies. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-45 When it is time to replace the waste toner box (and if it is replaceable by the user), the message "Waste Toner Box needs replacing. Follow the Replacing Instruction." appears and the machine stops operating. Display in Enlarge Display mode When the time to replace the part is reached, the following screen appears. Touch to display the message shown below. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-46 bizhub C252 To replace the waste toner box Follow the procedure described below to replace the waste toner box. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Pull the waste toner release lever. 3 Remove the waste toner box. 4 Install the new waste toner box. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-47 5 Remove filter 1, and then install the new filter 1. 6 Close the front door. 7 CAUTION Handling toner and the toner cartridges % Do not throw toner or the waste toner box into a fire. % Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns. 7 CAUTION Precautions for toner spills % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-48 bizhub C252 2 Reminder Do not tilt the removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill. Do not throw away used waste toner boxes. Instead, keep them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative. 11 Care of the machine Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-3 11 Care of the machine 11.1 Cleaning This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part. Housing 1 Clean the surface of the housing by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Be sure to turn off the machine (set the power switch to “o”) before cleaning it. Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the housing. Original glass % Clean the surface of the original glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original glass. 11 Care of the machine 11-4 bizhub C252 Control panel % Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them. In addition, never use a mild household detergent, glass cleaner, benzene or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-5 Document transfer belt 1 Clean the document transfer belt by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Carefully slide the belt to the left to expose a hidden area of the belt. 3 Clean the newly exposed surface of the belt by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent (as in step 1). Repeat the above step until the entire surface of the document transfer belt has been wiped clean. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document transfer belt. 11 Care of the machine 11-6 bizhub C252 Original cover pad % Clean the surface of the pad by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original cover pad. Paper Take-Up roller % Clean the paper take-up rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper takeup roller. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-7 Electrostatic charger wire If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Next, slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as much as possible. Repeat the above operations three times. 3 Securely insert each charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door. 11 Care of the machine 11-8 bizhub C252 Print head If the print head becomes dirty, decreased print quality may result. If this occurs, clean the print head according to the following procedure. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Remove the cleaning tool from the machine’s front door. 3 Insert the cleaning tool into the print head cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back and forth movement two or three times. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-9 11.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) Viewing counters The Meter Count screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be viewed. In addition, the list of counters can be printed. To view the counters 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Details] in the sub display area. The list of counters appears. ? Can the list of counters be printed? % Touch [Print], select the paper size, and then press the [Start] key. 11 Care of the machine 11-10 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-11 Viewing the coverage rate The amount of toner that was used can be viewed in the Toner Coverage screen. To view the coverage rate 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Details] in the sub display area. The list of counters appears. 3 Touch [Toner Coverage]. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 11 Care of the machine 11-12 bizhub C252 11.3 When the message “Preventive maintenance time.” appears If the message "Preventive maintenance time." appears, contact your technical representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-3 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12.1 Overview of the Job List screen Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues the copy operation in this machine. This queued operation is called a job. In the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts are also queued as jobs. - Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screen. - Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list. - Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed (printed). 2 Note The job number identifies the job; it does not indicate the printing order. In addition, the job number does not change until the job is deleted. By using the "Increase Priority" function, the selected job can be moved to the front of the queue so that it is printed first. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-4 bizhub C252 Multi-Job feature Queued jobs are managed by the machine. - While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A total of 251 jobs can be queued. - The number of jobs possible for each function is listed below. (The values listed below are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings.) – Copy mode: 5 – Interrupt mode: 1 – Scan mode: 5 – TWAIN (Push, Pull): 1 – Printing: 10 – Faxes (Quick transmissions): 1 – Faxes (Memory transmissions): 50 – Faxes (Timer TX): 20 – Received faxes: 100 – Faxes (Polling RX): 1 – Faxes (Polling TX): 1 – Shared: 56 – Total: 251 - When one job is finished being printed, the next queued print job automatically begins. 2 Note Up to 251 jobs, including print jobs, scanner transmission jobs, fax transmission jobs and received fax/saved jobs, can be queued. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-5 Job list screens An overview of the Job List screens is provided below. - From the Job List screen, the following tabs for various specific functions can be displayed. – Print: Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes – Scan: Lists scanner transmission jobs – Fax TX: Lists fax transmission jobs – RX/User Box: Lists received fax jobs and print jobs saved in boxes 2 Note As the factory default, "Job List Default" is set to "Current Print Jobs". For details on changing the default display for the Job List screen, refer to "Display setting" on page 13-30. The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen. However, if the screen is changed while a setting is being changed, that setting is canceled. - A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function. – Current Jobs: Lists jobs that are queued and being performed, allowing you to check the current status of the machine – Job History: Lists jobs that have been completed, including jobs that were not performed due to an error, allowing you to check the history and results of all jobs - The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list. For example, the lists of stored jobs and active jobs are displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab, and the lists of deleted jobs, completed jobs and all jobs are displayed in the Job History list. The types of jobs that can be selected differ depending on the selected tab. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-6 bizhub C252 - The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below. Name Description [Print] A selected button indicates which job list is currently displayed. Displays the Print tab of the Job List screen [Scan] Displays the Scan tab of the Job List screen For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. [Fax TX] Displays the Fax TX tab of the Job List screen For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. [RX/User Box] Displays the RX/User Box tab of the Job List screen For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. [Current Jobs] Switches from Job History to Current Jobs This lists the jobs that are currently being performed and the jobs are queued (waiting) to be performed. [Job History] Switches from Current Jobs to Job History. This lists the completed jobs. [Held Jobs] [Active Jobs] (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Specifies the type of jobs displayed in the Job List screen Change the display mode by touching the appropriate button. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Exit] Quits Job List mode and returns to the screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched [Delete]*1 Deletes job selected in the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "To delete a job" on page 12-8. [Increase Priority] (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Selects the next job to be printed after the current job is finished. For details, refer to "To increase priority for printing" on page 12-19. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Check Job]*1 Displays screens for checking the settings for the job selected in the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "To check the job settings" on page 12-10. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-7 *1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed. The following information is listed in the Print tab. [Detail] Displays screens for checking the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time and number of copies for jobs in the job lists. For details, refer to "Displayed information" on page 12-11. [ ]/[ ] arrows When there are more jobs than the five that can be displayed at one time, touch these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list (higher or lower in the printing order). Name Description Item Name Description No. Job identification number assigned when the job is queued User Name Displays the type (source) of the job. "COPY" is displayed for copy jobs. Status (Current Jobs list only) Displays the status of the job Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from a computer If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users. The names of confidential documents are not displayed for other users. Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued # of Pgs. Displays the number of pages in the original document # of Sets Displays the number of printed pages With jobs listed as "Printing" in the Current Jobs list, a count of the number of pages printed is displayed. Result (Job History list only) Displays the result of the operation (Job Complete, Error Cleared, Deleted by User, Mode cancelled from conflict) 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-8 bizhub C252 12.2 Performing operations on jobs To delete a job A queued job or job being printed (job in the Active Jobs list) can be deleted. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 In the Print tab, display the job to be deleted. – Jobs in the Job History list cannot be deleted. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. – If the job to be deleted is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-9 4 Check the information that is displayed, and then touch [Yes] if the correct job is indicated. – To quit deleting the job, touch [No]. The screen displayed before [Delete] was touched appears again, and the job is deleted from the Current Jobs list. 5 Touch [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. The screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched appears again. 2 Note If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-10 bizhub C252 To check the job settings Job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose settings are to be checked, and then touch [Check Job]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – The Mode Check screen appears. – The contents and number of Mode Check screens differ depending on the job that was selected. – The number to the left of [ Back] indicates the number of the currently displayed screen/the total number of screens. – To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. 4 To finish checking the settings, touch [Close] or [Exit], or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Check Job] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, touch [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-11 Displayed information The following information can be checked from the Job List screen. - Print tab Status (Receiving, Waiting, Printing, Printing Stopped, Print Error, Job Stored)*1, Result (Job complete, Error cleared, Deleted by User, Deleted Due To Error)*2, Error Detail*2, Document Name, User Name, Start Time, End Time, # of pgs., # of Sets, Output Tray - Scan tab Status (Transferring, Dialing, Waiting)*1, Result (Job complete, Error cleared, User Delete)*2, Error Detail*2, Address, Type, User Name, Time of Storage, End Time, # of pgs., File Name, No. of Dest (number of jobs being sent/number of specified recipients)*3 - Fax TX tab Status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Redial Waiting)*1, Result (Job Complete, Error cleared, User Delete, Deleted Due To Error)*2, Error Detail*2, Address, Type, User Name, TX No., Time of Storage, Start Time*4, End Time, TX Time, # of pgs., Page Sent (number of jobs being sent/number of specified recipients)*3 - RX/User Box tab Detailed Status of Queued Job, Status (Receiving, Dialing)*1, Result (Job complete, Error cleared, User Delete, Deleted Due To Error)*2, Error Detail*2, RX User Box (box number/box name), User Name, Time Stored, # of pgs., # of Sets, Output Tray, File Name *1Displayed only for jobs in the Current Jobs list *2Displayed only for jobs in the Job History list *3Displayed only for Current Jobs transmitted to multiple recipients *4Displayed only for timer transmission jobs 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-12 bizhub C252 To check the job details 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose details are to be checked, and then touch [Detail]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The Check Detail screen appears. 4 After the desired information has been checked, touch [Close] or [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Detail] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, touch [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. ! Detail To delete a queued job or job being performed, touch [Delete] in the Check Detail screen. If [Detail] appears in the Check Detail screen for a job selected from the Scan or Fax TX tab, detailed information is available on the multiple recipients that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission. To view the information, touch [Detail]. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-13 To display current jobs (held jobs and active jobs lists) The lists of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is displayed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired list. – Held Jobs: Displays only stored jobs – Active Jobs: Displays only jobs that are being performed ! Detail For details on the function of each button, refer to "Job list screens" on page 12-5. Proof copies of stored jobs can be printed. For details, refer to "To print a sample copy of a stored job" on page 12-15. Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "To print a stored job" on page 12-17. To give priority for output to a job, touch [Increase Priority] in the Active Jobs list. For details, refer to "To increase priority for printing" on page 12-19. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-14 bizhub C252 To display Job History 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch [Job History]. The Job History screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired list. – Deleted Jobs: Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished – Finished Jobs: Displays only jobs that were correctly completed – Active Jobs: Displays all jobs Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-15 To print a sample copy of a stored job A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked. The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic system reset operation was performed and proof print jobs for data in the boxes. 1 Display the Held Jobs list in the Current Jobs list of the Print tab. 2 Touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 3 From the job list, select the job whose sample copy is to be printed, and then touch [Proof Print]. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. ? How is the printing of a sample copy stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-16 bizhub C252 4 Touch [OK]. – After the single sample copy is printed, check the print result. ! Detail To change the settings, touch [Change setting] in the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "To print a stored job" below. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-17 To print a stored job A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed. 1 Display the Held Jobs list in the Current Jobs list of the Print tab. 2 Touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 3 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – To continue without changing the specified copy settings, skip to step 6. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. – To display [Change Setting], touch [Print]. The Change Setting screen appears. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-18 bizhub C252 5 In the Change Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 6 In the Release Held Job screen, touch [OK]. The stored job appears in the Active Jobs list and is printed. ? Can a sample copy be printed? % For details on printing a sample copy, refer to "To print a sample copy of a stored job" on page 12-15. ? How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-19 To increase priority for printing The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected. If an Administrator mode function was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. If the job currently being printed can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted (a job has already been interrupted or a job was already given priority), printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished. 1 Display the Active Jobs list in the Current Jobs list of the Print tab. 2 Touch [Increase Priority]. The Increase Priority screen appears. 3 In the job list, touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it, and then touch [OK]. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-20 bizhub C252 – If the job to be given priority is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins. ? How is the changing of the output priority stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. 13 Utility Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-3 13 Utility 13.1 Overview of utility mode parameters List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed. 2 Note The buttons that appear in the screens differ depending on the specified settings. Utility/Counter One-Touch Registration (p. 13-23) [1] Scan (p. 13-23) [1] Address Book [1] E-Mail [2] FTP [3] SMB [4] User Box [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-mail) [1] Subject [2] Text [2] Fax (p. 13-23) [1] Address Book [1] Abbr. Dial [2] E-Mail [3] User Box [4] IP Address Fax Destination [5] Internet Fax Address [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-mail) [1] Subject [2] Text 13 Utility 13-4 bizhub C252 One-Touch Registration (p. 13-23) [3] User Box (p. 13-24) [1] Public/ Personal User Box [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box User Setting (p. 13-27) [1] System Setting (p. 13-27) [1] Language Selection [2] Measurement Unit Setting [3] Paper Tray Setting [1] Auto Tray Select Setting [2] Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF [3] No Matching Paper in Tray Setting [4] Print Lists [4] Auto Color Level Adjustment [5] Power Save Setting Low Power Mode Setting Sleep Mode Setting [6] Output Setting [1] Print/Fax Output Setting Print Fax [2] Output Tray Setting [3] Bin Setting [7] AE Level Adjustment Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-5 User Setting (p. 13-27) [2] Display Setting (p. 13-30) [1] Sub Screen Display ON/OFF [2] Scan Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Program Default Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display [3] Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Default Program Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display No. of Characters for Dest. Display [4] Copy Screen Copy Operating Screen [5] Fax Active Screen TX Display RX Display [6] Copy Initial Screen Setting [7] Job List Default Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-6 bizhub C252 User Setting (p. 13-27) [3] Initial Setting (p. 13-32) [4] Copier Setting (p. 13-33) Auto Paper Select for Small Originals Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Zoom for Combine/ Booklet Sort/Group Auto change When AMS Direction is Incorrect Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Select Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Setting for Separate Scan Print Jobs During Copy Operation [5] Scanner Setting (p. 13-35) JPEG Compression Level Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-7 User Setting (p. 13-27) [6] Printer Setting (p. 13-35) [1] Basic Setting PDL Setting Number of Sets Original Direction Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP A4/A3 <-> LTR/LGR Auto Switch Banner Setting [2] Paper Setting Paper Tray Default Paper Size 2-Sided Print Bind Direction Staple Hole-Punch Banner Paper Tray [3] PCL Setting [1] Font Setting Internal Disk Soft [2] Symbol Set [3] Font Size [4] Line/Page [5] CR/LF Mapping [4] PS Setting PS Error Print [5] Print Reports Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-8 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [1] Power Save Setting Low Power Mode Setting Sleep Mode Setting Power Save Key Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) [2] Output Setting [1] Print/Fax Output Settings Printer Fax [2] Output Tray Setting [3] Bin Setting [4] Offset by Each Job Setting [3] Date/Time Setting [4] Daylight Savings Time Setting [5] Weekly Timer Setting [1] Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting [2] Time Setting [3] Date Setting [4] Select Time for Power Save [5] Password for Non-Business Hours Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-9 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [6] Restrict User Access [1] Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs [2] Delete Saved Program Jobs [3] Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Deleting Other User’s Jobs Registering and Changing Addresses Changing Zoom Ratio Changing the "From" Address [4] Restrict Operation Setting Restrict Fax Broadcasting [7] Expert Adjustment [1] AE Level Adjustment [2] Printer Adjutment [1] Leading Edge Adjustment [2] Centering [3] Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) [4] Media Adjustment [5] Erase Leading Edge [3] Finisher Adjustment [1] Center Staple Position [2] Fold Position [3] Punch Horizontal Position [4] Punch Resist Loop Size Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-10 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [7] Expert Adjustment [4] Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density- Yellow Thick Paper Image Density- Magenta Thick Paper Image Density- Cyan Thick Paper Image Density- Black Black Image Density [5] Image Stabilization [7] Color Registration Adjust [1] Color Registration Adjust (Yellow) [2] Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) [3] Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) [8] Gradation Adjustment [1] Copy [2] Printer (Gradation) [3] Printer (Resolution) [9] Scanner Adjustment Leading Edgae Adjustment Centering Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-11 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [7] Expert Adjustment [0] ADF Adjustment [1] Centering [2] Original Stop Position [3] Centering Auto Adjustment [4] Auto Adj. of Stop Position [8] List/ Counter [1] Management List Job Setting List [2] Paper Size/Type Counter [9] Reset Setting [1] System Auto Reset [2] Auto Reset [3] Job Reset When Account is changed When Original is set on ADF When NEXT JOB is selected Staple Setting Original Set/Bind Direction Reset Data After Job [0] User Box Setting [1] Delete Unused User Box [2] Delete Secure Print Documents [3] Auto Delete Secure Documents Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-12 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [1] Standard Size Setting Original Glass Original Size Detect Foolscap Size Setting [2] Administrator/ Machine Setting (p. 13-49) [1] Administrator Registration [2] Input Machine Address [3] One- Touch Registration (p. 13-49) [1] Scan [1] Address Book [1] E-Mail [2] FTP [3] SMB [4] User Box [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-Mail) [1] Subject [2] Text [2] Fax [1] Address Book [1] Addr. Dial [2] E-Mail [3] User Box [4] IP Address Fax Destination [5] Internet Fax Address [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-Mail) [1] Subject [2] Text Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-13 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [3] One- Touch Registration (p. 13-49) [3] User Box [1] Public/ Personal User Box [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box [4] Annotation User Box [4] One- Touch Registration List [1] Address Book List [2] Group List [3] Program List [4] E-Mail Subject/Text List [4] User Authentication/ Account Track (p. 13-50) [1] General Settings [2] User Authentication Setting [1] Administrative Setting User Name List Default Function Permission Public User Key [2] User Registration [3] User Counter [3] Account Track Setting [1] Account Track Registration [2] Account Track Counter [4] Print without Authentication [5] Counter List Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-14 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [5] Network Setting (p. 13-53) [1] TCP/IP Setting [2] NetWare Setting [3] http Server Setting Support Operation Printer Information [4] FTP Setting [5] SMB Setting [6] Apple Talk Setting [7] LDAP Setting [1] Enabling LDAP [2] Setting Up LDAP [3] Default LDAP Server Setting [8] E-Mail Setting [1] E-Mail TX (SMTP) [2] E-Mail RX (POP) Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-15 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [5] Network Setting (p. 13-53) [9] Detail Setting [1] Device Setting [2] Time Adjustment Setting [3] Status Notification Setting [1] Notification Address Setting [2] Notification Item Setting [3] Notification Time Setting [4] Total Counter Report Setting [5] PING confirmation [6] SLP Setting [7] LPD Setting [8] Prefix/Suffix Setting [1] ON/OFF Setting [2] Prefix/Suffix Setting [9] Action for Invalid Certifications Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-16 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [5] Network Setting (p. 13-53) [0] SNMP Setting [1] Bonjour Setting [2] TCP Socket Setting [3] Network Fax Setting [1] Network Fax Function Setting IPAddress Fax SIP-Fax Internet Fax [2] SMTP TX Setting [3] SMTP RX Setting [6] Copier Setting (p. 13-54) Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Select Tray when APS OFF Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation [7] Printer Setting (p. 13-55) [1] I/F Timeout [2] Parallel I/F [3] IEEE 1284/USB Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-17 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [1] Header Information [2] Header/ Footer Position Header Position To Name Footer Position [3] Telephone Line Settings Dialing Method Receive Mode Number of RX Call Rings Number of Redials Redial Interval Line Monitor Sound Line Monitor Sound Volume [4] TX/RX Setting Duplex Print (RX) Inch Paper Priority Over A4 Print Paper Selection Print Paper Size Incorrect User Box No.Entry Tray Selection for RX Print Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-18 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [4] TX/RX Setting Min. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages File After Polling TX No. of Sets (RX) [5] Function Setting [1] Function ON/OFF Setting F-Code TX Relay RX Relay Print Destination Check Display Function [3] Memory RX [4] Closed Netword RX [5] Forward TX Setting [7] Incomplete TX Hold [8] PC-Fax RX Setting [9] TSI User Box Setting [6] PBX CN Set Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-19 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [7] Report Settings Activity Report TX Report Sequential TX Report Timer Reservation TX Report Confidential RX Report Bulletin TX Report Relay TX Result Report Relay Request RX Report PC-Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Check Network Fax RX Error Report MDN Message DSN Message Receipt Mail Text [8] Job Settings List Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-20 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [9] Multi Lines Setting [1] Telephone Line Settings Dialing Method Number of RX Call Rings Line Monitor Sound [2] Function Setting PC-FAX TX Setting [3] Multi Lines Setting [4] Sender Fax No. [0] Network Fax Setting [1] Black Compression Level [2] SIP Adaptor Connection Check [3] Internet Fax RX Ability [4] I-Fax Advanced Settings Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-21 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [9] System Connection (p. 13-56) [1] OpenAPI Setting Access Setting Port No. SSL Authentication [2] Call Remote Center [3] Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting [0] Security Setting (p. 13-56) [1] Administrator Password [2] User Box Admin. Setting [3] Administrator Security Level [4] Security Details Password Rules Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error Release Manual Destination Input Print Data Capture Secure Document Access Method Restrict Fax TX [5] Enhanced Security Mode Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-22 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [0] Security Setting (p. 13-56) [6] HDD Setting [1] Check HDD Capacity [2] Temporary Data Overwrite Setting [3] Overwrite All Data [4] HDD Lock Password [5] HDD Formatting [6] HDD Encryption Setting [7] Management Function Setting [1] Function Settings [2] Max. No. of Sets to Copy Setting [3] Network Function Setting [4] Authentication Time Setting [8] Delete Registered Stamp Check Consumable Life (p. 13-131) Banner Printing Meter Count Details Print Toner Coverage Copy Print Scan/Fax Other Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-23 13.2 Selecting a destination register This section describes the main parameters and operations that can be performed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [1 One- Touch Registration]. Scan 2 Note If user authentication has been set to "ON", [1 One-Touch Registration] does not appear when no user has logged on. However, after a user has logged on, [1 One-Touch Registration] appears. Fax 2 Note [2 Fax] appears only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description Address Book Register recipients for scanning. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) Parameter Description Address Book Register recipients for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of Group the User manual. Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) 13 Utility 13-24 bizhub C252 User box 2 Note [2 Bulletin Board User Box] and [3 Relay User Box] appear only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description Public/Personal User Box Register recipients for boxes. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Bulletin Board User Box Relay User Box Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-25 Displaying the destination register screen The following procedure describes how to display the One-Touch Registration Screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch Registration]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "One-Touch Registration" press the [1] key in the keypad. The One-Touch Registration screen appears. 13 Utility 13-26 bizhub C252 2 Note To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-27 13.3 Specifying user settings This section describes the main parameters and operations that can be performed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [2 User Setting]. System setting Language Selection Measurement Unit Setting Paper Tray Setting Description Default Setting Select the language of the Touch Panel messages. English Description Default Setting Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel. mm (Numerical Value), inch (Numerical Value), inch (Fraction) mm (Numerical Value) Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Tray Select Setting Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when the Auto Paper Select setting is performed. In addition, specify the priority of the paper trays when the ATS feature is performed. Tray 2 % Tray 3 % Tray 4 % Tray 1 Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray becomes empty while printing copies. Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray. • Stop Printing (Tray Fixed): The machine stops operating. • Switch Trays (Tray Priority): Whether or not the specified paper tray contains paper of the corresponding size is determined and, if it does not, a different paper tray is selected if it contains paper of the corresponding size. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Tray 1 13 Utility 13-28 bizhub C252 Auto Color Level Adjustment Power Save Setting 2 Note If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set, [Power Save] does not appear. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security setting" on page 13-56. Description Default Setting Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white document when the "Auto Color" setting is selected. The reference level can be set to one of 5 settings. 3 (standard) Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 10 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Low Power mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 15 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 30 minutes Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-29 Output Setting 2 Reminder The "Output Tray Setting" parameter is available only if optional finisher FS-501 or finisher FS-514 is installed. [Bin Setting] only appears if the mailbin kit is installed. "Tray 2" appears for the "Bin Setting" parameter only if the output tray is installed. AE Level Adjustment 2 Note If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set to "Level 2", [Output Setting] and [AE Level Adjustment] also appear. Parameter Description Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for faxing and printing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and Print Operations of the User manual. Output Tray Setting Select the copy exit tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, faxes and reports). Finisher FS-501 Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Report Output: Tray 1 Fax: Tray 1 Finisher FS-514 Copy: Tray 1 Print: Tray 1 Report Output: Tray 3 Fax: Tray 3 Bin Setting The output tray 1 can be specified as mailbin 5 and the optional output tray can be specified as mailbin 6. Disable Description Default Setting Specify the initial value for auto exposure. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. 2 (standard) 13 Utility 13-30 bizhub C252 Display setting Sub Screen Display ON/OFF Scan Basic Screen Default Setting Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Description Default Setting Sub Screen Display Type • Setting value: An image of the selected setting is displayed. • Job List: A list of the jobs that are being performed is displayed. Setting value Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Program Default Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. Default Program Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display No. of Characters for Dest. Display Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-31 Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Copy Initial Screen Setting Job List Default Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing. • ON: A copy job can be reserved by touching [Program Next Job] in the screen with the message "Now printing.", which appears during printing. • OFF: A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen in Copy mode is displayed. OFF Parameter Description TX Display Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. RX Display Description Default Setting Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy mode. • TYPE1: Buttons for selecting functions and the current settings are displayed in the Basic screen. • TYPE2: Some buttons for selecting functions are displayed in the Basic screen, and the current settings are highlighted. TYPE1 Description Default Setting Select the job list displayed as the default in the Job List screen. • Current Print Jobs: The Current Jobs list appears on the Print tab. • Print Job History: The Job History list appears on the Print tab. Current Print Jobs 13 Utility 13-32 bizhub C252 Initial setting 2 Reminder To change the default settings for Scan mode or Fax mode, press the [Scan] or [Fax] key, enter Utility mode, and then select a setting for this parameter. ! Detail For details on the default settings and the factory default settings, refer to "Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset)" on page 3-35. Description Default Setting Specify the default settings for Copy mode. The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to “n”) or the [Reset] key is pressed can be specified. • Current Setting: The settings specified from the touch panel before Utility mode was entered are set as the default settings for Copy mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for Copy mode. Factory Default Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-33 Copier setting Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Paper Select for Small Original Select whether copying is permitted when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected and either no document is placed on the original glass or the document placed on the original glass is too small for its size to be detected. • Copy on Small Size: The document size is determined to be A5, and copies are produced on A5-size paper. • Copy on A4: The document size is determined to be A4, and copies are produced on A4-size paper. • Prohibit Copy: Copies cannot be produced since the document size cannot be detected. Before pressing the [Start] key, the paper tray (paper to be printed on) must be selected. Prohibit Copy Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Select whether or not the "Booklet" function is selected automatically when the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected. This parameter is available only if optional finisher FS-603 or saddle stitcher is installed. Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when "Auto Paper Select" is set and a Combine Originals or Booklet setting is selected. • Auto Display Zoom Ratio: The following zoom ratios are set. 2 in 1, Booklet e 0.707 4 in 1 e 0.500 8 in 1 e 0.353 • OFF: No zoom ratio is selected automatically. Auto Display Zoom Ratio Sort/Group Auto Change Select whether or not the "Sort" setting is automatically selected when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a single job. • ON: When a document is loaded into the ADF and the [Start] key is pressed, the "Group" setting is automatically selected if the document consists of only one page or the "Sort" setting is automatically selected if the document consists of two or more pages. • OFF: The "Sort" and "Group" settings are not selected automatically. ON 13 Utility 13-34 bizhub C252 When AMS Direction is Incorrect Select whether or not printing continues when the paper and document orientations are different with the "Auto Paper Select" setting selected. • Print: The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is printed on paper of the specified size in the specified orientation. • Delete Job: The job is deleted, and no copies are printed. Print Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is loaded into the ADF. ON Select Tray when APS OFF Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: The 1st tray is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages, inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Setting for Separate Scan Select whether copies are printed as the document is being scanned or after the entire document has been scanned when scanning a document in separate batches or when scanning a multiplepage document from the original glass. • Auto Print: Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the document is being scanned. • Batch Print: Printing begins after all pages of the document have been scanned. Auto Print Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Parameter Description Default Setting Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-35 2 Note If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set, [Auto Zoom (Platen)], [Auto Zoom (ADF)], [Select Tray when APS OFF], and [Select Tray for Insert Sheet] do not appear. If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set to "Level 2", [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] does not appear. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security setting" on page 13-56. Scanner setting Printer setting Parameter Description JPEG Compression Level Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Parameter Description Basic Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. Paper Setting PCL Setting PS Setting Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-36 bizhub C252 Displaying the Utility Setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the User Setting Screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "2 User Setting", press the [2] key in the keypad. The User Setting screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-37 2 Note To quit specifying the User mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the User mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. ! Detail For details on "Banner Printing", refer to the User manual [Print Operations]. 13 Utility 13-38 bizhub C252 13.4 Specifying administrator settings This section describes the main parameters and operations that can be performed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [3 Administrator Setting]. System setting Power Save Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 10 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Low Power mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 15 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 30 minutes Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the [Power Save] key is pressed. • Low Power: The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy. • Sleep: Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. Low Power Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. Normal Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-39 Output Setting 2 Reminder The "Output Tray Setting" parameter is available only if optional finisher FS-501 or finisher FS-514 is installed. [Bin Setting] only appears if the mailbin kit is installed. "Tray 2" appears for the "Bin Setting" parameter only if the output tray is installed. [Offset by Each Job Setting] appears only if finisher FS-514 is installed. Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Settings Specify settings for faxing and printing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and Print Operations of the User manual. Output Tray Setting Select the copy exit tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, faxes and reports). Finisher FS-501 Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Report Output: Tray 1 Fax: Tray 1 Finisher FS-514 Copy: Tray 1 Print: Tray 1 Report Output: Tray 3 Fax: Tray 3 Bin Setting The output tray 1 can be specified as mailbin 5 and the optional output tray can be specified as mailbin 6. Disable Offset by Each Job Setting Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when "Offset" is selected while a finisher FS-514 is installed. • ON: Pages are fed out shifted. • OFF: Pages are fed out without being shifted. ON 13 Utility 13-40 bizhub C252 Date/Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Setting Weekly Timer Setting ! Detail If the weekly timer is set, the machine will be turned on/off at the specified time. Settings can be specified to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be received after the machine has been turned off by the timer. Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. For details on the various settings, refer to "Overview of weekly timer settings" on page 13-63. Description Default Setting Specify the current date and time. In addition, the time zone can be set between -12:00 and 13:00 (in 30-minute increments). Time Zone: +00:00 Description Default Setting Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If "ON" is selected, a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current time can be set. The daylight saving time can be set between 1 and 150 minutes in 1-minute increments. OFF Parameter Description Default Setting Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Select whether or not the weekly timer function is used. OFF Time Setting Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on/off. – Date Setting Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the machine is turned on/off. – Select Time for Power Save If the machine is turned off at a specific time, for example, during the lunch break, the time for turning the machine off and on can be specified. OFF Password for Non-Business Hours If the machine is turned off with a weekly timer, select whether or not use is limited with a password. In addition, if "ON" is selected, specify the password that must be entered. OFF Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-41 Restrict User Access Parameter Description Default Setting Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Select the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. – Delete Saved Program Jobs Select the registered copy programs to be delete. – Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Select whether or not to allow the print priority of jobs to be changed. Allow Deleting Other User’s Jobs Select whether or not jobs from other users can deleted when the user authentication settings have been specified. Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Select whether or not to allow registered recipients to be changed. Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios to be changed. Allow Changing the "From" Address Select whether or not to allow the specified From address to be changed. Allow Restrict Operation Setting Restrict Fax Broadcasting Select whether to prevent multiple recipients from being specified for fax transmissions. OFF 13 Utility 13-42 bizhub C252 Expert Adjustment Parameter Description Default Setting AE Level Adjustment Set the initial value for auto exposure between 0 and 4. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. 2 (standard) Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position between –3.0 and 3.0 mm at the leading edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0.0 mm Centering Adjust the starting print position between –3.0 mm and 3.0 mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray. 0.0 mm Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Adjust the starting print position between –3.0 mm and 3.0 mm at the left edge of the paper for the second side during automatic double-sided copying. Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray. 0.0 mm Media Adjustment If the print image is flawed (missing print, white spots, or uneven printing) due to the characteristics of the type of paper that is used, adjust this parameter between –5 and +5 according to the paper type. – Erase Leading Edge The width of the area erased from the leading edge (margin) can be adjusted to 4 mm, 5 mm, or 7 mm. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. 4 mm Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position** Adjust the center stapling position between –10 mm and 10 mm for printing with the "Fold & Staple" setting. 0 mm Fold Position** Adjust the center folding position between –10 mm and 10 mm for printing with the "Half Fold" setting. 0 mm Punch Horizontal Position** Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between –10 mm and +10 mm. 0 mm Punch Resist Loop Size** The hole-punching shift for double-sided printing and outputting cover pages can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. 0 mm Center Staple Position* Adjust the center stapling position between –7 mm and 7 mm for printing with the "Fold & Staple" setting. 0 mm Half-Fold Position* Adjust the center folding position between –7 mm and 7 mm for printing with the "Half Fold" setting. 0 mm Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-43 Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density– Yellow Adjust the image density for printing on thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, or envelopes. The density can be adjusted separately for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan and black for a color image and the black image density). The higher the setting, the darker the density. Adjust the setting for yellow, magenta, cyan and black between –5 and +5. Adjust the setting for "Black Image Density" between –2 and +2. 0 Thick Paper Image Density– Magenta 0 Thick Paper Image Density– Cyan 0 Thick Paper Image Density– Black 0 Black Image Density 0 Image Stabilization Perform an image stabilization if the image is incorrect, even after the gradation levels have been adjusted. • Image Stabilization Only: Perform normal image stabilization. • Initialize + Image Stabilization: Select when a good result was not achieved after "Image Stabilization Only" was selected. – Color Registration Adjust Color Registration Adjust (Yellow) Adjust the color registration if color shifts can be seen in the print result. – Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) – Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) – Gradation Adjustment Copy Adjust the gradation if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The adjustment is made with stress on increasing the number of images stored in the memory. – Printer (Gradation) Adjust the gradation if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The adjustment is made with stress on the gradations in images. – Printer (Resolution) Adjust the gradation if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The adjustment is made with stress on the reproducibility of text and lines. – Parameter Description Default Setting 13 Utility 13-44 bizhub C252 Scanner Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment The starting scanning position (document feed direction) of the document can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Centering The starting scanning position (transverse document feed direction) of the document can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Horizontal Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the transverse document feed direction for the scanner can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Vertical Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the document feed direction for the scanner can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. ADF Adjustment Centering If the center position cannot be automatically adjusted in the transverse document feed direction, it can be adjusted manually. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Original Stop Position If the scanning position cannot be automatically adjusted in the document feed direction, it can be adjusted manually. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Centering Auto Adjustment The center position in the transverse document feed direction can be adjusted automatically. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Auto Adj. of Stop Position The scanning position in the document feed direction can be adjusted automatically. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-45 ! Detail For the procedure on adjusting the printer, refer to "Adjusting the printer" on page 13-64. For the procedure on adjusting the finisher, refer to "Adjusting the finisher (FS-603)" on page 13-73. The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the installed finisher. * Available only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. ** Available only if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. For the procedure on adjusting the color registration, refer to "Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta and cyan" on page 13-89. For the procedure on adjusting the gradation levels, refer to "Adjusting the gradation levels" on page 13-92. For details on displaying [Erase Leading Edge], contact your technical representative. For details on displaying [Scanner Adjustment] and [ADF Adjustment], contact your technical representative. 13 Utility 13-46 bizhub C252 List/Counter Reset Setting Parameter Description Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed. Paper Size/Type Counter Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be counted. Parameter Description Default Setting System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. • Priority Mode: Select the setting ("Copy", "Scan" or "Fax") for the mode that the machine enters when the automatic system reset operation is performed. • System Auto Reset Time: Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. Priority mode: Copy System Auto Reset Time: 1 minute Auto Reset Select the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed for each mode (Copy, Scan and Fax). Copy: 1 minute Scan: 1 minute Fax: 1 minute Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-47 2 Reminder If user authentication or account track operations are being performed, they will be canceled after 1 minute, even if the "System Auto Reset" parameter has been set to "OFF". However, the Enlarge Display mode is not canceled when the "System Auto Reset" parameter is set to "OFF". If user authentication settings have been specified or "Enhanced Security Mode" has been set to "ON", logout from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the "System Auto Reset Time" parameter. Job Reset When account is changed Select whether or not the settings are reset when the user has changed. This machine detects that the user has changed when the optional key counter has been removed or when the [Access] key is pressed after entering user authentication and account track information. Reset When original is set on ADF Select whether or not the settings are reset when a document is loaded into the ADF. Do Not Reset When Next Job is selected Staple Setting: Select whether the same Staple setting from the previous job is set or the setting is canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Original Set/Bind Direction: Select whether the same Original Direction and Margin settings from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Reset Data After Job: Select whether the same settings for a scan operation or for a fax transmission from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job is completed and the settings for the next job can be specified. (However, even if "OFF" is selected, the destination is cleared.) ON Parameter Description Default Setting 13 Utility 13-48 bizhub C252 User Box Setting Standard Size Setting 2 Note For details on displaying [Standard Size Setting], contact your technical representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. 1 day Parameter Description Default Setting Original Glass Original Size Detect Paper size table 1 or 2 can be selected to change the available settings when the paper size is detected. For details, contact your technical representative. Table 1 Foolscap Size Setting The Foolscap paper size can be changed. There are four Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. For details, contact your technical representative. 8 e 13 w Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-49 Administrator/machine setting 2 Note When entering the device name while registering the machine address, do not use characters that cannot be used by the operating system. One-Touch registration 2 Note [2 Fax] appears only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service/Administrator Information screen of the Help screens and the From address for sending e-mail from the machine. Input Machine Address The name of the machine and its e-mail address can be registered. The registered machine name is added to the names of files that are sent and to documents saved in boxes. As a default, the machine name is specified as "KMBT-C252". The registered e-mail address is used with Internet faxing. Parameter Description Scan Specify settings for scanning, faxing and using the boxes. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations, Facsimile Operations, Network Facsimile Operations and Box Operations of the User manual. Fax User Box One-Touch Registration List The lists of abbreviated destinations, group destinations, program destinations and titles/text can be printed to be checked. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations, Facsimile Operations, Network Facsimile Operations and Box Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-50 bizhub C252 User authentication/account track General Settings Description Default Setting Specify settings for user authentication and account track for controlling the use of this machine. • User Authentication: Select either "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" as the user authentication method. To quit user authentication, select "OFF". • Public User Access: Select whether or not the machine can be used an unregistered user. This parameter is not available if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". • Account Track: Select whether or not account track is used to control the machine. • Account Track Input Method: To control authentication with an account name and password, select "Account Name & Password". To control authentication with only a password, select "Password Only". No setting can be selected when "Account Track" is set to "OFF". If both user authentication and account track settings have been specified, only "Account Name & Password" can be selected. • When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified for account track or user authentication is reached, select "Skip Job". To stop the machine when the limit specified for account track is reached, select "Stop Job". • Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Select whether or not user authentication and account track are linked. This appears only when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". • # of User Counters Assigned for users: Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered. Example: When "# of User Counters" is set to "50", 950 accounts can be registered. User Authentication: OFF Account Track: OFF Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-51 User Authentication Setting 2 Note The user authentication parameters appear when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" in the General Settings screen. The account track parameters appear when "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen. Parameter Description Default Setting Administrative Setting User Name List Select whether or not a list of user names is displayed in the user authentication screen. OFF Default Function Permission Operations that are possible with this machine can be limited when authenticating with an external server. Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print TX Function: Allow Public User Key Select whether or not the public user is authenticated with the user authentication screen when "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow". Do Not Display User Registration The users of this machine can be registered. In addition, the password, output permissions, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user. – User Counter The copy, printing, scan/fax use for each user can be checked. – 13 Utility 13-52 bizhub C252 Account Track Setting Print without Authentication Counter List Parameter Description Account Track Registration The accounts that can use this machine can be registered. Account Track Counter The copy, printer, scan/fax use for each account can be checked. Description Default Setting Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account. If printing is permitted, prints are counted for public users. Restrict Description Default Setting The use for each user or account can be checked. Tray 1 Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-53 Network setting Parameter Description TCP/IP Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. NetWare Setting httpServer Setting FTP Setting SMB Setting AppleTalk LDAP Setting E-Mail Setting Detail Setting SNMP Setting Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Setting Network Fax Setting Specify settings for network faxing. For details, refer to the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-54 bizhub C252 Copier setting Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is loaded into the ADF. ON Select Tray when APS OFF Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: The 1st tray is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages, inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-55 Printer setting Fax setting 2 Note [8 Fax Setting] appears only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description I/F Timeout Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. Parallel I/F IEEE 1284/USB Parameter Description Header Information Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. Header/Footer Position Telephone Line Settings TX/RX Setting Function Setting PBX CN Set Report Settings Job Settings List Multi Line Settings Network Fax Setting Specify settings for network faxing. For details, refer to the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-56 bizhub C252 System connection 2 Note [2 Call Remote Center] appears when center registration has been completed with CS Remote Care. Security setting Administrator Password User Box Admin. Setting Administrator Security Level Parameter Description OpenAPI Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Call Remote Center Used by the administrator to call the center when CS Remote Care is connected. Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting This parameter is not available with this machine. Description Default Setting The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be specified or changed. The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits (characters). If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "ON", only an administrator password with 8 digits can be specified. 12345678 Description Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Description Default Setting Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users. • Level 1: "Power Save", "Auto Zoom (Platen)", "Auto Zoom (ADF)", "Select Tray when APS OFF", and "Select Tray for Insert Sheet" are available to users. • Level 2: "Power Save", "Output Setting", "Date/Time Setting", "Daylight Savings Time Setting", "AE Level Adjustment", "Auto Zoom (Platen)", "Auto Zoom (ADF)", "Select Tray when APS OFF", "Select Tray for Insert Sheet", and "Print Jobs During Copy Operation" are available to users. • Prohibit: None of the parameters that are available to users with "Level 1" or "Level 2" are available. Prohibit Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-57 Security Details Parameter Description Default Setting Password Rules Select whether or not passwords are applied. OFF Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed. • [Mode 1]: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed length of time. • [Mode 2]: Operations cannot be performed from the control panel if repeated authentication attempts failed. The number of failed authentication attempts can be set to between 1 and 5 times. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. • [User & Group]: Operations for user authentication and account track • [Secure Print]: Operations for confidential documents • [User Box]: Operations for password-protected boxes • [SNMP]: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in a recipient input screen. Allow Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. Secure Document Access Method The operation method for confidential documents can be viewed. If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" is set to "Mode 1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" is set to "Mode 2", this parameter is set to "Mode 2" [Mode 1]: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document, and then select the document. [Mode 2]: Type in the ID for the confidential document, and then type in the password after the document is selected. Mode 1 Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited. OFF 13 Utility 13-58 bizhub C252 ! Detail The operation of the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter is performed with the following passwords. User authentication passwords, account track passwords, box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and the administrator password If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart the machine. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-59 Enhanced Security Mode HDD Setting Description Settings necessary for applying the Enhanced Security mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced security settings when the necessary settings are specified. For details, contact your technical representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Check HDD Capacity Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Select whether or not image data is temporarily written to the hard disk with all operations for copying, scanning, faxing and computer printing. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. By specifying a setting on the Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen, the area of the hard disk where image data is saved can be overwritten after the data is printed or sent, and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk. OFF Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite all data on the entire hard disk when returning or disposing of this machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. Before performing this operation, contact your technical representative. Mode 1 HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting the data on the hard disk. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. HDD Formatting Select this parameter to format the hard disk. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. HDD Encryption Setting Appears when optional security kit is installed. Specify the settings for encrypting the hard disk. When a setting is specified, all data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it. If the encryption key is changed, the hard disk will be reformatted. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-60 bizhub C252 Management Function Setting 2 Note For details on displaying [Function Setting], [Max. No. of Sets to Copy Setting] and [Authentication Time Setting], contact your technical representative. ! Detail When "Network Function Setting" is set to "Disable", the following operations cannot be performed. PC-FAX transmission Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in boxes Using the PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in boxes Using the PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in boxes Using the PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in boxes Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection (The Box tab does not appear.) Delete Registered Stamp Parameter Description Default Setting Network Function Setting Specify settings for network functions that are difficult to count when managing operations. Allow Description Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-61 Displaying the Administrator Setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the Administrator Setting Screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "Administrator Setting", press the [3] key in the keypad. 3 Type in the administrator password, and then touch [OK]. 13 Utility 13-62 bizhub C252 For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. The Administrator Setting screen appears. 2 Note To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, touch [Close] in each screen until the desired screen appears. 2 Reminder The default administrator password is "12345678". The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password. Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place. If the administrator password is lost, it must be specified by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-63 13.5 Overview of weekly timer settings Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. A general procedure is described below. Requisite 0 If the weekly timer has been set, leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine has been turned off. 0 Press the [Utility/Counter] key, touch [3 Administrator Setting], then [1 System Setting] then [3 Date/Time Setting], and correctly specify the necessary settings. 1 Set "Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting" to "ON". 2 Specify times for "Time Setting". 3 Specify dates for "Date Setting". 4 Specify the desired settings for "Select Time for Power Save" and "Password for Non-Business Hours". The weekly timer is set. 13 Utility 13-64 bizhub C252 13.6 Adjusting the printer Adjusting the starting print position at the leading edge position The starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed direction) can be adjusted. Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0 The starting print position is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine. Normally, this position will not need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Leading Edge Adjustment]. The Leading Edge Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper type to be set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-65 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 8 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 4.2 mm. – If the distance is less than 4 mm, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.2 mm and 3.0 mm). – If the distance is more than 7 mm, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –0.2 mm and –3.0 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 9 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. 10 Check the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper. – Check that the width has been adjusted to 4.2 mm. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9. – To adjust the print position for a different type of paper, return to step 6. 11 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The print position is adjusted. a: 4.2 mm a 13 Utility 13-66 bizhub C252 Adjusting the starting print position at the left edge The starting print position at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction) for each paper tray can be adjusted. Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray. 0 The starting print position is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine. Normally, this position will not need to be adjusted. 0 Only A4 v paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Centering]. The Centering screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper tray to be set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-67 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 8 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (b) is 3 mm (± 0.5 mm). – If the distance is less than 2.5 mm, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.2 mm and 3.0 mm). – If the distance is more than 3.5 mm, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –0.2 mm and –3.0 mm). – If the distance is between 2.5 and 3.5 mm, skip to step 10. – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 9 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. 10 Adjust the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper. – Check that the distance has been adjusted to between 2.5 and 3.5 mm. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9. – To adjust the print position for a different paper tray, return to step 6. 11 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The print position is adjusted. b b: 3.0 mm ± 0.5 mm 13 Utility 13-68 bizhub C252 Adjusting the starting print position for the second side The starting print position at the left edge of the paper for the second side during automatic double-sided copying for each paper tray can be adjusted. 0 The starting print position is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine. Normally, this position will not need to be adjusted. 0 Only A4 v paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. The Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper tray to be set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-69 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 8 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the left edge of the paper (c) is 3 mm (± 0.5 mm). – If the distance is less than 2.5 mm, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.2 mm and 3.0 mm). – If the distance is more than 3.5 mm, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –0.2 mm and –3.0 mm). – If the distance is between 2.5 and 3.5 mm, skip to step 10. – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 9 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. 10 Adjust the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper. – Check that the distance has been adjusted to between 2.5 and 3.5 mm. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9. – To adjust the print position for a different paper tray, return to step 6. 11 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The print position is adjusted. c c: 3.0 mm ± 0.5 mm 13 Utility 13-70 bizhub C252 Adjusting printing according to the media The print image can be adjusted for each type of paper that is used. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Media Adjustment]. The Media Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper type to be set. – If the image is distorted with single-sided copying, select a paper type below "Front". – If the image on the back side is distorted with double-sided copying, select a paper type below "Back". Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-71 7 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the setting between –5 and +5. An adjustment is possible if the size of the white areas in missing print or the white spots is 0.5 mm or less. – For missing print or white spots in the print image, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment. – For uneven printing of the print image, touch [+] to increase the adjustment. – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – To cancel the adjustment, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Touch [Exit]. Try performing the copy cycle again. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 13 Utility 13-72 bizhub C252 10 Check the printed image, and finish the adjustment if there are no flaws. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 through 9. – If the print image flaws are worse, adjust the setting in step 7 in the opposite direction. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-73 13.7 Adjusting the finisher (FS-603) ! Detail For details on the "Fold & Staple" setting, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603" on page 4-99. Adjusting the center stapling position The stapling position when printing with the "Fold & Staple" function can be adjusted. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 13 Utility 13-74 bizhub C252 6 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 7 mm). – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –7 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The center stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 and 8. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-75 Adjusting the center folding position The half-fold position when printing with the "Fold & Staple" function can be adjusted. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Half-Fold Position]. The Half-Fold Position screen appears. 13 Utility 13-76 bizhub C252 6 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 7 mm). – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –7 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The half-fold position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 and 8. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-77 13.8 Adjusting the finisher (FS-514) ! Detail For details on the "Fold & Staple" setting, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514" on page 4-101. For details on specifying Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 4-93. Adjusting the center folding position The folding position when printing with the "Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 13 Utility 13-78 bizhub C252 5 Touch [2 Fold Position]. The Fold Position screen appears. 6 Touch the buttons for the paper size and paper type to be adjusted. 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 10 mm). – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –10 mm). Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-79 – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 13 Utility 13-80 bizhub C252 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The fold position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 9. 2 Note If the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted, contact your technical representative. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-81 Adjusting the center stapling position The stapling position when printing with the "Center Staple" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 0 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 6 Touch the buttons for the paper size and paper type to be adjusted. 13 Utility 13-82 bizhub C252 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 10 mm). – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –10 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The center stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 9. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-83 2 Note If the angle of the staple must be adjusted, contact your technical representative. For details on adjusting the center folding position, refer to "Adjusting the center folding position" on page 13-77. 13 Utility 13-84 bizhub C252 Adjusting the horizontal punch position The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper type. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Punch Horizontal Position]. The Punch Horizontal Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper type to be adjusted. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-85 7 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 10 mm). – To decrease width A, touch [–] to decrease the adjustment (between –1 mm and –10 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The punch horizontal position is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Punch" function to print a another sample copy. A A 13 Utility 13-86 bizhub C252 10 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 8. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-87 Adjusting the angle of punched holes The angle of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Punch Resist Loop Size]. The Punch Resist Loop Size screen appears. 6 Check the angle of the punched holes. – If the punched holes are angled, touch [+] to change the adjustment. If the angle cannot be adjusted by touching [+] or if the paper is wrinkled, touch [–] to change the adjustment. – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 13 Utility 13-88 bizhub C252 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The angle of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use the "Punch" function to print a another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 9. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-89 13.9 Adjusting the color registration Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta and cyan Adjust the color registration if color shifts can be seen in the print result. Color shifts can be adjusted with plain paper, thick paper 1 or thick paper 2. The procedure for adjusting the color registration is the same for yellow, magenta and cyan. The following procedure uses A3-size paper to adjust the color registration for cyan. 0 The test pattern can be printed on A3 w, 11 e 17 w, A4 v or 8-1/2 e 1 v paper that can only be loaded into the 1st tray. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [7 Color Registration Adjust]. The Color Registration Adjust screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Color Registration Adjust (cyan)]. The Color Registration Adjust (cyan) screen appears. 13 Utility 13-90 bizhub C252 6 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 7 Check the distance from the reference black lines to the cyan lines in the test pattern along the X and Y directions. – If the lines are shifted in the X direction as shown below, touch [–] under "X" to reduce the adjustment (between –1 dot and –6 dots). – If the lines are shifted in the X direction as shown below, touch [+] under "X" to increase the adjustment (between 1 dot and 6 dots). Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-91 – If the lines are shifted in the Y direction as shown below, touch [–] under "Y" to reduce the adjustment (between –1 dot and –6 dots). – If the lines are shifted in the Y direction as shown below, touch [+] under "Y" to increase the adjustment (between 1 dot and 6 dots). – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the lines are not shifted from the reference lines, skip to step 10. 8 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. ? When is the adjustment applied? % The adjustment is applied when the [Start] key is pressed. To cancel the adjustment, touch [Cancel] instead of pressing the [Start] key. 9 Check the print result. – If there is no shift between the black and cyan lines, continue with step 10. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 7 and 8. 10 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 13 Utility 13-92 bizhub C252 13.10 Adjusting the gradation levels Adjust the gradation levels if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The following color gradation adjustments can be performed. - [Copy]: The adjustment is made with stress on increasing the number of images stored in the memory. - [Printer (Gradation)]: The adjustment is made with stress on the gradations in images. - [Printer (Resolution)]: The adjustment is made with stress on the reproducibility of text and lines. The procedure for adjusting the gradation levels of the copy is described below. Requisite 0 Before adjusting the gradation levels, be sure to restart the machine. When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. 0 After replacing an imaging unit, be sure to adjust the gradation levels. 0 The test pattern is printed on plain paper from a paper tray loaded with one of the following sizes (listed in order of priority): A3 w, 11 e17 w, A4 v or 8-1/2 e 11 v. Paper in the bypass tray cannot be selected. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [8 Gradation Adjustment]. The Gradation Adjustment screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-93 5 Touch the button for the mode to be adjusted. 6 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 13 Utility 13-94 bizhub C252 7 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass. – Be sure to load the paper in the orientation shown on the screen. 8 Place on top of the test pattern 10 or more sheets of blank paper of the same size as the printed test pattern page. ? Why are blank pages placed on top of the test pattern? % Place 10 sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern while it is being scanned in order to prevent the document transfer belt of the ADF or the original cover pad of the original cover from being visible. If the document transfer belt or the original cover pad is visible through the pattern, the gradation levels may not be correctly adjusted. 9 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. 10 Press the [Start] key. The printed test pattern is scanned. When the test pattern is scanned, the gradation levels are automatically adjusted based on the scanned image. 11 Repeat steps 6 through 10 three times. 12 Touch [Close]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-95 13.11 Authentication method User authentication and account track settings can be specified to limit the use of this machine. User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to manage groups and multiple users. By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each group can be managed for each individual user. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. If an authentication mode is set, the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby. In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified, the user name and password must be entered. For details, refer to "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication)" on page 3-41. User authentication and account track User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings. - User authentication – Limits on the available functions (copy operations, scanning operations, fax operations and printing) – Counters for printing/scanning by each user – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set – Management of personal boxes by each owner – Delete and restrict jobs of other users - Account track – Counters for printing/scanning from each account – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set 13 Utility 13-96 bizhub C252 When user authentication and account track are synchronized This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is managed by each department. With this setup, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each department (each account). To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. 2 Note The account track and user authentication settings can be specified separately. Check the differences between these features, and then specify the appropriate settings. For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Parameter on General Settings Screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Synchronize". Account Name (on User Registration screen) Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-97 When user authentication and account track are used separately This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different employees. To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Group C Parameter on General Settings Screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Do Not Synchronize". 13 Utility 13-98 bizhub C252 To select an authentication method 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. The General Settings screen appears. 4 Beside "User Authentication", touch the button for the desired setting. – To cancel user authentication, touch [OFF]. – To use the user authentication function from an external server, touch [ON (External Server)], and then select the server type. – To use the user authentication function of this machine, touch [ON (MFP)]. 5 Beside "Public User Access", touch the button for the desired setting. – To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine, touch [Restrict]. – To allow this machine to be used when a user name or password is not entered even though user authentication settings have been applied, touch [Allow]. 6 Beside "Account Track", touch the button for the desired setting. – To cancel account tracking, touch [OFF]. – To use the account track function, touch [ON]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-99 7 Beside "Account Track Input Method", touch the button for the desired setting. – To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account track screen, touch [Account Name & Password]. – To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen, touch [Password Only]. 8 Touch [Fwd. ]. The second screen is displayed. 9 Beside "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", touch the button for the desired setting. – To skip the job when the limit specified with account track is reached, touch [Skip Job]. – To stop the machine when the limit specified with account track is reached, touch [Stop Job]. 10 Beside "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track", touch the button for the desired setting. – Synchronize: If "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows this machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the corresponding account was specified during user registration. If "ON (External Server)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information after the machine has been used once with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered. 13 Utility 13-100 bizhub C252 – Do Not Synchronize: This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each time that the machine is used. 11 Beside "# of Counters Assigned for Users", specify the desired setting. – Press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value (between 1 and 999). – If user authentication and account track settings have been applied, counters can be assigned to both accounts and users, and counts for both can be totaled. 12 Touch [OK]. – If the setting for "User Authentication" or "Account Track" was changed, the message "Are you sure you want to clear all data?" appears. 13 Touch [Yes]. The authentication method is set. Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track. 2 Reminder Do not differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters in the user name for the external server. Since the C252 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, the operation may not be performed correctly. 2 Note "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" appears if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" is set to "Synchronize", even when "Public User Access" is set to "Allow", "Public User Access" changes to "Restrict". Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-101 ! Detail For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied, "Account Track Input Method" is set to "Account Name & Password". A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine. If public user access is permitted, we recommend placing limitation on the machine functions that can be used. For details, refer to "User registration" on page 13-107. If account track settings have been applied while "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)", type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen, and then type in the account name and password in the account track screen. If "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", but the corresponding account was not specified when the user was registered, user authentication and account track information must be entered each time that the machine is used, even if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" was set to "Do Not Synchronize", use by a public user is not permitted. 2 Note "# of User Counters" appears if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If the number of user counters is set to "50", up to 950 accounts can be registered. If [No] was touched, the management data is not cleared; however, the settings cannot be changed. If the setting for any of the following is changed, the data is not cleared. "Public User Access", "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", or "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 13 Utility 13-102 bizhub C252 13.12 User authentication setting User authentication settings can be specified. Administrative setting—user name list User authentication settings can be specified to display [List] in the user authentication screen and the User Name screen. Touch [List] to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can simply be selected. (The default setting is "OFF".) 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Setting]. 5 Touch [User Name List]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. Whether a user name list button appears or not is set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-103 2 Note To limit machine use by authorized users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. 13 Utility 13-104 bizhub C252 Default function permission If external server authentication was selected, limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can be used by an authorized user. (The default setting is "Allow".) The following operations can be limited. - Copy operations - Scan operations - Fax operations - Printing operations - Saving documents on the hard disk - Printing transmission functions To specify the default function permissions 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Setting]. 5 Touch [Default Function Permission]. The Default Function Permission screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-105 6 Touch the buttons for the desired settings. 7 Touch [OK]. The default function permissions are set. 2 Note To limit machine use by authorized users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. If "Print Scan / Fax From Box" setting is used to scan or fax a document saved in a box, printing of the document can be prevented. 13 Utility 13-106 bizhub C252 Authenticating public users If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted, the authentication screen does not appear when logging on if "Public User Key" is set to "Do Not Display". (The default setting is "Do Not Display".) 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Setting]. 5 Touch [Public User Key]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. The machine is set to display [Public User Access]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-107 User registration The password, printing permissions, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user of this machine. As an example, the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by the machine. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 0 If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", a public user is added. 0 If "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON", the number of users set for "# of User Counters" can be registered. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [2 User Registration]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user. The User Registration screen appears. 13 Utility 13-108 bizhub C252 6 Touch [User Name]. The User Name screen appears. 7 Type in the user name (up to 64 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. – Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. – A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. The user name is set. 8 Touch [User Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. ? Can [User Password] be selected? % [User Password] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON (External Server)". Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-109 9 Type in the password (up to 64 characters), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 11 Touch [E-Mail Address]. The E-Mail Address screen appears. 12 Type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters), and then touch [OK]. The e-mail address is set. If the e-mail address exceeds 116 characters, [Details] appears in the User Registration screen. Touch [Details] to display the E-Mail Address Details screen and the entire e-mail address. 13 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. 14 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [OK]. The account is set. – Before an account name can be selected, accounts must have been registered. For details on registering accounts, refer to "Account track registration" on page 13-117. 15 Touch [Output Permission]. The Output Permission screen appears. 13 Utility 13-110 bizhub C252 16 Beside "Print" and "Send", touch the button for the desired settings. – To permit the user to output, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the user to output, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all users. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. – If "Color" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Full Color", "2 Color" or "Single Color" settings. – If "Black" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Black" setting. – If both "Color" and "Black" of the "Print" are set to "Restrict", the message "Copying is restricted." appears if authentication was completed correctly. – If "Color" is set to "Restrict" under "Send", color scanning is not possible. 17 Touch [OK]. The output permissions are set. 18 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-111 19 Touch [Total Allowance] or [Individual Allowance]. – To specify the maximum number of combined color and black prints allowed, touch [Total Allowance]. – To separately specify the maximum number of color and black prints allowed, touch [Individual Allowance]. 20 Touch [No Limit] or [Limit]. 21 Using the keypad, type in the maximum number allowed. – If "Individual Allowance" was selected, touch [Edit] beside the print mode set to "Limit", and then use the keypad to type in the maximum number allowed. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all users. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 22 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed are set. 23 Touch [Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. 13 Utility 13-112 bizhub C252 24 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation. – To permit the operation to be performed, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the operation to be performed, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all users. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. – If "Print Scan / Fax From Box" setting is used to scan or fax a document saved in a box, printing of the document can be prevented. – Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified, a different Basic screen may appear when logging on. The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order: Copy Scan Fax Box. – If no operation is permitted, user authentication cannot be performed. 25 Touch [OK]. The function permissions are set. 26 Touch [OK]. – To erase the current user, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected user information, touch [Delete]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-113 User counter This function is used to check the following data for each user. Copy + Print This count shows the total number of copies and printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Max Allowance: Shows the limits set for the user for the number of copies and printouts that can be made using all Color settings (Total), the color settings (Full Color, Single Color, and 2 Color) and the "Black" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Copy This count shows the total number of copies made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Print This count shows the total number of printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting Scan/Fax - Total: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes - Large Size: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes for paper specified as large-size paper - Fax TX: Shows the total number of pages transmitted in Fax mode Original Counter - Shows the number of document pages that were scanned Paper Counter - Shows the number of pages used for printing 13 Utility 13-114 bizhub C252 2 Note Counting automatically continues with user counters for external server authentication. If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen was set to "Allow", "public" is added to the list of counters. If "User Box Admin." was set to "Allow", "Box Admin" is added to the list of counters. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-115 To check the counter 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [3 User Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user. The User Counter screen for the selected user appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Clear Counter] in the User Counter screen for the current user. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 13 Utility 13-116 bizhub C252 – To clear the counters for all users, touch [Reset All Counters] in the User Counter screen containing a list of all users. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all users, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-117 13.13 Account track setting 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. Account track registration The password, printing permissions, and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine. The following procedure describes how to specify accounts when "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen is set to "Account Name & Password". 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Setting]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Account Track Registration]. 13 Utility 13-118 bizhub C252 5 Touch the button for the desired account. The Account Track Registration screen appears. 6 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. If “Account Name & Password” was selected: If “Password Only” was selected: Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-119 7 Type in the account name (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. – If [Name] was displayed, type in the account name (up to 20 characters), and then touch [OK]. – If "Account Name & Password" was selected, the same account name cannot be used more than once. The account name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. 9 Type in the password (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The account password is set. 11 Touch [Output Permission]. The Output Permission screen appears. 13 Utility 13-120 bizhub C252 12 Beside "Print" and "Send", touch the button for the desired settings. – To permit outputting by the account, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit outputting by the account, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. – If "Color" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Full Color", "2 Color" or "Single Color" settings. – If "Black" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Black" setting. – If both "Color" and "Black" of the "Print" are set to "Restrict", the message "Copying is restricted." appears if authentication was completed correctly. – If "Color" is set to "Restrict" under "Send", color scanning is not possible. 13 Touch [OK]. The output permissions are set. 14 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-121 15 Touch [Total Allowance] or [Individual Allowance]. – To specify the maximum number of combined color and black prints allowed, touch [Total Allowance]. – To separately specify the maximum number of color and black prints allowed, touch [Individual Allowance]. 16 Touch [No Limit] or [Limit]. 17 Using the keypad, type in the maximum number allowed. – If "Individual Allowance" was selected, touch [Edit] beside the print mode set to "Limit", and then use the keypad to type in the maximum number allowed. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the current settings to all other registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear to apply the settings in the current screen to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 18 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 19 Touch [OK]. – To erase the current account, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected account information, touch [Delete]. 13 Utility 13-122 bizhub C252 Account track counter This function is used to check the following data for each account. Copy + Print This count shows the total number of copies and printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Max Allowance: Shows the limits set for the account for the number of copies and printouts that can be made using all Color settings (Total), the color settings (Full Color, Single Color, and 2 Color) and the "Black" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Copy This count shows the total number of copies made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Print This count shows the total number of printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting Scan/Fax - Total: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes - Large Size: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes for paper specified as large-size paper - Fax TX: Shows the total number of pages transmitted in Fax mode Original Counter - Shows the number of document pages that were scanned Paper Counter - Shows the number of pages used for printing Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-123 2 Note If "User Box Admin." was set to "Allow" and only account track settings have been specified, "Box Admin" appears at the end of the list of counters. 13 Utility 13-124 bizhub C252 To check the counter 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Setting]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Account Track Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account. The Account Track Counter screen for the selected account appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Clear Counter] in the Account Track Counter screen for the current account. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Reset All Counters] in the Account Track Counter screen containing a list of all accounts. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-125 13.14 Password rules If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules, those passwords are not accepted when they are entered. In that case, the administrator should temporarily turn off the password rules, then specify the passwords according to the following conditions. Conditions of the password rules Administrator Password User Password /Account Password User Box Password Password for the confidential document Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters (casesensitive) • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 or more alphanumeric characters (case-sensitive) • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters (casesensitive) • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters (casesensitive) A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. 13 Utility 13-126 bizhub C252 2 Note Use the administrator password when specifying settings on the Administrative Setting screen. Use the user password/account password when user authentication/account track settings have been applied. For details on the "User Box Password" and "Password for the confidential document", refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Specify 8 characters (numbers, * or #) as the fax transmission password for boxes. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-127 13.15 Enhanced security settings When the enhanced security setting is applied on this machine, various security settings are also changed in order to increase security when managing scan data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, public user access is prohibited, and box operations and print jobs are limited. There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for "Enhanced Security Mode" to be set to "ON". Before setting "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON", be sure to check the settings for the security functions. 2 Reminder If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security settings, "Enhanced Security Mode" cannot be set to "ON". ! Detail Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security settings to be applied. For details, contact your technical representative. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON" cannot be changed. 13 Utility 13-128 bizhub C252 Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to set "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON". ! Detail If "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen, set "Account Track Input Method" to "Account Name & Password". If "Password Only" is selected, the setting for "Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error" is not changed, even when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". [SSL] appears when a certificate is issued from PageScope Web Connection. Administrator Setting commands Settings User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". System Connection—OpenAPI Setting—SSL The button must be displayed. Security Setting/Administrator Password Set to a password that meets the password rules. Security Setting—HDD Setting—HDD Lock Password Otherwise, install the optional security kit, and specify an encryption key. The hard disk locking password is set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-129 Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are also set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". 2 Note The number of times for checking for "Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error" can be changed to between 1 and 3. A changed setting cannot be changed when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "OFF". When "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password that does not meet the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. For details on the password rules, refer to "Password rules" on page 13-125. For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Administrator Setting commands Changed settings System Setting—Restrict User Access—Restrict Access to Job Settings—Registering and Changing Address Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— Public User Access Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—User Authentication Setting—Administrative Setting—User Name List Set to "OFF". User Authentication/Account Track—Print Without Authentication Set to "Restrict". Security Setting—User Box Admin. Setting Set to "Restrict". Security Setting—Security Details—Password Rules Set to "ON". Security Setting—Security Details—Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error Set to "Mode 2" and three times or less for checking. Security Setting—Security Details—Secure Document Access Method Set to "Mode 2". Security Setting—HDD Setting—Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Set to "Mode 2". 13 Utility 13-130 bizhub C252 User operation limitations When "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on the user for the following operations. - A public user cannot use this machine. - The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen. - When user authentication has failed the specified number of times, the control panel can no longer be operated. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. - The recipient cannot be changed by the user. - This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope VISUALCOUNT-MASTER. - An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot be connected. - Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated. 2 Note For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing, refer to the User manual [Print Operations]. For details on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed, refer to "Security setting" on page 13-56. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-131 13.16 Viewing the status of the consumables This section describes the information that can be viewed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [4 Check Consumable Life]. From the Unit Life Indicator screen, the status (usage level) of the following consumables can be viewed. - Imaging Unit (C) - Imaging Unit (M) - Imaging Unit (Y) - Imaging Unit (K) - Fusing Unit - Transfer Unit The usage levels are shown in graphs. 2 Note The consumables mentioned above are replaceable. For replacements, contact your technical representative. Displaying the unit life indicator screen 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [4 Check Consumable Life]. 13 Utility 13-132 bizhub C252 – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "Check Consumable Life", press the [4] key in the keypad. The Unit Life Indicator screen appears. – To print the list of usage levels, touch [Print], and then press the [Start] key. 2 Note To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. 14 Appendix Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-3 14 Appendix 14.1 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered accounts and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen: Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size: 14 Appendix 14-4 bizhub C252 Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-5 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. List of available characters Type Characters Alphanumeric characters/symbols 14 Appendix 14-6 bizhub C252 14.2 Glossary The words used in Copy mode are described below. Abbreviation ADF Automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically scan the document A AE Level Adjustment Set this parameter to adjust the background of the document. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. (AE = Auto exposure) Adjust Color Set these parameters to adjust the quality of color copies. APS "Auto Paper Select" setting ATS Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto Tray Switch) Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after a document is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected. Auto Paper Select Select this setting to detect the document placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically select paper of the same size if "×1.0" is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom ratio. B Background Color Set this function to copy the document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). Background Removal Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the document to one of nine levels. Blue Set this parameter to adjust the level of blue in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the blue of water or the sky. Brightness Set this parameter to make the image either lighter or darker. Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-7 C Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than plain paper. Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when printing double-sided copies. Color Balance Set this parameter to adjust the balance in the concentrations of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). Each color can be finely adjusted to any of 19 levels between –3 and +3. Combine Originals Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple document pages on a single copy page. The settings for the number of pages that can be combined are "2 in 1", "4 in 1" and "8 in 1". Contrast Set this parameter to adjust the contrast between light and dark. Copy Density Set this parameter to finely adjust the copy density to any of 19 levels between –3 and +3. Copy Protection Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page. D Density Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels. Duplex 2nd-Side Select this setting to switch the image transfer current of this machine when copying on paper that has already been printed on one side. E Edit Color Set the functions and parameters that are available to adjust the print image as desired 14 Appendix 14-8 bizhub C252 F Fold & Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center. Finishing Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the copy exit tray. G Glossy Select this setting to print with a glossy finish. Green Set this parameter to adjust the level of green in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the green of forests and trees. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the document. The specified number of copies of the second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished. H Hue Set this parameter to make the image either more reddish or more bluish. I Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations in a document scanned with the ADF, then feed out all copies together. Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages. Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-9 M Margin Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded document. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies from single-sided documents or when making single-sided copies from double-sided documents. Memory Scan Scans a document exceeding the maximum 100 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the document in separate batches. The document can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced. Mirror Image Set this function to produce a copy in the mirror image of the original document. Mixed Original Select this setting to detect the size of each document page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when a document with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF. N Neg-/Pos. Reverse Set this function to copy the document with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. O Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out. OHP Interleave Set this function to insert paper between overhead projector transparencies that are being copied. This prevents overhead projector transparencies from sticking together. Original Type Select the setting for the image type of the document to better adjust the copy quality. Original Direction Select the setting for the orientation that the document is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF. 14 Appendix 14-10 bizhub C252 P Paper Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on. Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing. R Red Set this parameter to adjust the level of red in the image, for example, if you wish to redden skin tones. S Saturation Set this parameter to adjust the degree of vividness of the colors in the image. Save in User Box Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again Sharpness Set this parameter to emphasize the edges of text so that they can be read more easily. In addition, this parameter can be used to adjust the document image. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired Simplex/Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned document and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides. Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Select a setting to staple copies together. Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-11 T Text Enhancement Select a setting for the reproduction quality of text when copying documents consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background). Thick Original Select this setting when loading thick documents or document pages pasted together into the ADF. If this setting is selected when thick documents are scanned with the ADF, there is a smaller chance of a paper misfeed occurring. X XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the loaded document. Z Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy. 14 Appendix 14-12 bizhub C252 14.3 Index Numerics 1-sided/2-sided print 4-59 1st tray 3-6, 3-49, 6-12 2nd tray 3-6, 3-55, 6-13 3rd tray 3-6, 3-55, 6-14 4th tray 3-6, 3-55, 6-14 A Accessibility mode 5-25 Account track 3-46, 13-50 Accounts 13-95 Active jobs 12-13 ADF 3-3, 4-9, 6-27, 7-6, 8-29 Adjust color parameters 1-19, 9-63 Administrator settings 3-46, 13-38, 13-49, 13-61 Authentication method 13-95 Auto paper select 4-44, 8-10 Auto zoom setting 4-46 Automatic duplex unit 3-6, 6-11, 7-6 Automatic panel reset 3-35 Automatic paper tray switching 8-9 Automatic system reset 3-35 B Background color 1-36, 9-60 Background removal 4-70, 4-73 Basic screen 3-25 Binding 4-96 Blue parameter 1-25, 9-63 Book copy 9-30 Booklet 9-51 Booklet original 9-36 Brightness 1-21, 1-28, 9-63 Bypass tray 3-6, 3-59, 6-10 C Capacities 8-5 Caution notations and labels 2-19 Center binding 4-96 Center erase 4-99, 4-101, 9-31 Chapters 9-21 Checking jobs 12-3 Cleaning 11-3 Clearing a paper misfeed in a paper/media tray 6-12 Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501 6-31 Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 6-35 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF 6-27 Clearing a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit 6-11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray 6-10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the fusing unit 6-19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT 6-15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the right-side door 6-16 Clearing a staple jam 10-22 Clearing a staple jam in finisher FS-501 10-24 Clearing a staple jam in finisher FS-603 10-26 Color balance 1-26, 9-63 Color gradations 13-92 Color parameters 1-19, 9-63 Color settings 1-34, 1-35, 4-40 Combine originals settings 4-77 Consumable status 13-131 Contrast 1-29, 9-63 Control panel 3-22 Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-13 Control panel angle 3-28 Control panel settings 5-25 Copier setting 13-33, 13-54 Copy density 1-33, 9-63 Copy paper 8-3 Copy programs 5-11, 5-15 Copy settings 5-3 Copy type settings 4-59 Counters 11-9 Cover mode 9-7 Cover pages 9-7 Current jobs 12-13 Custom paper size setting 8-15 D Date/time stamp 9-77 Default settings 13-32 Deleting a printing/reserved job 12-8 Deleting a stopped/reserved job 4-106 Density settings 4-70, 4-71 Destination register 13-23, 13-49 Display setting 13-30 Distribution numbers 9-77, 9-85 Document selection 4-59 Double-sided copies 4-62 E Emptying the waste container 10-39 Enlarge display timer setting 5-28 Enlarging 4-50 Entering text 14-3 Erasing center 4-99, 4-101, 9-31 Erasing frame/borders 9-71 Error message 6-3, 6-6, 6-46, 6-47, 6-49, 6-50, 11-12 Error messages 6-56 F Fax setting 13-55 Features 1-8 Feeding documents 4-9 Finisher FS-501 3-16, 6-31, 7-10, 10-24 Finisher FS-514 3-19, 7-11 Finisher FS-603 3-14, 6-35, 7-9, 10-26 Finishing settings 4-81 Folding position adjustment 13-75, 13-77 Fusing unit 6-19 G Glossary 14-6 Gradation levels 13-92 Green parameter 1-24, 9-63 Group setting 4-86 H Held jobs 12-13 Help menu 5-18, 5-22 Help screens 5-18, 5-24 Hole-punch waste 10-39 Hole-punching 4-93 Hue 1-21, 1-32, 9-63 I Image centering/rotation 9-73 Image repeat 9-40 Initial setting 13-32 Insert image 9-16 Insert sheet 9-11 Interrupting a copy job 5-9 14 Appendix 14-14 bizhub C252 J Job details 12-12 Job history 12-14 Job list 12-3 Job separator JS-601 3-16, 7-11 Job settings 12-10 K Key repeat start/interval time 5-25 L LCT 3-3, 3-6, 3-57, 6-15 Leading edge adjustment 13-64 Left edge adjustment 13-66 Legal restrictions on copying 1-45 Loading paper/media 3-49, 3-55, 3-57, 3-59 Low power mode 3-36, 3-38 M Machine setting 13-49 Mailbin kit MT-501 3-18, 7-13 Main unit 3-3, 7-3 Malfunction detected 6-3 Managing jobs 12-3 Manual conventions 1-40 Margin setting 4-32, 9-68 Memory full 6-47 Message display time 5-31 Messages 6-56 Meter count 11-9 Mirror image 1-39, 9-56 Misfeed 6-6, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-19, 6-27, 6-31, 6-35 Misfeed detected 6-6 Mixed original setting 4-24 Mode check 5-3 Mode memory 5-11, 5-15 Multi-page document scanning 4-18 N Negative/positive reverse 1-37, 9-54 Network setting 13-53 Next job reservation 4-103 Numbering 9-81, 9-85 O OHP interleave 9-3 Operating environment 2-21 Original direction setting 4-28 Original glass 4-11, 8-31 Original image type settings 4-65 Original settings 4-24 Output tray OT-601 3-19, 7-12 Oversized paper setting 8-22 P Page numbering 9-77, 9-81 Panel reset 3-35 Paper capacities 8-5 Paper feed cabinet PC-103 7-7 Paper feed cabinet PC-203 7-8 Paper feed cabinet PC-403 7-8 Paper misfeed 6-6, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-19, 6-27, 6-31, 6-35 Paper misfeed location 6-8 Paper settings 4-43, 8-10 Paper size setting 4-45, 8-12 Paper sizes 8-3 Paper storage 8-8 Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-15 Paper/media types and capacities 8-5 Part names/functions 3-3 Password rules 13-125 Poster mode 9-45 Power source 2-21 Preset zoom ratios 4-50 Preventive maintenance time 11-12 Printer setting 13-35, 13-55 Printing priority 12-19 Program job 9-25 Proof copy 5-6 Punch kit PK-501 3-14, 7-10 Punch kit PK-510 3-19, 7-12 Punch settings 4-93 Punching horizontal position adjustment 13-84 Punching resist loop size adjustment 13-87 R Red parameter 1-23, 9-63 Reducing 4-50 Regulation notices 2-12 Replacing a staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 10-10 Replacing a toner cartridge 10-3 Replacing parts/supplies 6-49, 6-50 Replacing the staple cartridge 10-9 Replacing the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 10-13 Replacing the waste toner box 10-46 Replenish paper 6-46 Reserving a copy job 4-103 S Saddle stitcher SD-503 3-18, 7-12 Safety information 2-3 Sample copy 5-6 Saturation 1-21, 1-30, 9-63 Scanner setting 13-35 Scanning 3-32, 4-13, 4-18 Security setting 13-56 Separate scan setting 4-13 Set numbering 9-77, 9-85 Set zoom ratios 4-56 Sharpness 1-31, 9-63 Simplex/duplex settings 4-59 Single-sided copies 4-60 Sleep mode 3-37, 3-38 Sort setting 4-84 Sound setting 5-33 Space requirements 2-20 Special paper/media 8-6 Special paper/media setting 8-25 Specifications 7-3 Staple cartridge 10-9, 10-10, 10-13 Staple jam 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 Stapling 4-88 Stapling position adjustment 13-73, 13-81 Starting print position 13-64, 13-66 Stopping printing/scanning 4-105 Stored jobs 12-15, 12-17 System connection 13-56 System reset 3-35 System setting 13-27, 13-38 14 Appendix 14-16 bizhub C252 T Test print 5-6 Text enhancement 4-70, 4-75 Text entry 14-3 Text quality adjustment 4-75 Thick original setting 4-26 Toner cartridge 10-3 Touch panel adjustment 5-36 Troubleshooting 6-3 Troubleshooting reference tables 6-52 Turning off 3-34 Turning on 3-30 U Unit life indicator 13-131 User authentication 3-41, 13-50, 13-95 User manuals 1-43 Utility mode parameters 13-3 Utility setting 13-36 Utility settings 13-27 W Waste container 10-39 Waste toner box 10-44 Weekly timer 3-39, 13-63 Wide paper setting 8-22 Z Zoom minimal setting 4-49 Zoom ratio setting 4-51, 4-57 Zoom settings 4-46 Fiery® Print Server Workflow Examples © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087253 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 5 Terminology and conventions 5 About this document 6 MIXED MEDIA 7 What is Mixed Media? 7 Example: Workflow with Mixed Media 7 Items required for this example 8 IMPOSITION 11 What is imposition? 11 Example: Workflow with imposition 11 Items required for this example 12 PPML WITH IMPOSITION 15 What is PPML and how do you impose it? 15 Example: PPML workflow with imposition 15 Items required for this example 16 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 19 What is variable data printing? 19 Variable data printing languages 19 Sending variable data jobs to the Print Server 19 What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs? 20 Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm 20 Items required for this example 21 CONTENTS 4 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 24 What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs? 24 What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs? 25 Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media 25 Items required for this example 26 HOT FOLDERS 29 What is a Hot Folder? 29 Example: Workflow with Hot Folders 29 Items required for this example 30 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 33 What is Compose? 33 What is Paper Catalog and how is it used with Compose? 34 Example: Workflow with Compose and Paper Catalog 35 Items required for this example 36 INDEX 39 INTRODUCTION 5 INTRODUCTION This document provides examples of complex printing scenarios and an overview of the Print Server features used in the examples. The example workflows illustrate how you can combine features to create jobs. Each workflow includes cross-references to help you locate more information about performing each task. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Copier The copier or printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information Important information Important information about issues that can result in physical harm to you or others INTRODUCTION 6 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Mixed Media concepts and how Mixed Media is used in an example workflow • Variable Data Printing (VDP) concepts with FreeForm and how VDP is used in an example workflow using FreeForm • Imposition concepts with PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language) and how imposition is used in an example variable data printing workflow using Impose and PPML • Printing to a Hot Folder on the network and an example workflow using Hot Folders • Compose and Paper Catalog concepts and how to create a job with Compose and Paper Catalog MIXED MEDIA 7 MIXED MEDIA This chapter provides an overview of Mixed Media and an example workflow that includes Mixed Media. NOTE: Mixed Media is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Mixed Media is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is Mixed Media? The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media. For example, you can use Mixed Media to specify a heavy stock for the cover, add blank pages, insert colored media on designated pages, and specify duplex pages within a single print job. Specify Mixed Media settings when you print a job from an application with the printer driver. Define and modify the Mixed Media settings of jobs already sent to the Print Server from Command WorkStation or define Mixed Media settings in the Hot Folders application. For more information about Mixed Media, see Utilities. Example: Workflow with Mixed Media A geology professor at Ocean Crest University wants to print her new course book for the fall semester. The new course book consists of eight chapters. She wants her students to be able to find the information they want easily and quickly. To ensure this, each chapter divider in the book is printed on heavy media. The chapter text is printed on plain media and the front and back covers are printed on heavy media. The professor sends her request, along with the book file in PDF (Portable Document Format) (Geology101.pdf ), to the university’s in-house production department. MIXED MEDIA 8 The following diagram illustrates the components of the course book. Items required for this example • Geology101.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Mixed Media • Heavy media for the front and back covers • Heavy media for chapter dividers • Plain media for the chapter text Front cover printed on heavy media Back cover printed on heavy media Chapter dividers on heavy media Chapters printed on plain media Completed course book MIXED MEDIA 9 Mixed Media workflow Print Server 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 Print Server Step Task For more information 1 The professor creates the PDF and sends the file to the university’s in-house production department. 2 The operator in the production department downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help MIXED MEDIA 10 To use Mixed Media in Command WorkStation, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster information from a file in Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select Remove Raster Data. You can duplicate this workflow with a PostScript file instead of a PDF. 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Properties from the Actions menu, and clicks the Media icon on the Job Properties toolbar. The operator applies the following settings: a) From New Page Range in Mixed Media, the operator types 2, 32, 64, 98, 124 for the defined media pages (the pages that divide the chapters), specifies a heavy media, indicates which tray contains the heavy media, clicks Add Definition, and then clicks Close. b) From New Insert in Mixed Media, the operator specifies inserting a blank page after the last page to distinguish the end of the print job, clicks Insert, and then clicks Close. c) The operator specifies front and back covers that print on front only, cover stock, and which tray contains the media, and then clicks OK (if applicable). d) The operator clicks the Layout icon and specifies duplex, clicks OK, and then saves the file. Utilities 4 The operator processes and holds the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator previews the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. NOTE: The operator can also print one set as a proof before printing multiple copies. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job is printed with a front and back cover and dividers for each chapter. Step Task For more information IMPOSITION 11 IMPOSITION This chapter provides an overview of imposition and an example workflow using imposition. NOTE: Imposition is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Imposition is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is imposition? Imposition is the process of arranging individual pages of a book, booklet, or brochure on a large sheet. The pages are laid out such that when the sheet is printed, folded, and cut, the pages are in the correct orientation and order. The Print Server supports Impose. Impose is a server-based imposition application that allows you to edit and assemble entire documents on the Print Server before you process the files. For more information about imposition, see Command WorkStation Help. Example: Workflow with imposition The manager of Company ABC wants to make sure that she has enough business cards to distribute when she is managing her company’s booth at the Consumer Electronics Show. She sends a request to a local print shop to print 600 cards. The print shop imposes her business cards on an 11x17 page. Since the card design incorporates text on the back, the job must be duplexed. Company ABC’s standard business card size is 2 x3.25. The print shop calculates that they can impose 25 cards on one 11x17 page. IMPOSITION 12 The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed. Items required for this example • Card.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Impose (requires a dongle) • 11x17 heavy media, such as card stock • Paper cutter 11x17 page 2x3.25 business card 5 rows 5 columns { IMPOSITION 13 Imposition workflow Print Server 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Step Task For more information 1 Company ABC creates the 2x3.25 business card, saves the file as Card.pdf, and then sends the file to the print shop. Printing 2 The operator at the print shop downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help IMPOSITION 14 When you use Impose, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster information from a file with Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select Remove Raster Data. 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Impose from the Actions menu, and then applies the following settings. a) From the Settings pane, the operator selects Gangup and selects Repeat. b) The Operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. c) Under Layout, the operator specifies five rows and five columns. d) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. e) The operator turns on printer’s marks and sets the offset X and Y to 0.125 pt. f) The operator saves the job. Utilities 4 The operator selects Card.pdf.dbp in Command WorkStation and selects Preview. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 7 The cards are printed on an 11x17 page. 8 The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts the business cards. Step Task For more information PPML WITH IMPOSITION 15 PPML WITH IMPOSITION This chapter provides an overview of PPML and imposition, and an example workflow of an imposed job using PPML. NOTE: Imposition and PPML are not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Imposition is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. To determine if PPML is supported for your particular Print Server, see Printing. What is PPML and how do you impose it? Personal Print Markup Language (PPML) is an XML-based language for variable data printing. PPML enables faster printing of variable data jobs by allowing a printer to store text elements and graphic elements and reuse them as needed. PPML is a non-vendor-specific language and is considered to be an open industry standard. You can create the master and variable elements of a job as a PPML file in a variable data printing application, such as Pageflex Persona, and then print the job to the Print Server. Impose PPML as you would any other job (see page 11). Impose the PPML job on a sheet to print the pieces in a particular order so that when the job is printed, it is cut and stacked in the correct order. For more information about PPML, see Variable Data Printing. Example: PPML workflow with imposition Dr. Jones is a veterinarian who has just moved his practice to a new neighborhood and wants to inform his current customers, and possible new ones, of his new location, phone number, and hospital hours. He decides to send out 30,000 5x8 mailer cards. The front of each card has a picture of his dog, Max, with information about his practice, and the back of the card has each customer’s name and address with a bar code. Dr. Jones sends his order to a print shop along with the PDF of his mailer and the Microsoft Excel file database, including address information about his customers and neighborhood residents. The print shop creates the merged master and variable document in Pageflex Persona to create the JonesMailer.ppml file. For more information about Pageflex Persona, see the documentation that accompanies the application. PPML WITH IMPOSITION 16 To save time and money, four cards are printed on both sides of a single 11x17 page. To expedite the mailings and reduce costly postage charges, the cards are imposed so that after the pages are cut, the cards easily stack with the zip codes in the correct sort order. The following diagram illustrates how the job is imposed and sorted. Items required for this example • Windows computer with Pageflex Persona • JonesMailer.ppml • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Impose PPML WITH IMPOSITION 17 PPML workflow with imposition Print Server 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 Step Task For more information 1 The operator at the print shop creates the merged master and variable document in Pageflex Persona to create the JonesMailer.ppml file. For more information about Pageflex Persona, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 2 The operator at the print shop downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation and chooses Impose from the Actions menu. a) The operator selects Gangup and Cut and Stack. b) The operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. c) Under Layout, the operator specifies two rows and two columns. d) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. e) The operator turns on printer’s marks. Command WorkStation Help PPML WITH IMPOSITION 18 Check the Impose Control Strip to match the set information. This is useful if certain pages of your job do not print correctly and you must reprint specific pages. Print one document to verify that the master and variable information matches. Make sure that the scale size in Impose is set to 100%, otherwise the cards do not print with the specified 5x8 size and are adjusted to print to the scale value entered. 4 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The mailers are stacked and ready to cut. 7 The operator checks the Impose Control Strip to match the set information. Command WorkStation Help. Step Task For more information VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 19 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM This chapter provides an overview of variable data printing, and an example workflow that uses FreeForm to create a variable data job. What is variable data printing? Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed documents. Content consists of text and images (including graphics and photographs) in electronic form. Variable data printing is used for direct-mail advertising or other targeted mailings. It typically combines a set of master elements that are common across copies of a document with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy. An example is a brochure that greets customers by name and may include other personal information about the customer obtained from a marketing database. Background elements, illustrations, and text blocks that do not change across copies of the brochure comprise the master elements. The customer name and other customer-specific information comprise the variable elements. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Variable data printing languages The Print Server may be compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) NOTE: To determine what variable data printing languages are supported for your particular Print Server, see Printing. Sending variable data jobs to the Print Server You can create the master and variable data in most software programs, and assign the master and variable data from Command WorkStation, Hot Folders, or the printer driver. If you create your master and variable data in PPML or Creo VPS format from a supported thirdparty application, such as Pageflex Persona or Atlas PrintShop Mail, you can send your variable job directly to the Print Server through these applications. You can also download your file using Hot Folders. For more information about how to send variable data printing to the Print Server, see Variable Data Printing. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 20 What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs? FreeForm allows you to use print options to define and store master-element documents, called FreeForm masters, on the Print Server. You can send a variable-element job to the Print Server with instructions to combine the job with a particular FreeForm master. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm Ocean Crest University wants to promote their three schools through a mailing to prospective students. The students will be able to request information about the different campuses and programs. Students can reply via a postage-paid business reply card integrated into the mailer. The document is personalized with the prospective student’s name, address, and a personal web link. The design is graphic-intensive to attract the attention of the reader. It is printed on 11x17 paper and folded three times, in order to qualify for the standard “letter” mail rate at the post office. To create this mail piece, the in-house production department decides to use the caching capabilities of FreeForm. FreeForm allows them to store a rasterized version of the graphic intensive layout in memory, since these elements are common to all pages (send and process once). The variable text (address, name, and web link) is printed separately and merged with the layout at the Print Server. The production department creates the master document with all the common elements and saves the file in PDF format (College_Master.pdf ). Next, they create the variable document in Microsoft Word (College_Variable.doc) and link the variable information to their database file (College_data.xls). NOTE: No specialized variable printing software is used to build this job. You can use any page layout application to create the FreeForm master and any mail merge function, such as Microsoft Word Mail Merge, to build and print the variable data. For more information about how to use the Mail Merge feature in Microsoft Word, see the documentation that accompanies Microsoft Word. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 21 The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer. Items required for this example • College_Master.pdf • College_Variable.doc • College_data.xls • Print Server • Print Server printer driver with FreeForm • Windows computer with Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel installed Master file Database file VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 22 Variable data printing workflow using FreeForm Print Server Print Server 1 2 5 4 3 6 Step Task For more information 1 The operator in the production department opens College_Master.pdf in Acrobat. 2 The operator prints the file to the Print Server, specifying 11x17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Create Master in the printer driver. Printing VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 23 You cannot send FreeForm jobs to the Direct connection. If Two-Way Communication is enabled in the printer driver, the printer driver detects what masters already reside on the Print Server. Use stored FreeForm masters as often as needed with multiple sets of variable elements. For more information about Two-Way Communication, see the printer driver Help. If the administrator clears the Print Server, all FreeForm masters are deleted. For more information about administrator functions, see Configuration and Setup. 3 The operator opens the College_Variable. doc in Microsoft Word. The variable document also opens the College_data.xls file, since the two documents are linked. If the documents are not linked, Word prompts the operator for the location of the Data Source File. The operator selects Data Merge in Word. Microsoft Word documentation 4 The operator prints the file to the Print Server, specifying 11x17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Use Master in the printer driver. The master file and variable file are combined on the Print Server. Printing 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The mailer includes the combined master and variable data. Step Task For more information VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 24 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA This chapter provides an overview of how to use Mixed Media with FreeForm 2 variable data printing jobs, and provides an example workflow that uses variable data printing and Mixed Media. NOTE: Mixed Media and FreeForm 2 is not supported for all Print Servers. See Utilities to determine if Mixed Media is supported for your particular Print Server. See Printing to determine if FreeForm 2 is supported for your particular Print Server. What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs? FreeForm 2 extends the functionality of FreeForm (see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 19). FreeForm 2 requires a third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2 technology, such as Atlas PrintShop Mail. Using the third-party printing application and FreeForm 2, you can create multiple page masters, allowing more customization to your documents. You can still use any master created in another application, and then use a third-party application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail, to combine the design and database information. Multiple masters allow you to define more than one master file for your job, while drawing from the same database of variable information. For example, if you own a movie rental company, you may maintain a database of customer names, addresses, and the last five movies the customer rented, categorized by genre. As a promotion, you want to send a coupon booklet with a new movie rental release pictured on the front cover. You want to customize your mailer with a movie of a similar genre as the last movie the customer rented. The variable information, such as the customer names and addresses, is always drawn from the database. However, the different movie images are defined by the multiple masters. For more information about FreeForm 2, see Variable Data Printing. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 25 What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs? The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media. For more information, see “What is Mixed Media?” on page 7. Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed documents. For more information, see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 19. Use variable data print jobs with Mixed Media to create custom jobs, such as mailers. For example, use the variable information to create booklet mailers that greet customers by name, and print the booklet cover on a different medium than the body of the mailer. The Mixed Media you specify for your job is applied for every record, relative to the record start. For example, if Mixed Media is set to print Page 1 with cover stock, the first page of every record is printed on cover stock. Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media To announce its new line of children’s styles, Banana Rama is creating a promotional mailer that targets customers by ethnicity, gender, and age. The company has compiled a database of customers by name and attributes, such as ethnicity, gender, and age. For the promotional mailer, Banana Rama also draws from a content database consisting of images of children of different ages, gender, and ethnicity wearing the new Banana Rama clothes; images of typical gadgets enjoyed by these children; and background graphics. Using a variable data application, such as PrintShop Mail and images that match the targeted individual, Banana Rama creates, in one print run, a mailer targeting parents of girls aged 7 to 10 years and customized mailers targeting parents of boys in different age groups. The mailers feature images of children in the targeted age group wearing Banana Rama clothing and playing with their favorite toys. Each promotional mailer includes a cover sheet with the customer’s name and a discount coupon. The Banana Rama girls’ clothing line is more extensive, so the mailer targeting girls includes additional pages advertising the girls’ fashions. Since the promotional mailer may vary in length, depending on whether it is targeted toward a boy or a girl, a blank page is added between each mailer to indicate when a new mailer starts. The print shop that received Banana Rama’s mailer request uses Atlas PrintShop Mail to create the master and variable document as a .psm project file. For more information about PrintShop Mail, see the documentation that accompanies the application. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 26 The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer. Items required for this example • Atlas PrintShop Mail • FreeForm 2 • BananaRama.psm • BananaRama_V.ps • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Mixed Media • Cover stock • Plain media Girls template Boys template Letter/coupon template Graphics Database VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 27 Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media Print Server Print Server 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Step Task For more information 1 The print shop operator opens the BananaRama.psm file in PrintShop Mail, specifies FreeForm 2, and then prints the file to the Print Server. In the Print dialog box, the operator sends both the master and variable data. The Print Server receives a master and variable PostScript document. Variable Data Printing For more information about PrintShop Mail, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 2 The operator selects the BananaRama_V.ps file from Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 3 The operator chooses Properties from the Actions menu and clicks the Media icon on the Job Properties toolbar. The operator applies the following settings: a) The operator specifies a front cover, cover stock, and the tray for the media, and then clicks OK. b) From New Insert in Mixed Media, the operator specifies inserting a blank page after the last page, indicates the tray for the media, clicks Insert, and then clicks Close. Utilities VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 28 4 The operator processes and holds the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator previews the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job prints with the merged variable and master information with a blank sheet between records. Step Task For more information HOT FOLDERS 29 HOT FOLDERS This chapter provides an overview of Hot Folders and an example workflow using Hot Folders. NOTE: Hot Folders is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Hot Folders is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is a Hot Folder? Hot Folders is a software application that streamlines network printing tasks. A Hot Folder is a folder to which you can assign a group of print options, along with a Print Server print queue. To print a document, drag and drop the file onto the Hot Folder. You can create multiple Hot Folders, each with different settings and different Print Server connections. Depending on the configuration of the Hot Folder, jobs are routed to a Print Server with settings that you have configured. Hot Folder software runs as a background utility, continuously monitoring Hot Folders for new jobs. For more information about Hot Folders, see Hot Folders Help. Example: Workflow with Hot Folders Greg works for Company ABC and wants to print 25 copies of his new business cards. Company ABC has configured a network Hot Folder called “BusinessCards,” so that their employees can drop their business card .pdf file directly onto the Hot Folder for printing. Greg creates his business cards using the required company business card template, and saves the file as GregCard.pdf. The business card template ensures that the cards are printed optimally, using the imposition settings specified in the BusinessCards Hot Folder. After the cards are printed, an operator in the company print shop cuts the cards and places them in interoffice mail for the employee. Company ABC business cards are 2x3.25 inches in size. HOT FOLDERS 30 The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed. Items required for this example • GregCard.pdf • Print Server • Hot Folder configured on the network • 11x17 heavy media, such as card stock • Paper cutter 11x17 page 2x3.25 business card 5 rows { 5 columns HOT FOLDERS 31 Imposition workflow Print Server 1 2 3 4 7 6 5 HOT FOLDERS 32 Step Task For more information 1 The operator at Company ABC creates a Hot Folder on the network, names it “BusinessCards,” and applies the following Hot Folder settings. a) From Job Properties, the operator specifies 25 copies. b) From Layout, the operator selects Impose and clicks Edit Impose Template. c) From the Settings pane, the operator selects Gangup and selects Repeat. d) The Operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. e) Under Layout, the operator specifies five rows and five columns. f) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. g) The operator turns on printer’s marks and sets the offset X and Y to 0.125 pt., saves the template, and closes Impose. h) The operator makes sure the template is selected and clicks OK. Hot Folders Help 2, 3 Greg drops the file GregCard.pdf on the BusinessCards Hot Folder. Hot Folders Help 4 The job prints. 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The cards are printed on an 11x17 page. 7 The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts the business cards. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 33 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG This chapter provides an overview of Compose and Paper Catalog and provides an example workflow using both applications to create a printed piece that incorporates colored covers and operator-specified chapter starts. NOTE: Compose and Paper Catalog are not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Compose and Paper Catalog are supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is Compose? Compose allows you to prepare a job (spooled or held in Command WorkStation) for printing. For a single job, use Compose to: • Preview a job as thumbnails and full screen previews. • Set chapter starts and identify and apply finishing options. • Specify different media for front and back covers, body pages, and sections. • Insert blank sheets or other documents. • Edit a document using Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop. Compose is a dynamic application that displays and enables options based on the Print Server selected for the job. For example, if a job contains mixed media settings that were set in the printer driver or Command WorkStation, these settings appear when you view the job in Compose. For more information about Compose, see Command WorkStation Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 34 What is Paper Catalog and how is it used with Compose? Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database. Paper Catalog stores the attributes of any media stock available in a production print shop. The Paper Catalog database resides on the Print Server and is not affected when you restart or clear the Print Server. Paper Catalog allows administrators to: • Define multiple media attribute combinations and assign unique names to each combination. • Assign color profiles for each media. • Select predefined media when a job is submitted. • Specify which Paper Catalog columns are available for users. • Centrally maintain a Paper Catalog database. Paper Catalog allows operators to: • Select predefined media when a job is submitted. Once the administrator defines the Paper Catalog, the operator chooses the media for the job from Compose. When the operator views the job with Compose thumbnails, the operator clearly sees the settings applied for that paper catalog entry, such as the color of the media. For more information about Paper Catalog and additional ways to access it, see Utilities and Paper Catalog Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 35 Example: Workflow with Compose and Paper Catalog The Company ABC Human Resources Manager has created a new benefits handbook. The handbook is a single PDF document without blank pages between chapters. The manager wants the front and back covers of the published piece printed on heavy gold media and she wants each chapter to start on a right-hand page. The Human Resources Manager sends her request, with the attached book file in PDF format (Benefits.pdf ), to the company’s in-house production department. The production department uses Compose to reformat the book, adding front and back covers and designating chapter starts. Gold is Company ABC’s signature color. All published company documentation must have gold covers. The production department administrator has already added gold covers to the Paper Catalog. The following illustration shows the components of the handbook. Front cover printed on gold heavy media Back cover printed on gold heavy media Chapters printed on plain media Completed handbook COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 36 Items required for this example • Benefits.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Compose and Paper Catalog • Company ABC Gold cover stock for the front and back covers • Plain media for the chapter text The administrator first defines Company ABC Gold cover stock in the Paper Catalog database. The administrator also assigns the media to the appropriate tray in Tray and Paper Association. For more information, see Paper Catalog Help. For information about the Paper Catalog database, see Command WorkStation Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 37 Compose workflow using Paper Catalog Print Server 1 2 3 5 8 7 6 4 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 38 Step Task For more information 1 The production department administrator defines Company ABC gold cover stock in the Paper Catalog. She assigns the media to the appropriate copier trays, using Paper Tray Association. Command WorkStation Help 2 The Human Resources Manager creates the PDF and sends the file to the company’s in-house production department. 3 The operator in the production department downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 4 The operator right-clicks the job, chooses Properties, specifies that the job prints duplex and indicated that the job is stapled. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Compose from the Actions menu, chooses Thumbnail view, and then applies the following settings: a) The operator selects all the pages of the job, right-clicks and chooses Assign Media, and selects letter-size media. b) The operator right-clicks the first page of the job, chooses Assign Media, and selects Co. ABC Cover from Choose Paper Catalog. She repeats this for the last page of the job. c) The operator selects the first page of the first chapter and clicks Chapter Start. She repeats this for each chapter in the handbook. d) The operator clicks Reader view to display the thumbnails as a user would see the pages when reading it as a book, and then checks the thumbnails to make sure that the pagination is correct. e) The operator clicks Save. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. NOTE: The operator can print one set as a proof before printing multiple copies. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job is printed with gold front and back covers, as specified from Paper Catalog, and the first page of each chapter prints on a right-hand page. INDEX 39 C Compose and Paper Catalog components of job 36 described 33 diagram 37 procedure 38 workflow example 35 Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) 19 F FreeForm components of job 21 described 20 diagram 22 procedure 22 workflow example 20 FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media components of job 26 defined 24 diagram 27 procedure 27 workflow example 25 H Hot Folders components of job 30 described 29 diagram 31 procedure 32 workflow example 29 I Impose described 11 non-raster file requirement 14 imposition components of job 12 described 11 diagram 13 procedure 13 workflow example 11 M master elements 19 Mixed Media components of job 8 described 7 diagram 9 non-raster file requirement 10 procedure 9 workflow example 7 multiple master pages, defining 24 P Personal Print Markup Language (PPML) 15, 19 PPML and imposition components of job 16 described 15 diagram 17 procedure 17 workflow example 15 printing scenarios business card template for company, Hot Folders 31 business cards, imposed 13 course book printed in plain and heavy media with chapter dividers 9 handbook with plain and heavy media 37 mailer cards, imposed and sorted 17 personalized mailer with business reply card 22 promotional mailer using variable demographic data 27 R raster information, removing 10, 14 V variable data printing described 19 languages compatible with 19 using FreeForm 20 FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media 24 workflow examples 20, 25 INDEX Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Color Printing © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093733 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Key features of ColorWise 9 Color management in Command WorkStation 10 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 11 About this chapter 11 Managing color on the Fiery PRO80 12 Descriptions of ColorWise print options 13 Auto Trapping 13 Black Detection 13 Black Overprint 14 Black Text and Graphics 15 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link 17 Combine Separations 18 Composite Overprint 19 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) 20 Output Profile 20 PDF/X Output Intent 21 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent 22 RGB Source or Device Link 23 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source 24 Spot Color Matching 25 Substitute Colors 26 CONTENTS 4 Specifying ColorWise print options 26 Setting default values in Command WorkStation 28 Setting print options in the printer driver 29 COLOR PROFILES 36 Color files 36 Installing additional ICC profiles on your computer 37 Other color files 42 Managing profiles on the Fiery PRO80 45 CALIBRATION 46 Calibration methods 46 Calibrating with Command WorkStation 47 Printer calibration with Fiery PRO80 calibration 48 Calibrating from the printer touch panel 49 Calibration with Web LCD enabled (default) 49 Calibration with Web LCD disabled 51 Managing calibration sets 52 Using the output profiles and calibration sets 53 Adding custom calibration sets 55 Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles 55 Understanding calibration 62 An overview of calibration 62 How calibration works 62 Scheduling calibration 63 Checking calibration status 64 SPOT-ON 65 Using Spot-On 65 CONTENTS 5 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 68 Simple ASCII Import File Format 68 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page 69 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page 69 Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page 70 INDEX 71 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document explains how to manage color output on the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server and provides information about calibration and color profiles. This document is part of a set that includes documentation for users and system administrators. For a complete description of your Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, see the other documents available at your site. For more information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document is organized to supply you with key information about managing the color output of your Fiery PRO80. To manage color in general, you use Command WorkStation. You can also manage color for a specific job by setting print options in the printer driver or in the job properties in Command WorkStation and Hot Folders. This document covers the following topics: • Setting values for ColorWise print options • Managing color profiles and other color files • Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 to achieve consistent color output • Managing spot colors • Importing calibration measurement data from a text file NOTE: The Glossary in the Fiery Color Reference defines words in bold, for example, output profile, that appear throughout this document. Color terms and concepts, such as “color space,” “spot color,” “gamut,” and “source profile,” are used throughout this document. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms are unfamiliar, see the Fiery Color Reference. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Key features of ColorWise ColorWise is the color management system (CMS) built into the Fiery PRO80 and designed to provide both casual and expert users with the best color output for a variety of purposes. The ColorWise default settings provide high-quality, out-of-box color from many Windows and Mac OS applications. This allows casual users to achieve quality output without knowing about or changing any color settings on the Fiery PRO80. ColorWise also allows expert users to obtain the best color output. ColorWise features allow you to modify printing results. Depending on your particular needs, you can: • Set the behavior of CMYK printing to emulate offset press standards. • Match PANTONE and other spot colors for the best match when printing using four-color press conditions or presses with extra, custom plates. • Select a rendering intent for RGB printing. Rendering intents allow for rich, saturated printing of presentation graphics, smooth, accurate printing of photographs, and relative or absolute colorimetric rendering for specialized needs. • Define the source of incoming RGB color data for better color conversion of RGB data with no source information. • Determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the printer or is first converted into the gamut of another device, such as a press standard. This feature is useful for making one device behave like another for RGB data. It also allows you to evaluate the appearance of an RGB file under different printing conditions without having to convert the RGB file to CMYK first. ColorWise color management (ColorWise) offers an open color architecture, allowing users to customize the Fiery PRO80 to meet new printing needs as they arise. ColorWise supports ICC profiles, which are industry standard color profiles that describe the color behavior of a device. Note that ICC specification version 4 profiles (profile version 4.2.0.0) are supported as well as version 2. Downloading ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80 enables the Fiery PRO80 to simulate a custom press (or another printer), as well as accurately print colors from a particular monitor or scanner. In addition, you can create customized ICC profiles for the printer. INTRODUCTION 10 Color management in Command WorkStation Designed to give flexible control of color printing, Command WorkStation includes the following color management tools: • Color management Command WorkStation allows you to set the default settings of the ColorWise print options for the Fiery PRO80. These default settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80, unless a user overrides them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver or in Job Properties. • Profiles Command WorkStation allows you to manage all of the ICC profiles used in Fiery PRO80 workflows. You can also create custom profiles by editing existing CMYK source or output profiles and saving them as new profiles. The AutoGray feature allows you to adjust the gray balance of output profiles. • Calibrator For consistent color, calibrate the Fiery PRO80 on a regular basis. Command WorkStation includes an easy-to-use calibrator, which allows you to calibrate using either the scanning unit that is part of the printer or an optional spectrophotometer or densitometer (see “Calibration” on page 46). Command WorkStation also allows you to use any Status T densitometer by importing data in a standard file format (see “Importing Density Measurements” on page 68). In this case, it is important to note that the quality of the instrument used determines the quality of the calibration. • Spot-On (spot colors) Spot-On is a spot color (named color) manager. If Spot-On is available for your Fiery PRO80 and is enabled, you can adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents. The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as spot color dictionaries. Spot-On allows you to edit spot color definitions on the Fiery PRO80 and create custom spot color definitions and dictionaries. Installing and starting Command WorkStation on a Windows or Mac OS computer is described in Utilities. Command WorkStation can be installed from the User Software DVD or from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 11 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS The ColorWise color management system provides print options that affect the output of objects in various color spaces. By specifying the appropriate settings for each print option, you can obtain the expected results for your jobs. About this chapter This chapter provides an overview of the ColorWise management system, which controls color on the Fiery PRO80 (see page 12), and detailed explanations of each print option. For the location of each print option, see the following table. This chapter also provides information about PostScript printer drivers and instructions for setting the ColorWise print options for Windows and Mac OS computers. For information about printer drivers, see page 29. ColorWise print option See Auto Trapping page 13 Black Detection page 13 Black Overprint page 14 Black Text and Graphics page 15 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method page 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link page 17 Combine Separations page 18 Composite Overprint page 19 Gray (RGB and CMYK) page 20 Output Profile page 20 PDF/X Output Intent page 21 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent page 22 RGB Source or Device Link page 23 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source page 24 Spot Color Matching page 25 Substitute Colors page 26 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 12 Managing color on the Fiery PRO80 Applications allow you to generate color data for the Fiery PRO80 in many different color spaces. The most common type of color data produced from office applications is RGB, while prepress applications generally produce CMYK data. Desktop applications also generate spot colors, such as PANTONE colors. To complicate matters, a single page may contain a mix of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. The Fiery PRO80 allows you to control the printing of mixed-color documents with features that apply specifically to RGB, CMYK, or spot color data. The following diagram illustrates the print options in the Fiery PRO80 color management process that affect color data conversions. You can access these print options when you send a print job to the Fiery PRO80. Most of these options and settings are described in subsequent sections of this chapter. RGB Source or Device Link is the only color option that applies strictly to RGB color data. The other options that affect RGB color also affect the more rarely used Lab, XYZ, and other calibrated color spaces. NOTE: With PostScript 3, a PostScript job can include calibrated CMYK (or CIEBasedDEFG) data. The RGB/Lab Rendering Intent print option, which normally affects only RGB data, affects calibrated CMYK data as well. The RGB Source or Device Link setting does not affect calibrated CMYK data. RGB data ➪ RGB Source Gray (RGB) RGB/Lab Rendering Intent Brightness Black Text and Graphics Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Output Profile CMYK data ➪ CMYK/Grayscale Source CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method Gray (CMYK) Brightness Black Text and Graphics Combine Separations Output Profile ➪ ➪ Spot color data ➪ Spot Color Matching Fiery PRO80 color processor Color data sent to printer COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 13 Descriptions of ColorWise print options The following sections provide detailed explanations of the ColorWise print options and how these options affect print jobs. NOTE: For information about the following print options, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. • Halftone Simulation • Paper Simulation • 2-Color Print Mapping Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique where the size of objects is modified so that colors printed next to each other overlap slightly, to prevent white spaces between two colors. These white spaces, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. This illustration shows the same image with and without trapping. If you enable the Auto Trapping option, trapping is applied to all of the objects in a job. The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with trapping values that are optimized for a Fiery-driven print device using regular paper. If these values do not provide the results necessary for the media that you use, and if Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is configured on the Fiery PRO80, you can modify the values to meet your requirements. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Black Detection The Black Detection option allows you to specify whether or not to detect black-and-white pages before printing your job. • Off: Select Off if your job consists of black-and-white text pages combined with a significant number of color pages. • On: Select On if you are printing a predominantly black-and-white job. Black-and-white only pages will print with the proper billing information. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 14 Black Overprint The Black Overprint option allows you to specify whether or not black text or black text and graphics, defined as RGB=0, 0, 0, or as CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%, overprints colored backgrounds. • Text: Black text overprints colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing the halo effect or misregistration of colors. You can choose this setting only if the Black Text and Graphics option is set to Pure Black On. • Text & Graphics: Black text and graphics overprint colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing halo effects or misregistration of colors. You can choose this setting only if the Black Text and Graphics option is set to Pure Black On. • Off: Black text or text/graphics knocks out colored backgrounds. NOTE: Before sending the print job to the printer, PostScript applications may perform their own black overprint conversions. One example of how you might use this setting is a page that contains black text on a light blue background. The background blue is CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. The black text is CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. • With Black Overprint set to Text or Text & Graphics, the final text or text/graphic portions of the page are overprinted, or combined with the underlying color. Black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using the black toner. This means that black text and line art does not exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly). No transition in cyan and magenta toners occurs. The quality of the output is improved, because it does not show artifacts near the edges of the black text. • With Black Overprint Off, the border of the text or text/graphics is on an edge that has cyan and magenta toners on one side (outside the text) and black toner on the other side (inside the text). This transition may cause visible artifacts due to the practical limitations of the printer. NOTE: The reproduction of CMYK components is affected by the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting and calibration curve when CMYK is not 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 15 Black Text and Graphics The Black Text and Graphics option affects black text and vector graphics. Under most circumstances, set this option to Pure Black On. When Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On, black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using black toner only. The black text and line art do not exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly) and are not misregistered, since one toner is used. In addition, this setting eliminates blasting. This option must be set to Pure Black On if you want to set the Black Overprint option to Text or Text/Graphics. For some jobs, it is preferable to set this option to Normal, for example, if the page includes gradient fills that use black. The following table describes the behavior of the Black Text and Graphics option with black data defined in different color spaces. NOTE: Use the Black Text and Graphics option only when printing composites, not when printing separations. NOTE: PostScript applications, such as QuarkXPress, may convert elements defined as RGB=0, 0, 0 to four-color CMYK black before sending the job to the Fiery PRO80. These elements are not affected by the Black Text and Graphics option. For more information, see Fiery Color Reference. Color Black Text and Graphics = Normal Black Text and Graphics = Pure Black On or Rich Black On RGB=0,0,0 (all other RGB values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) RGB=0,0,0 is printed according to the definition for RGB=0,0,0 in the output profile. This may be a rich black using all toners if the output profile specifies a rich black, or may be K-only if the output profile specifies K-only for RGB=0,0,0. The output is affected by the calibration curve. RGB=0,0,0 is printed as K-only, using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan toners. All other RGB values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% (all other CMYK values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% may be printed as K-only or as a rich black using all toners, depending on the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. If CMYK/Grayscale Source is set to a specific profile, CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as K-only and the amount of black toner is limited by the CMYK Source profile and the calibration curve. Setting CMYK/Grayscale Source to ColorWise Off disables the CMYK Source profile and the calibration curve. In this case, the black toner is not limited by the calibration curve. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% is printed as K-only, using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan toners, regardless of the CMYK/ Grayscale Source and CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method settings. All other CMYK values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting. Setting CMYK/Grayscale Source to ColorWise Off disables the CMYK source profile and the calibration curve. In this case, the black toner is not limited by the calibration curve. Spot Colors (unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) Standard spot color processing Standard spot color processing COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 16 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method The CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method allows you to define your preferred CMYK-to-CMYK conversion technique. • Quick applies one-dimensional transfer curves to adjust output densities in the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black channels. This technique leads to eye-pleasing color output from your printer because pure primary colors are not “contaminated” by other colorants. While it is the fastest simulation method and perfect for drafts, avoid using it for final documents that are used as press proofs. Other techniques offer the color simulation accuracy required by proofing applications. • Full (Source GCR) provides a complete and accurate simulation based on colorimetric transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. The Gray Component Replacement level specified in the original (source) document is preserved. Process black expressed in CMY is reproduced using CMY toner. Full (Source GCR) is recommended for the highest quality press proofing applications. • Full (Output GCR) is a complete and accurate simulation method based on colorimetric transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. With this method, the Gray Component Replacement (GCR) level that was specified in the original document is not preserved. Instead, all CMYK data is reseparated using the GCR level specified by the output profile. This simulation technique is similar to traditional ICC color matching methods and is more appropriate than Full (Source GCR) for full color printing designed for the press, but reproduced on your printer. NOTE: When you specify Pure Black On for Black Text and Graphics and Full (Output GCR) or Full (Source GCR) for CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method, the black text and graphics in your document are printed with 100% black-only toner. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 17 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link The CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link print option allows you to print press proofs or simulations. This setting specifies the offset press standard or other color printing device that you want to simulate. This option affects CMYK data only. When you specify a setting other than None or ColorWise Off for the CMYK/Grayscale Source, the Fiery PRO80 overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded CMYK profile, the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this setting to override another specified source color space, choose None. In the printer driver, you can view an unlimited number of custom Full simulations created using Command WorkStation. The number of custom simulations is limited by the available disk space on the Fiery PRO80. The CMYK/Grayscale Source setting you specify depends on the press standard for which the CMYK data was separated. • For images that were separated using a custom separation (such as a separation produced with an ICC profile), choose the corresponding profile on the Fiery PRO80 with the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. • For images that were separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. To properly simulate a printed image that was separated using an ICC profile, the same profile must be present on the Fiery PRO80. For more information about importing ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80, see Command WorkStation Help. Two settings are available if you want no CMYK simulation: • The None setting sends your original CMYK data to the printer with calibration applied, but without conversions to simulate another printer. The None setting is recommended if you use another color management system instead of ColorWise (for example, ColorSync or Photoshop). In this case, the Fiery PRO80 is expecting to receive CMYK data already in the device color space of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 will not convert the data, but it will apply calibration. • The ColorWise Off setting sends your original CMYK data to the printer without calibration applied and without conversions to simulate another printer. The CMYK data is still subject to maximum density constraints, however. The ColorWise Off setting is not available as a setting in Command WorkStation and cannot be the default CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. You choose this setting for a specific job. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 18 NOTE: When you print with the ColorWise Off setting, make sure the options you choose in your application do not cause the application to modify CMYK data. If you enable PostScript Color Management or include an embedded profile, the color data sent by the application is similar to Lab color. When you print with settings like Let Printer Determine Colors or Let Photoshop Determine Colors, the application either converts the CMYK data or tags it for color management. You must specify No Color Management in the application when you print with the ColorWise Off setting. Combine Separations The Combine Separations setting specifies how to print separated CMYK data. It supports: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black. With the Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition, you can combine an unlimited number of spot color separations along with the CMYK separations. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. • Off prints each separation individually. • On combines separations as a single, composite-color document, and automatically makes the settings for the following print options: Color Mode (CMYK) and Black Overprint (Off ). The results of combining the multiple plates are predictable and accurate, regardless of the original application used. This feature also fully supports DCS 2.0 file formats when included in a PostScript print job from a page layout application. The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Combine Separations option: • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress For information about using the Combine Separations option with applications such as Photoshop, see Fiery Color Reference. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 19 Composite Overprint When overlapping objects are printed, the foreground object can either overprint or knock out the background object. With overprinting, the color of the background object shows through the foreground object where they overlap, and the resulting color is a combination of the colors of the two objects. With a knock-out, the foreground object hides the background object where they overlap. The Composite Overprint print option allows you to print overprinted objects as specified in the source file. By default, the Composite Overprint print option is off and overlapping objects print as knockouts. NOTE: The Composite Overprint option does not overprint the foreground object if it is an RGB object. The Composite Overprint print option is supported for PostScript and PDF jobs produced by the following applications: • Adobe Acrobat • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress • CorelDRAW The 2-Color Print Mapping option is ignored when Composite Overprint is enabled. A job with more than 32 spot colors may not print as expected. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 20 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) When Gray (RGB) is enabled, any RGB color where R=G=B is printed using only black toner instead of processed black. Similarly, when Gray (CMYK) is enabled, any CMYK color where C=M=Y=0 and K=any value is printed using only black toner instead of processed black. You can choose to apply the Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option to either Text and Graphics or to Text, Graphics, and Images. The following limitations apply: • The Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option has no effect on a job that is pre-separated. • If CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method is set to Quick, the Gray (CMYK) setting does not affect the output. • If Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source is enabled, the Gray (RGB) option is set to Off. Likewise, if the Gray (RGB) option is not set to Off, you cannot enable Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source. • If Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On or Rich Black On, it takes precedence over Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) for 100% black text and graphics. • If a gray is specified as a spot color, the Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option does not affect that gray. Output Profile Because the output profile is applied to all data in the print job, make sure the profile you select is the right one for your job. The default output profile consists of a profile for your printer that describes its color characteristics and a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the printer. Use Command WorkStation to import your own output profile to the Fiery PRO80. Imported output profiles that do not already include a calibration target are at first associated with the calibration target that is tied to the default output profile. You can edit calibration target D-Max values separately. Select the Use Media Defined Profile setting to automatically apply the output profile associated with the media type used in a print job rather than setting a specific output profile. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 21 PDF/X Output Intent PDF/X is a subset of the PDF specification. PDF files can contain a variety of elements (text, graphics, even animations) and it is not always obvious how these elements should be displayed or printed. PDF/X was designed with a focus on high quality printing. It excludes the use of PDF features that are not appropriate for graphic arts and adds features that prevent ambiguities related to printing. A PDF/X compliant document contains embedded information about the intended printing conditions for the document. The PDF/X Output Intent option, when enabled for a PDF/X job, specifies that the Fiery PRO80 use the PDF/X output intent embedded in the PDF/X document. Typically, whether you use this option depends on whether you are using the Fiery PRO80 for proofing or for production (final) printing. Prints for proofing are expected to look exactly like the output of the final production device, regardless of the capabilities of the Fiery PRO80 or the printer. For instance, when proofing Newsprint, you want the color gamut of the printer to be very limited compared to its capabilities. In production, you usually want to maximize the use of the printer gamut by applying specific color features of the Fiery PRO80 or the printer. Even in production, however, you might choose to limit the color gamut in order to achieve consistency in the color produced by different devices. The PDF/X Output Intent option only affects PDF/X files (conforming to the PDF/X3 or PDF/X-1a standard). It has no effect on non-PDF files or PDF files that are not PDF/X compliant. Profiles specified by PDF/X files must be embedded in the files, not referenced from an external locations. NOTE: With the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option, you can use a Hot Folders filter to determine if a PDF file is PDF/X compliant. For information about this Hot Folders filter, see Hot Folders Help. When PDF/X Output Intent is enabled and no other setting conflicts, the Fiery PRO80 processes a PDF/X compliant file in a way that produces results defined by the intents and source color spaces embedded in the file. The Fiery PRO80 ignores the CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method and CMYK/Grayscale Source options. The rendering intents in the PDF/ X file are used and the printed output is limited to the color gamut specified by the output profile embedded in the file. When PDF/X Output Intent is disabled, the Fiery PRO80 ignores the PDF/X output intent. You can specify the PDF/X Output Intent print option for a job in Job Properties in Command WorkStation but not when you print from the printer driver. PDF/X files can be imported directly to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders, but printer drivers always convert PDF before sending a job to the Fiery PRO80. The PDF/X Output Intent option does not appear in the printer driver. When you enable PDF/X Output Intent, you must set the RGB Source option to None so that the rendering intent embedded in the PDF/X file will be used. The PDF/X Output Intent and RGB Source options are both accessed from Expert Settings in the Color icon of Job Properties. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 22 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent The RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option specifies a rendering intent for color conversions. To control the appearance of images, such as prints from office applications or RGB photographs from Photoshop, select the appropriate rendering intent. The Fiery PRO80 allows you to choose from the four rendering intents currently found in industry standard ICC profiles. Fiery PRO80 rendering intent Best used for Equivalent ICC rendering intent Photographic: Typically results in less saturated output than presentation rendering when printing out-of-gamut colors. This style preserves tonal relationships in images. Photographs, including scans and images from stock photography CDs and digital camera images. Image, Contrast, and Perceptual Presentation: Creates saturated colors but does not match printed colors precisely to displayed colors. In-gamut colors, such as flesh tones, are rendered well. This style is similar to the Photographic rendering intent. Artwork and graphs in presentations. In many cases, this style can be used for mixed pages that contain presentation graphics and photographs. Saturation, Graphics Relative Colorimetric: Provides white-point transformation between the source and destination white points. For example, the bluish white color (gray) of a monitor is replaced by paper white. This style avoids visible borders between blank spaces and white objects. Advanced use when color matching is important, but you prefer white colors in the document to print as paper white. This style may also be used with PostScript color management to affect CMYK data for simulation purposes. Relative Colorimetric Absolute Colorimetric: Provides no white point transformation between the source and destination white points. For example, the bluish white color (gray) is not replaced by paper white. Situations when exact colors are needed and visible borders are not distracting. This style may also be used with PostScript color management to affect CMYK data for simulation purposes. Absolute Colorimetric COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 23 RGB Source or Device Link The RGB Source or Device Link setting allows you to define the characteristics of the RGB data in your document so that the appropriate color conversion occurs on the Fiery PRO80. Commonly used monitor color spaces are available from the printer driver and the Fiery PRO80. For others, use Command WorkStation to download custom monitor or scanner profiles. When you specify a setting other than None for the RGB Source, the Fiery PRO80 overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded RGB profile, the RGB Source setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this setting to override another specified source color space, choose None. When you specify a setting other than None, because the color space definitions are overridden, the output from the Fiery PRO80 is consistent across platforms. The Fiery PRO80 RGB Source options are as follows: • EFIRGB specifies an EFI-defined color space recommended for users who have no detailed information about their RGB data. • sRGB (PC) specifies the definition of a Windows computer monitor profile used as the default. • Apple Standard specifies the definition of a Mac OS computer monitor profile used as the default. • Adobe RGB (1998) is an Adobe-defined color space, used in pre-press as the default working space in Photoshop 5. • eciRGB is the European Color Initiative (ECI) recommended space for use as an RGB working color space and color data exchange format for ad agencies, publishers, reproduction and printing houses. • Fiery RGB is an EFI-defined color space recommended for users of office applications. This color space is similar to EFIRGB but is larger and can provide a more desirable blue output. • None instructs the Fiery PRO80 to allow the RGB sources you defined elsewhere, such as in the application, to be used. When you set RGB Source to None, the appearance of colors is not independent of the file type. For example, RGB EPS files looks different from RGB TIFF files. With RGB Source set to None, PostScript RGB data that contains a source color space definition is converted using the RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option (see “RGB/Lab Rendering Intent” on page 22). Non-PostScript RGB data and PostScript RGB data that does not contain a source color space definition are converted using the EFIRGB source profile and Presentation rendering intent. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 24 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source The Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option determines how RGB colors (as well as Lab and XYZ colors) are converted to CMYK. The name of this option is meant to be descriptive, because the option defines the color spaces that are used by the Fiery PRO80 to “separate” the RGB data into CMYK values. The two choices available for this option determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the printer (Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source disabled) or is first converted into the gamut of another digital printer or press standard (Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source enabled). This feature helps make one device behave like another for RGB data. For example, if a high-quality ICC profile is available for another print device, the printer can simulate the behavior of that device. Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source is also useful for prepress applications. For example, it allows you to experiment with the appearance of an RGB scan under different press printing conditions, without having to convert the RGB data to CMYK data for each condition. When the desired printing condition is found, convert the file to CMYK, using the same CMYK/Grayscale Source that you used during the experimentation. NOTE: Use the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source print option in conjunction with the Output Profile or CMYK/Grayscale Source print options. • Enabled converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space for a specified simulation (select the desired simulation with the CMYK/Grayscale Source print option). • Disabled converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space of your printer. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 25 Spot Color Matching The Spot Color Matching option provides automatic matching of spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents. • On: The Fiery PRO80 uses a built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of spot colors your printer can produce. (New tables are generated when you add new output profiles.) With Spot-On, the Fiery PRO80 uses the CMYK matches determined through Spot-On (see page 65). • Off: The Fiery PRO80 processes the spot color as CMYK data and uses CMYK equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer, such as PANTONE. These are the same CMYK equivalents used by applications that include spot color libraries. NOTE: Spot colors that are not included in the built-in table are treated as CMYK. For jobs that include spot colors, set Spot Color Matching to On unless you are printing press simulations. In that case, set Spot Color Matching to Off and choose the appropriate CMYK/ Grayscale Source (see page 17). For a PDF job that includes spot colors that are not included in the built-in table, setting Spot Color Matching to On retains the original spot colors. The Fiery PRO80 references the built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of the original spot color. NOTE: Use Spot Color Matching only when printing composites, not when printing separations. Spot Color Matching and the PANTONE Coated Color Reference The PANTONE Coated Color Reference prints differently depending on the Spot Color Matching setting (see Fiery Color Reference). • On: The Fiery PRO80 uses a built-in table or, with Spot-On, the Spot-On color dictionaries to generate the best matches for the PANTONE colors that your printer can produce. The PANTONE number is displayed below each swatch. For more information about Spot-On, see page 65. • Off: The Fiery PRO80 prints swatches using the CMYK values recommended by Pantone, Inc. (and used by applications that provide PANTONE color libraries). The CMYK values used to generate the color, as well as the PANTONE number of the color, are printed below each swatch. These CMYK values are printed through the selected CMYK/ Grayscale Source and Output Profile settings. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 26 Substitute Colors Spot-On allows you to create a list of substitute colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors. To enable substitute colors for a job, select the Substitute Colors option. For more information about creating and using substitute colors, see Command WorkStation Help. Specifying ColorWise print options To modify Fiery PRO80 printing behavior, do any of the following: • Specify default values for ColorWise options in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. You can also set default values from Fiery PRO80 Setup, as described in Configuration and Setup. The defaults apply to all subsequent print jobs unless you override them. A job uses the Fiery PRO80 default settings (unless otherwise specified) at the time it is processed for printing, and not at the time it is sent to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue. • Specify ColorWise options for an individual print job using the menus that appear in the printer driver. • Specify ColorWise options for a job printed through Hot Folders using the Job Properties settings in Hot Folders. • Specify ColorWise options for a job already submitted and held at the Fiery PRO80 using the Job Properties settings in Command WorkStation. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 27 For the location of each print option, see the following table. ColorWise print option Color window of printer driver or Job Properties Basic Settings of printer driver, Job Properties, or Color Setup Expert Settings of printer driver, Job Properties, or Color Setup Auto Trapping ✔ Black Detection ✔ Black Overprint ✔ Black Text and Graphics ✔ CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method ✔ ✔ CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link ✔ ✔ Combine Separations ✔ Composite Overprint ✔ Gray (RGB and CMYK) ✔ ✔ Output Profile ✔ ✔ PDF/X Output Intent ✔ (Job Properties only) RGB/Lab Rendering Intent ✔ ✔ RGB Source or Device Link ✔ ✔ Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source ✔ Spot Color Matching ✔ ✔ Substitute Colors ✔ COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 28 Setting default values in Command WorkStation Command WorkStation allows you to set the default values for the ColorWise print options and print settings for the Fiery PRO80. These settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80, unless a user overrides them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver. These default settings can also be overridden using Command WorkStation Job Properties. In addition, the defaults set in Command WorkStation are automatically reflected in the printer driver and in Fiery PRO80 Setup (for those options that can be set in Setup). The ColorWise print option settings are in the Color Management tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 29 Setting print options in the printer driver The printer driver writes a PostScript file containing the instructions generated by your application and the settings for the ColorWise print options you selected. The printer driver then sends the PostScript file to the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 performs PostScript processing and color conversions and sends raster color data to the printer. Setting print options for Windows This section explains how to set color management print options with the Adobe and Microsoft PostScript printer drivers for Windows, PostScript 3 printer drivers that take full advantage of the color features of the Fiery PRO80. Before you proceed, do the following: • Install the printer driver and the Fiery PRO80 PPD (see Printing). • Set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing (see Printing). NOTE: The following illustrations and instructions do not apply to all applications. Many applications, such as Adobe PageMaker, Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, QuarkXPress, and CorelDRAW, have other color management options in addition to those presented in the printer driver. For information about specific applications, see Fiery Color Reference. Use the following procedure to set the color options for Windows computers. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 30 TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS COMPUTERS 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, the Fiery Printing tab is displayed. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Specify the settings for the print options in the Color window. For information about ColorWise print options, see page 13. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 31 5 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. NOTE: If the Basic Settings and Expert Settings buttons are not active, make sure that Two- Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Server Defaults to display the default values currently set on the Fiery PRO80. 7 Specify settings for the ColorWise print options in each of the tabs. For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about individual print options, see page 13. 8 Click OK to save the settings and close the Advanced Edit window. 9 Click OK to close the Properties window, and then click OK to send your job. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 32 Setting print options in Mac OS This section explains how to set color management print options with the printer drivers for Mac OS. Before you proceed, do the following: • Install the Fiery PRO80 PPD (see Printing). • Set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing (see Printing). TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR MAC OS X COMPUTERS 1 Choose Print in your application. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 3 Mac OS X v10.3.9 and 10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages, choose ColorSync from the drop-down list, and choose In Printer from the Color Conversion list. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 33 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview, choose Color Matching from the drop-down list, and select In Printer. 4 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 5 Select Two-Way Communication. For information about enabling Two Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Full Properties. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 34 7 Click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. 8 Specify settings for the print options in the Color pane. For information about ColorWise print options, see page 13. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 35 9 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit window appears. NOTE: Alternatively, you can click Basic Settings to display the Color Management window, which also displays ColorWise print options. However, not all of the print options appear in the Color Management window. 10 Click Server Defaults to display the default values currently set on the Fiery PRO80. 11 Specify settings for the ColorWise print options in each of the tabs. For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about individual print options, see page 26. 12 Click OK to save the settings and close the Advanced Edit window. The Color pane reappears. 13 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences window, and then click Print to send your job. COLOR PROFILES 36 COLOR PROFILES The Fiery PRO80 includes by default a number of RGB and CMYK profiles that you can use for printing through the RGB Source, CMYK/Grayscale Source, and Output Profile settings for a job. For more information about these options, see ColorWise Print Options. You can manage the profiles on the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation. You can import or delete other profiles as well. Color files The User Software DVD includes a number of files, including color profiles, that are useful for color management. To add color profiles to the Fiery PRO80: • Install them on your computer. • Use Command WorkStation to import them to the Fiery PRO80. For information about importing profiles to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. COLOR PROFILES 37 Installing additional ICC profiles on your computer You can install (copy) additional ICC profiles from the User Software DVD or the Fiery PRO80 to your computer. Use the ICC profiles with applications that support ICC standards, such as Adobe Photoshop. Location on User Software DVD Profiles Adobe ICC Profiles folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by Adobe Systems, Inc. For more information, see the documents included in the folder. CMYK Profiles: • EuropeISOCoatedFOGRA27.icc • EuroscaleUncoated.icc • JapanColor2001Coated.icc • JapanColor2001Uncoated.icc • JapanColor2002Newspaper.icc • JapanWebCoated.icc • USSheetfedCoated.icc • USSheetfedUncoated.icc • USWebCoatedSWOP.icc • USWebUncoated.icc RGB Profiles: • AdobeRGB1998.icc • AppleRGB.icc • ColorMatchRGB.icc • sRGB Color Space Profile.icm COLOR PROFILES 38 ECI folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by the European Color Initiative (ECI). For more information, see the documents included in the CMYK Profiles folder and the RGB Profiles folder, as well as the ECI web site at www.eci.org. CMYK Profiles: • ISOcoated_v2_300_eci.icc • ISOcoated_v2_eci.icc • ISOuncoated.icc • ISOuncoatedyellowish.icc • ISOwebcoated.icc • SC_paper_eci.icc RGB Profiles: • ECI-RGB.V1.0.icc • eciRGB_v2.icc • eciRGB_v2_ICCv4.icc Location on User Software DVD Profiles COLOR PROFILES 39 EFI Support folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by EFI. For more information, see the General Requirements for Applications in Commercial Offset Lithography (GRACoL) web site at www.gracol.org, the Fogra web site at www.fogra.org, and the Specifications Web Offset Publications (SWOP) web site at www.swop.org. CMYK Profiles: • EFIEURO.icc • EFISWOP.icc • Enterprise CMYK.icc • GRACoL2006_Coated1_EFI.icc: • ISOCoated.icc • ISOCoated_FOGRA39L_EFI.icc • ISOUncoated_FOGRA29L_EFI.icc • SWOP2006_Coated3_EFI.icc • SWOP2006_Coated5_EFI.icc Japan Profiles: • EFIDIC.ICC • EFIJMPA2.icc • JC2001_type1_EFI.icc • JC2001_type2_EFI.icc • JC2001_type3_EFI.icc • JC2001_type4_EFI.icc • TOYO Offset Coated 2.0.icc RGB Profiles: • EFISRGB.ICC • Fiery RGB v2.icc • Fiery RGB v4.icc • Fiery RGB v5.icc • RGB D65 (Splash).icc Location on User Software DVD Profiles COLOR PROFILES 40 For most ICC-aware applications, you must install the files in a folder named Color (Windows) or a folder named Profiles in the Library: ColorSync folder (Mac OS). For use with the Fiery PRO80, you can copy the files to a folder of your choice. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 2 Open the folder containing the profile. 3 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile. The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder on your computer. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 2 Open the folder containing the profile. 3 Copy the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE FIERY PRO80 OVER THE NETWORK 1 Browse for the Fiery PRO80 over the network, using either the IP address or the DNS server name. 2 Type the user name and password, if required. Consult your administrator to see if this information is required. 3 Double-click the PC_User_SW directory. 4 Open the ICC folder. 5 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile. The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder on your computer. COLOR PROFILES 41 TO INSTALL COLORSYNC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE FIERY PRO80 OVER THE NETWORK 1 Choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type smb:// followed by the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Type the user name and password if required. Ask your administrator if this information is required. 4 Double-click the Mac_User_SW directory. 5 Open the ColorSync folder. 6 Copy the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges. On Mac OS, see the ColorSync documentation for setting ColorSync profiles, such as EFIRGB. COLOR PROFILES 42 Other color files You can copy additional color files from the User Software DVD or the Fiery PRO80. These files are useful for color matching and for calibration. Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder CMYK Color Reference.ps: An 11-page, Letter-size PostScript file used for reference when defining CMYK colors in applications. PANTONE Book.ps: A 20-page, Letter-size PostScript file that indicates the closest equivalent of PANTONE coated colors that the Fiery PRO80 and your printer model can produce. The method used to print the PANTONE Book.ps file differs, depending on the Spot Color Matching setting. For more information, see “Spot Color Matching” on page 25. RGB page 01.doc: A Microsoft Word file that you can print to view available RGB colors. RGB page 02.ppt: A Microsoft PowerPoint file that you can print to view available RGB colors. Color Bars folder (inside the Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder) FieryColorBar.eps: Used for the Control Bar feature. For more information about Control Bar, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Ugra Fogra-MediaWedge V2.2x_EFIv1.eps: Used for the Ugra/ FOGRA Media Wedge feature. For more information about this feature, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. PS Files folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files folder) Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps, and Standard34.ps: PostScript files of color patches for obtaining measurements. The numbers in the file names refer to the number of patches on the page. The Custom files allow you to download measurement patches that incorporate the current calibration set of the printer. The Standard files allow you to download standard measurement patches that bypass the current calibration set of the printer. NOTE: These files are provided for expert users and should not be used for day-to-day calibration. COLOR PROFILES 43 Halftone Calibration Files folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files folder) Images of measurement pages for various calibration instruments and page sizes, used for calibrating the Fiery PRO80 for different halftone screens. Files are provided for Adobe Photoshop and for other applications. For more information about halftone calibration, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. Photoshop folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ Calibration Files \Halftone Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files folder) The following halftone calibration files are provided for Adobe Photoshop: DTP32_A3.psd DTP32_A4.psd DTP32_Letters.psd DTP32_Tabloid.psd DTP41_A3.psd DTP41_A4.psd DTP41_Letters.psd DTP41_Tabloid.psd ED100_A3.psd ED100_A4.psd ED100_Letters.psd ED100_Tabloid.psd ES1000_A3.psd ES1000_A4.psd ES1000_Letters.psd ES1000_Tabloid.psd NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. COLOR PROFILES 44 Other Applications folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files folder) The following halftone calibration files are provided for other applications (besides Adobe Photoshop): DTP32_A3.eps DTP32_A4.eps DTP32_Letters.eps DTP32_Tabloid.eps DTP41_A3.eps DTP41_A4.eps DTP41_Letters.eps DTP41_Tabloid.eps ED100_A3.eps ED100_A4.eps ED100_Letters.eps ED100_Tabloid.eps ES1000_A3.eps ES1000_A4.eps ES1000_Letters.eps ES1000_Tabloid.eps NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. COLOR PROFILES 45 Managing profiles on the Fiery PRO80 Command WorkStation allows you to import ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80, export profiles, delete profiles (except for default profiles), and set the properties of profiles. You can also create custom CMYK source or output profiles by editing an existing profile and then saving it as a new profile. These features are in the Profiles tab under the Resources tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. CALIBRATION 46 CALIBRATION Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 ensures consistent and reliable color output. Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation with the printer’s built-in scanner, a densitometer or a spectrophotometer. If you defined a custom halftone screen, you must calibrate the Fiery PRO80 for that halftone screen before you print a job with it. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Changing calibration has the potential to affect all jobs for all users, so consider limiting the number of people authorized to perform calibration. Set an Administrator password to control access to calibration (see Configuration and Setup). Calibration methods You can calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the following methods: All of these calibration methods except for ColorCal from the printer touch panel are performed through Command WorkStation. For more information about each of these methods, see Command WorkStation Help. Term Refers to ColorCal (in Command WorkStation) Calibration method that uses the printer’s built-in scanner to measure toner density values ColorCal from the printer touch panel Calibration method that uses the printer’s built-in scanner to measure toner density values DTP32 or DTP32 Series II X-Rite DTP32 or DTP32 Series II automatic densitometer DTP41 X-Rite DTP41 automatic spectrophotometer ES-1000 Spectrophotometer ES-1000 hand-held spectrophotometer CALIBRATION 47 Calibrating with Command WorkStation The Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation allows you to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the measurement method of your choice. The Calibrate feature is in the Tools tab under the General tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: Multiple users can be connected to one Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation, but only one user at a time can use the Calibrate feature. If you try to calibrate when another user is using Command WorkStation to calibrate, an error message appears. NOTE: You can disable calibration (and color management) for CMYK data in a job by using the ColorWise Off setting for the CMYK/Grayscale Source option. For more information, see “CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link” on page 17. You might want to disable calibration for testing purposes, for example. 1 Click to start calibration 1 CALIBRATION 48 Printer calibration with Fiery PRO80 calibration When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using Calibrator in Command WorkStation, by default Calibrator calibrates the printer before printing the measurement page. We recommend that you calibrate the printer before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, but if the printer has been calibrated recently, you might choose to skip printer calibration. TO DISABLE CALIBRATION OF THE PRINTER WHEN YOU PRINT THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 Click Print in the Calibrator main window. The Print Options window appears. 2 Click Show Advanced Options. The Engine Calibration option is displayed. This option is set to On by default. 3 Choose Off in the Engine Calibration list. 4 Specify settings for other options and click Print. The measurement page is printed immediately, without any delay for calibrating the printer. When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal in Calibrator and you choose to calibrate the scanner first, the printer is not calibrated before it prints the scanner measurement page, but only before it prints the ColorCal measurement page. CALIBRATION 49 Calibrating from the printer touch panel You can calibrate the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel using ColorCal, without using Command WorkStation. If an Administrator password has been set, you will need it to perform calibration from the printer touch panel. For instructions on using the printer touch panel, see Configuration and Setup. Calibration with Web LCD enabled (default) If the Web LCD feature of the Fiery PRO80 is enabled (the default condition), use the following procedure to calibrate from the printer touch panel. NOTE: For more information about the Web LCD feature, see Configuration and Setup. TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL WITH WEB LCD ENABLED 1 When the printer is Idle, press Controller on the Machine tab to enter the Fiery PRO80 display. 2 Press the Tools tab, and then press Calibrate. 3 If an Administrator password is set on the Fiery PRO80, enter it and press Login. 4 Choose the calibration set from the list and press OK. 5 Choose the paper source for the measurement page and press OK. The ColorCal measurement page is comprised of swatches of color that are measured by the printer’s scanner and then compared to the target color values. 6 To print the scanner measurement page and calibrate the scanner before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, select Scanner Calibration Page and press Continue. If you clear this option, only the ColorCal measurement page is printed, and the scanner calibration is skipped. We recommend that you always calibrate the scanner before calibrating the Fiery PRO80. 7 Retrieve the measurement pages. 8 Place the grayscale strip and Color Control patches according to the instructions on the scanner measurement page, and press Continue to initiate the scan. Wait for the scan to complete. 9 When the display indicates that the measurement was successful, press Continue. CALIBRATION 50 10 Place the grayscale strip according to the instructions on the ColorCal measurement page. Place the grayscale strip face-down on the printer glass (platen). Place the strip along the top edge of the printer so that it is centered between the paper width marks on the printer. Place the color measurement page face-down over the grayscale strip. Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches. Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color measurement page. 11 Press Continue to initiate the scan. Wait for the scan to complete. 12 When the display indicates that the measurement was successful, press Continue. 13 To print a Comparison Page, press Print Comparison Page. You can examine the Comparison Page to decide if the calibration is successful. 14 If the calibration is successful, press Apply & Finish to save the measurements. 1 Place grayscale strip face down 2 Place color measurement page face down over grayscale strip 1 2 CALIBRATION 51 Calibration with Web LCD disabled If the Web LCD feature of the Fiery PRO80 is disabled, use the following procedure to calibrate from the printer touch panel. NOTE: For more information about the Web LCD feature, see Configuration and Setup. TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL WITH WEB LCD DISABLED 1 When the printer is Idle, press Controller on the Machine tab to enter the Fiery PRO80 display. 2 Press Calibration. 3 Choose the Calibration Set. 4 For Tray, choose the paper source for the measurement page. Make sure that the paper loaded in the tray matches the paper size and media type displayed. The color measurement page consists of swatches of color that are measured by the printer’s scanner and then compared to the target color values. 5 For Engine Calibration, press the setting to change it from Disable to Enable or from Enable to Disable. If Engine Calibration is enabled, the printer is calibrated before the measurement page is printed. We recommend that you calibrate the printer before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, but if the printer has been calibrated recently, you might choose to skip printer calibration. 6 To calibrate the scanner first, press Adjust Scanner, and then press Print. Otherwise, skip to step 10. A scanner measurement page is printed. 7 Retrieve the scanner measurement page and place it on the printer glass as directed. See the scanner measurement page for directions on how to place the page correctly on the printer glass. 8 On the printer touch panel, press Scan. 9 When the display indicates that the scanner adjustment is complete, press OK. 10 Press Print. The color measurement page is printed. 11 Retrieve the color measurement page. CALIBRATION 52 12 Place the grayscale strip face-down on the printer glass. Place the strip along the top edge of the printer so that it is centered between the paper width marks on the printer. 13 Place the color measurement page face-down over the grayscale strip. Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches. Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color measurement page. 14 On the printer touch panel, press Scan. 15 Wait for the display to indicate that the calibration is complete. 16 To print a comparison of this calibration with the default calibration, press Compare and then press Print. You can use this comparison to check the calibration results. 17 Press Apply to save the measurements and overwrite any previous calibration data in the calibration set. 18 Press Close to return to the Machine display. Managing calibration sets Every output profile on the Fiery PRO80 must be associated with a calibration set. The calibration set provides the Fiery PRO80 with measurements of the density response of the printer toners for specific printing conditions (for example, media type). This data, along with the expected density response of the printer, allows the Fiery PRO80 to apply corrections to color values that are sent to the printer, to achieve the calibrated output. For more information, see “An overview of calibration” on page 62. An output profile can be associated with only one calibration set, but the same calibration set can be used by more than one output profile. A calibration set must be associated with at least one output profile, otherwise the calibration set will never be used for printing. 1 Place grayscale strip face down 2 Place color measurement page face down over grayscale strip 1 2 CALIBRATION 53 Using the output profiles and calibration sets The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with one or more output profiles. You may obtain good color quality with the factory-supplied output profiles and their associated calibration sets (see scenarios 1 and 2 in the table below). However, you may need to create custom calibration sets and output profiles depending on your situation (see scenarios 3 and 4 in the following table). NOTE: Recommended papers are chosen for quality, as well as other factors, such as feeding reliability and quality of transfer. Your paper Action See 1 Recommended paper for a factory-supplied output profile (the paper that the profile is based on) You will obtain acceptable color when you print with the output profile. You do not need to create a calibration set or custom profile. See “Recommended paper and print settings” on page 54 to find out the recommended paper for an output profile. 2 Paper similar to a factorysupplied profile’s recommended paper You might be able to use the output profile. The print settings required for your paper (for example, media type and media weight) must match the print settings required by the recommended paper. If the color quality is sufficient, you do not need to create a calibration set or custom profile. The output profile name usually indicates the general type of paper (for example, plain, coated, or heavy). To find out the print settings required for the recommended paper, see “Recommended paper and print settings” on page 54. 3 Paper that is similar to a factory-supplied profile’s recommended paper but uses different print settings You might still be able to use a factory-supplied output profile, if you create a custom calibration set and use it to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 with your paper. For more information, see “Adding custom calibration sets” on page 55. 4 Paper that does not yield acceptable color with any factory-supplied profile You must create a custom calibration set and a custom profile. For more information, see “Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles” on page 55. CALIBRATION 54 Recommended paper and print settings You can check the recommended paper and print settings for a particular output profile using Profile Manager and Calibrator. TO FIND THE RECOMMENDED PAPER AND PRINT SETTINGS FOR AN OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to Color Setup > Color Management. 2 Select the Output Profile and note the name of the calibration set displayed to the right. 3 In Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. Calibrator starts in a separate window. 4 Under Calibration Set, select Manage. The Manage Calibration Settings window appears. 5 Select the calibration set from the list. The recommended paper and the required print settings are displayed. 6 Click Cancel to close the window. CALIBRATION 55 Adding custom calibration sets If you are printing on a paper that is similar to the recommended paper but uses different print settings, you might still be able to use the output profile, but you must create a custom calibration set. If the color quality is sufficient, you do not need to create a custom profile (see scenario 3 in the table under “Using the output profiles and calibration sets” on page 53). You can add a new calibration set that you can then select when performing calibration. You can delete a custom calibration set. You cannot delete a factory-supplied calibration set. For instructions on adding a custom calibration set, see Command WorkStation Help. Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles If you determine that none of the factory-supplied output profiles yields acceptable color with your paper, you must create a custom calibration set in Calibrator and a custom profile using profile-generating software such as Fiery Color Profiler Suite (see scenario 4 in the table under “Using the output profiles and calibration sets” on page 53). For example, if you print with a halftone screen setting other than the default (Dot 1), the resulting color using the default calibration set might not be acceptable. You can create a custom calibration set and specify a new screen setting, and then also specify the same screen when you create a custom profile. NOTE: Before creating a custom calibration set and custom output profile, make sure that the printer is calibrated (if calibration is supported on the printer). For information about performing printer calibration, see the documentation that accompanies the printer. Calibration on the Fiery PRO80 requires that each output profile contains a calibration target. If an output profile does not contain a calibration target, when you import the output profile to the Fiery PRO80, the calibration target from the default output profile is added to the imported profile. The procedures in this section describe how to make sure that an appropriate calibration target is added to your custom output profile when you import it to the Fiery PRO80 and associate it with a custom calibration set. Using Fiery Color Profiler Suite If you use Fiery Color Profiler Suite to create a custom output profile, you do not have to perform any procedures to add a calibration target to the output profile. Color Profiler Suite can create a profile that contains a calibration target. • First, create a custom calibration set using Calibrator in Command WorkStation. • Next, create a custom output profile using Color Profiler Suite and install it on the Fiery PRO80. CALIBRATION 56 TO CREATE A CUSTOM CALIBRATION SET ON THE FIERY PRO80 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. Calibrator starts in a separate window. 2 For Calibration Set, select Manage. The Manage Calibration Settings window appears. 3 Choose a calibration set from the list. Choose the calibration set that is the most similar to your paper. For example, the calibration set might be for the same brand of paper but a different weight. 4 Type a new Recommended Paper description, choose the printer settings for the custom calibration set, and click Save. 5 Type a name for the custom calibration set and select an output profile to associate it with. Select any output profile for now. You will change this association to your custom output profile after you create the profile. 6 Click OK. The custom calibration set will be used when you print with its associated output profile. TO CREATE A CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE IN COLOR PROFILER SUITE V3.0 1 In Color Profiler Suite, start Printer Profiler and click Print Patches. 2 Proceed through the screens in sequence to create a profile. 3 On the Welcome screen, click Select Fiery Server and choose the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 must be connected to your network. 4 In the Print Patches screen, click Expert Settings, make sure that the Optimize Calibration option is selected, and click OK. 5 When you print the measurement page, choose the same Image Halftone Mode setting that you chose when you created the new calibration set. 6 When you save the profile, click Install on Fiery Server and make sure the Fiery PRO80 is selected. 7 In the Profile Settings window that appears when you save the profile, under Calibration, choose the custom calibration set that you created and click OK. The custom output profile is installed on the Fiery PRO80 and associated with your custom calibration set. When you print a job using this output profile, the calibration set is used as well. CALIBRATION 57 Using a profile-generating application other than Fiery Color Profiler Suite If you use a profile-generating application other than Fiery Color Profiler Suite to create a custom output profile, follow the instruction in this section. To create the calibration target, you print a page of color patches on the Fiery PRO80 using your paper and measure the page using Calibrator. Next, you copy the calibration target to a temporary output profile and set this profile as the default output profile. When you import your custom output profile, the calibration target is added from the temporary output profile. Follow these procedures to use custom calibration sets and output profiles. • Print a measurement page. • Measure the measurement page. • Create a custom calibration set and a temporary output profile. • Set up the calibration target in the temporary output profile. • Create a custom output profile and save it to your computer. • Import the custom output profile to the Fiery PRO80. • Delete the temporary output profile. TO PRINT THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 Load your paper in the printer. 2 Locate the file for the measurement page on the User Software DVD. Choose the file for your page size and measurement instrument. The files are located in the Photoshop and Other Applications folders inside the following folders on the User Software DVD: • Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files • Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files 3 Start Command WorkStation and connect to the Fiery PRO80. 4 Import the measurement page file to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80. For instructions, see Command WorkStation Help. 5 Double-click the job in the Job Center window. The Job Properties window appears. CALIBRATION 58 6 Select the following print settings and click OK. • Set the media settings appropriate for your paper. For example, choose the media type that corresponds to your paper and the input tray that contains your paper. Choose the halftone screen that you will use to print. Be sure you also choose this setting when you create the custom calibration set and output profile. • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option to ColorWise OFF. With this setting, the job is printed without calibration. • Set the desired halftone setting, if available. 7 Right-click the job and choose Print. The measurement page is printed. TO MEASURE THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. 2 Make a note of the selected calibration set. For this procedure, you can use any existing calibration set. 3 Select Expert mode, click Save to File, and save the measurements for the currently selected calibration set to a file on your computer. If you do not need to preserve the existing measurements (for example, you have not calibrated the Fiery PRO80 using this calibration set), you can skip this step. 4 Measure the measurement page. For instructions, see the section in Command WorkStation Help for your measurement device. Do not print the measurement page in Calibrator. Use the measurement page you have already printed. 5 Click Apply to save the measurements. CALIBRATION 59 TO CREATE A CUSTOM CALIBRATION SET AND TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Calibrator, create a custom calibration set. For instructions, see Command WorkStation Help. You must choose an existing calibration set that the custom calibration set is based on. Choose the same calibration set that you used to measure the measurement page. The measurements are copied to the custom calibration set you create. In the custom calibration set, be sure to choose the same Screen setting that you used to print the measurement page. When you create a custom calibration set, you associate it with a copy of an existing output profile. You can choose any output profile; this association is temporary. You will not use the copied output profile to print. 2 If you saved the current measurements to a file in the previous procedure, you can restore the measurements. • Select the correct calibration set. • Click From File under Get Measurements, select the file, and click Open. • Click Apply to save the measurements. Alternatively, you can restore the factory default measurements. • Select the correct calibration set. • Click Restore Device, and then click OK. TO SET UP THE CALIBRATION TARGET USING A TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Calibrator, select Expert mode. 2 Make sure that your custom calibration set is selected. 3 Choose Measurements vs. Target under View Measurements (optional) and click View. 4 Make a note of the Measured D-Max values for C, M, Y, and K. Be sure to note the Measured values, not the Target values. 5 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 6 Select the output profile that you created when you created the custom calibration set and click Edit. You will use this profile as a temporary profile to set the D-Max values of your custom output profile. CALIBRATION 60 7 Change the D-Max values to the values you recorded in step 4. 8 Click Save, type the name if needed, and then click Save again to save the edited profile. 9 In Device Center, choose Color Setup > Color Management. 10 For the Output Profile option, select the profile that you just edited. The profile becomes the default output profile. TO CREATE A CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE 1 Print the color profiling patches. Before printing the color profiling patches: • Set the same print settings as in your custom calibration set. Be sure to use the same Screen setting. • Set the output profile to be the temporary default output profile (the one you saved in the previous procedure). • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option to None. This ensures that your patches print only with the proper correction from calibration, without any other CMYK conversions. 2 Measure the color profiling patches and create the new output profile using a profilegenerating application. For the procedures to create output profiles, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 3 Save the custom output profile to the default folder for profiles on your computer. Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008: Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color Mac OS X: Library: ColorSync: Profiles TO IMPORT THE CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 In Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 2 Click Import and go to the location of your custom output profile. 3 Select your custom output profile, choose Output next to Import Profile As and click Import. The profile is imported to the Fiery PRO80, and the Output Profile Settings window appears. The calibration target from the default output profile is copied to the custom output profile. 4 In the Output Profile Settings window, confirm that your custom calibration set is selected. When the custom output profile is imported, the calibration set from the default output profile is associated with the custom output profile. 5 Click OK to save changes and close the Output Profile Settings window. CALIBRATION 61 Your custom output profile now has the correct calibration target and is associated with your custom calibration set. You no longer need the temporary default output profile and can delete it from the Fiery PRO80. TO DELETE THE TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Device Center, choose Color Setup > Color Management. 2 For the Output Profile option, select a profile that is not the temporary default output profile you are going to delete. The profile becomes the default output profile. 3 In Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 4 Select the temporary output profile and click Delete. 5 Click Yes. CALIBRATION 62 Understanding calibration The following sections describe important concepts and suggestions for understanding calibration. An overview of calibration Calibration generates curves that adjust for the difference between the actual toner densities (measurements) and the response expected by the output profile. • Measurements represent the actual color behavior of the printer. • Calibration sets are sets of measurements that represent the output of specific combinations of media-related options. • Each output profile contains a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the printer. After you calibrate the Fiery PRO80, a calibration set is stored. This calibration set is used when it is associated with an output profile. Every output profile has an associated calibration set. If you have not specified one, the calibration set associated with the default output profile is used. If you change the calibration after a saved job has been processed (RIPped), you do not have to reprocess (reRIP) the job. The new calibration affects the job without reprocessing. How calibration works Although the needs of most users are met by the default calibration set, the Fiery PRO80 allows you to choose a calibration set to customize calibration for specialized jobs. Calibration allows you to: • Maximize the color reproduction capabilities of the Fiery PRO80. • Ensure consistent color quality over time. • Produce consistent output across Fiery PRO80 servers. • Achieve better color matches when reproducing spot colors, such as PANTONE colors or other named color systems. • Optimize the Fiery PRO80 for using ColorWise rendering intents, CMYK simulations, and ICC profiles. Success in obtaining satisfactory print quality from the Fiery PRO80 depends on many factors. Among the most important are establishing and maintaining optimal toner densities. The density is the measure of the light absorbed by a surface. By carefully regulating toner densities, you obtain consistent printed color. CALIBRATION 63 Even with a calibrated system, toner density is affected by the settings of printer, humidity, and temperature. Density also tends to drift over time. Uneven toner density on paper affects calibration results. Regular measurement detects day-to-day variations in density, gradation, and color reproduction, and calibration corrects them. Calibration works by creating calibration curves on the Fiery PRO80 that compensate for the difference between actual (measured) and desired (target) density values. These calibration curves are the graphic equivalent of transfer functions, which are mathematical descriptions of changes that are made to the initial data. Transfer functions are often graphed as input or output curves. The Fiery PRO80 generates calibration curves after comparing measured values to the final target values for each of the four toner colors. The target values are based on the output profile specified. Measurements Measurement files contain numerical values that correspond to the toner density produced by the printer when it prints solid cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, and graduated tints of those colors. To create a measurement file, print a page of color patches. Measure the patches using a color measurement instrument connected to a computer on the network, or if it is available, the print device’s scanner. The new measurements are automatically downloaded to the Fiery PRO80. Output profiles and calibration sets Output profiles and calibration sets define desired calibration results. One or more output profiles and calibration sets are provided with the Fiery PRO80. When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80, select the calibration set that corresponds to the typical printing jobs at your site. This same calibration set can be associated with one or more output profiles. For more information about output profiles, see page 20. Scheduling calibration Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 at least once a day, depending on the volume of print jobs. If it is very important to maintain consistent color, or your printer is subject to wide fluctuations in temperature or humidity, calibrate every few hours. For optimal performance, calibrate whenever there is a noticeable change in print quality or printing results are not as expected. If you must split a print job into two or more batches to print at different times, it is important to calibrate before you print each batch. You should also calibrate the Fiery PRO80 after printer maintenance. However, because the printer may be less stable immediately after maintenance, wait until you have printed approximately 50 pages before you calibrate. CALIBRATION 64 NOTE: Because printed output from the printer is very sensitive to changes in temperature and humidity, do not install the printer near a window, in direct sunlight, or near a heater or air conditioner. Paper is also sensitive to climate changes. Store it in a cool, dry, stable environment, and keep reams sealed until they are used. To monitor print quality, print the following color pages: • Color Charts (from Command WorkStation or the printer touch panel) • Color reference pages included in the User Software DVD (see page 42) These pages include fully saturated color patches and pale tints of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Images with skin tones offer a good basis for comparison. Save and periodically compare the pages you print. If a noticeable change in appearance occurs, calibrate the Fiery PRO80. When you examine the Test Page, all color patches should be visible, even though they may be very faint in the five to two percent range. Each patch set should show uniform gradation from patch to patch as the color lightens from 100% to zero. If the solid density patches (100% cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) look less saturated over time, show the pages to your printer service technician to determine whether adjusting the printer can improve output. Checking calibration status To verify whether the Fiery PRO80 is calibrated, which calibration set and output profile were used, and when the printer was last calibrated, perform the following: • Print a Configuration page or Test Page from the printer touch panel or Command WorkStation. For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup. • In the Calibrate feature of Command WorkStation, select a calibration set. The last calibration and the user who performed it are displayed. SPOT-ON 65 SPOT-ON The Spot Color Matching print option automatically matches spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents so that spot colors can be simulated using the CMYK toner of the printer. However, you may want to adjust the default CMYK equivalents to achieve a better match for your specific printing conditions. You can modify spot colors using the Spot-On spot color editor in Command WorkStation. In addition to managing “named” colors, Spot-On allows you to create a list of “substitute” colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors. If Two-Color Print Mapping is enabled, Spot-On also allows you to assign spot colors and process colors to the generic colors that are used in a job. The Two-Color Print Mapping feature is designed for print shop operators to do the proofing for a two-color press. You can print a two-color job to a two-color device by mapping the colors in a job to the colors that are already created on the device. For information about Two-Color Print Mapping, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Using Spot-On Spot-On allows you to adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents. The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as Spot Color Dictionaries. Spot-On allows you to maintain multiple Spot Color Dictionaries for each output profile on the Fiery PRO80. To use Spot-On, you must specify the output profile associated with the Spot Color Dictionary that you want to edit. If you select Output profile X and redefine PANTONE 123 from 30%M to 50%M using Spot-On, you will get 50%M when you print a job with Output profile X. If you print a job with Output profile Y, you will get the original value. SPOT-ON 66 If you select Output profile X and create a custom color named “My Purple” and define it as 80%C 40%M, ColorWise automatically calculates the Lab values using Output profile X and creates new CMYK values for use with Output profile Y. The Spot-On feature is in the Spot Colors tab under the Resources tab in the Device Center. For more information about using Spot-On, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: To use the Spot-On features with named colors, you must enable the Spot Color Matching print option. For more information about this option, see page 25. NOTE: Spot colors identified by names are printed with their defined CMYK values. Edits to an output profile made in Command WorkStation do not affect how spot colors print. Some Spot-On features require that a job be displayed with correct colors on your monitor. To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor display according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, and specify the correct monitor profile for your monitor. SPOT-ON 67 Specify the following settings for the monitor display: • At the monitor: Brightness, Contrast, and Color Temperature • From the control panel of the operating system: Resolution, Refresh rate, and Number of colors For more information about setting up your monitor and the monitor profile, see the documentation that accompanies the monitor. NOTE: The edits to a job made with the color adjustment features in ImageViewer affect all colors in the job, including spot colors. For more information about ImageViewer, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: You cannot use the Substitute Colors and Postflight features at the same time. These print options are constrained from the printer driver. IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 68 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS This chapter describes Simple ASCII File Format (SAIFF), which you can use to import density measurements from measurement devices into Command WorkStation for calibration. To use your own measurement data from an alternate measurement instrument, rather than make measurements directly in Command WorkStation, record your individual readings in a text file, structured as described in this chapter. You can then import the data by clicking From File under Get Measurements in the Calibrate feature of Command WorkStation. Simple ASCII Import File Format This format describes Status T measurement data for import into Command WorkStation. The three possible file formats are: • 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page • 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page • 1D Status T density for other pages (maximum of 256 patches per toner) The file format is ASCII and has no tabs. A single space or multiple spaces are used as delimiters. Blank lines are not allowed. Each line in the file represents four patches (C, M, Y, K) of a specific toner value. Comments may be on any line in the file. Comment lines must start with a pound sign (#) followed by a space. (A line with a pound sign followed by any character other than a space has been reserved.) Comments must be on a line by themselves. Each line of data contains five values. The first number is the sequential patch number (for EFI 21 and EFI 34 pages) or the toner value percentage (for other pages). The four values that follow are the density values of C, M, Y, and K of the corresponding patch. Lines are ordered either by increasing sequential patch numbers, or by increasing the toner percentage. For Windows computers, the file extension must be .cm0 or cm1. For Mac OS computers, the file type must be ‘TEXT’. Measurement data in EFI 21 and EFI 34 are paper-relative. For other pages, if the first line corresponds to zero toner value, Command WorkStation assumes that the measurement data is absolute and adjusts it to become paper-relative by subtracting the density values of the first line from the remaining patches. IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 69 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 21 patch page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last must be 21. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST21 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 20 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 21 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 34 patch page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last must be 34. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST34 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 33 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 34 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 70 Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of a user-defined patch page. The value in the first column is the toner percentage of the patch. The first percentage must be 0 and the last percentage must be 100. The percentages must increase in between. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST # percnt Cyan Magent Yellow Black 0.0000 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 0.3922 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 1.1765 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 98.0000 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 100.0000 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 INDEX 71 A Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent 22 Adobe RGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Apple Standard setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Auto Trapping option 13 B Black Detection option 13 Black Overprint option 14 Black Text and Graphics option 15 C calibration See also ColorCal, measurements checking status of 64 curves 63 from print device panel, Web LCD disabled 51 from print device panel, Web LCD enabled 49 importing density measurements 68 measurement file, creating 63 measurement page 63 measurements 62 overview 62 scheduling 63 target 55, 62, 63 Calibration Files folder 42 calibration set 52 custom 53, 55 print settings 54 recommended paper 54 CMYK Color Reference.ps 42 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link option 17 Color Bars folder 42 Color Chart 64 color files 42 color management system (CMS) 9 color patches in Test Page 64 measuring 63 PostScript files of 42 color profiles See ICC profiles color reference files 42 color reference pages 64 color space 12 ColorCal calibration from print device panel 49 ColorWise color management system ICC profile support 9 key features 9 workflow diagram 12 ColorWise Off 17 ColorWise options, specifying 26 Combine Separations option 18 Command WorkStation Calibrate feature 47 Spot-On feature 66 Composite Overprint option 19 composites, printing 15, 18, 25 Configuration page 64 Contrast ICC rendering intent 22 custom calibration set 53, 55 custom output profile 53, 55 custom profiles, creating 45 custom simulations 17 Custom21.ps 42 Custom34.ps 42 D density 62, 64 density measurements, importing 68 DTP32 or DTP32 Series II densitometer terminology 46 DTP41 spectrophotometer terminology 46 INDEX INDEX 72 E eciRGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 EFIRGB, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 ES-1000 spectrophotometer terminology 46 F Fiery RGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 FieryColorBar.eps 42 Full (Output GCR) setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 Full (Source GCR) setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 G Graphics ICC rendering intent 22 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) options 20 H Halftone Calibration Files folder 43 I ICC profiles described 9 installing 37 rendering intents 22 Image ICC rendering intent 22 M Mac Color Files folder 42 Mac OS color management options 32 measurements page 63 N None setting, RGB Source or Device LInk option 23 O Other Applications folder 44 output profile calibration set 52 custom 53, 55 Spot-On 65 Output Profile option 20 output profiles 63 P PANTONE Book.ps 42 PANTONE Coated Color Reference 25 passwords, for calibration 46 patches page 63 PDF/X 21 PDF/X Output Intent option 21 Perceptual ICC rendering intent 22 Photographic rendering intent 22 Photoshop folder 43 PostScript color issues 12, 14, 15, 23 PowerPoint, RGB color reference file 42 PPD 29, 32 Presentation rendering intent 22 print options Mac OS 32 Windows 29 printer drivers Mac OS 32 Windows 29 profiles custom 45 described 9 installing 37 managing 45 rendering intents 22 Q Quick setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 R Relative Colorimetric rendering intent 22 rendering intents 12 RGB images defining source profiles for 23 PostScript and non-PostScript conversion 23 RGB page 01 42 RGB page 02 42 RGB Source or Device Link option 23 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 22 S SAIFF format 68 Saturation ICC rendering intent 22 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option 24 INDEX 73 separations printing 15, 18, 25 target color space 24 separations, unlimited 18 simulations, custom 17 Spot Color Dictionaries 65 Spot Color Matching option 25 spot colors, CMYK equivalents 25, 65 Spot-On 65 named colors 66 RGB or CMYK values 65 Spot Color Matching 66 substitute colors 65 sRGB, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Standard21.ps 42 Standard34.ps 42 Status T 68 Substitute Colors vs. Postflight 67 Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Configuration and Setup © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093721 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Battery information for the European Union and EEA 9 CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 10 Fiery PRO80 on the network 10 Stages of installation on the network 11 Summary of Fiery PRO80 network installation 12 Network Server Setup requirements 13 Windows networks 13 AppleTalk networks 13 UNIX networks 14 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 15 Levels of access and control 15 Users and Groups 15 Fiery PRO80 print connections 18 WebTools 19 Additional security features 20 Controlling E-mail access to the Fiery PRO80 20 Restricting IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses 20 Secure Printing 20 LDAP authentication 20 CONTENTS 4 Connecting network cable to the Fiery PRO80 21 Back view of the Fiery PRO80 21 Ethernet connection 22 About Setup 22 Setup from the printer touch panel 22 Setup from a network computer 22 SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 23 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version) 24 Illustration of printer touch panel (new version) 24 Accessing Setup options 25 About the printer touch panel Setup interface 26 Types of Setup screens 26 Saving changes 26 Menu tabs 27 Setup options 29 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD 31 Illustration of the Legacy LCD 31 Legacy LCD menus 32 Accessing Legacy LCD Setup options 33 About the Legacy LCD Setup interface 34 Types of Setup screens 34 Saving changes 34 Server Setup options 35 Network Setup 1 options 36 Network Setup 2 options 38 SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 39 Accessing Configure from a network computer 39 Using Configure 40 CONTENTS 5 SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 41 PS and PCL Setup options 41 Productivity Setup options 44 CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS 45 Configuring the Fiery PRO80 and computers for WebTools 45 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 46 Administrator functions 46 Setting passwords 47 Passwords from a network computer 47 Changing the Windows XP system password 48 Updating system and user software 49 Before updating the Fiery PRO80 49 System Updates 50 Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) 56 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 57 Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 57 Remote connection to the Fiery PRO80 58 Restoring Fiery PRO80 settings 58 Saving and restoring the Fiery PRO80 configuration 58 USB printing 59 Managing e-mail address books 60 VDP Search Path 63 Setting common global search paths 63 Allowing users to define a search path for a single job 64 Printing the Configuration page 65 Determining the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 65 CONTENTS 6 Maintaining optimal Fiery PRO80 performance 66 Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 67 Ejecting a CD/DVD from the Fiery PRO80 68 TROUBLESHOOTING 69 Troubleshooting the Fiery PRO80 69 Runtime error messages 69 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with utilities 70 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation 71 INDEX 73 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document describes how to set up network servers and user computers to use the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server so that users can print to it as a high-performance networked printer. For general information about using the printer, your computer, your software, or your network, see the documentation that accompanies those products. Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed instructions on configuring networks is beyond the scope of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Network connectors on the Fiery PRO80 • Information specific to the Fiery PRO80 about setting up network servers NOTE: For information about network servers, see the documentation that accompanies your network. • System security through access levels and passwords • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 to allow users to use WebTools • Administration of the Fiery PRO80 • Troubleshooting Administrator functions described in other documentation are summarized on page 46. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Battery information for the European Union and EEA This symbol indicates that the batteries and accumulators used in this product must be disposed of separately from your household waste in accordance with EU Directive 2006/66/ EC (“Directive”) and local requirements. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown, in accordance with the Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Directive. Batteries and accumulators must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. Users of batteries and accumulators must use the available collection framework for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. If your product contains non-removable batteries, the entire product is already covered by the EU WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Directive and should be handed over to an authorized collection site for WEEE. The collection site will take appropriate measures for the recycling and treatment of the product, including the batteries. Customer participation in the collection and recycling of batteries and accumulators is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to substances used in batteries and accumulators. In the EU, there are separate collection and recycling schemes for batteries and accumulators. To find out more about recycling schemes for batteries and accumulators available in your area, please contact your local city office, waste authority, or waste disposal facility. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 10 CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK This chapter summarizes the stages in setting up the Fiery PRO80. Fiery PRO80 on the network When the Fiery PRO80 is connected to a network, it behaves as a networked printer. The Fiery PRO80 supports the following network protocols (rules that enable computers on a network to communicate with each other): • AppleTalk, Bonjour • TCP/IP, which also includes the BOOTP, DHCP, FTP, HTTP, IMAP, IPP, IPv4, IPv6, LDAP, LPD, NBT, POP3, Port 9100, SMB, SMTP, SNMP, SNTP, and SSL/TLS protocols These protocols can run concurrently on the same cable. Computers that use other protocols can print through a server that uses one of the supported protocols. The Fiery PRO80 is auto-sensing, and handles all connections simultaneously. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 11 Stages of installation on the network Installation can be performed by a network or printing administrator. The stages of a successful installation are: 1 Configuring the network environment Configure network servers to provide users with access to the Fiery PRO80 as a networked printer. For information about configuring network servers in Windows and UNIX network environments as they relate specifically to the Fiery PRO80, see page 13. For information about using your network, see the documentation that accompanies your network. 2 Physically connecting the Fiery PRO80 to a functioning network Prepare a network node for the Fiery PRO80. Obtain cable, route it to the location where the Fiery PRO80 is to be installed, and attach the cable to the network connector of the Fiery PRO80. For details, see page 21. 3 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 Configure the Fiery PRO80 for your printing and network environment (see page 23). 4 Preparing user computers for printing Install the files needed for printing, install user software, and connect the user computers to the network. The software installation is described in Printing. 5 Administering the Fiery PRO80 Monitor and maintain system performance and troubleshoot problems that may arise (see “Administering the Fiery PRO80” on page 46). CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 12 Summary of Fiery PRO80 network installation Fiery PRO80 available on the network Network server configuration Network server Configure network servers to specify Fiery PRO80 print queues and Fiery PRO80 users. Connection Fiery PRO80 Prepare a network node. Connect the Fiery PRO80 to the network. If you use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, connect it to the network. Fiery PRO80 Setup Configure default settings for the options in the Setup menus. Client computer Setup On computers where users print to the Fiery PRO80: • Install the appropriate printer files and connect to one or more print connections. • Install utilities and an Internet browser on computers where users will use them. • Verify the Fiery PRO80 in the list of printers. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 13 Network Server Setup requirements This section provides basic information about configuring the Fiery PRO80 and using it on the network. It does not explain network functions for printing in general. Only information specific to the Fiery PRO80 is presented. Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed instructions on configuring networks is beyond the scope of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network. Configure the network and servers, and ensure that there is a live network connection before you configure network settings in Setup. This allows the Fiery PRO80 to query the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. Whenever you change the configuration of the Fiery PRO80, printer, or network at your site, alter the settings to correspond to the changed environment. Changing network or port settings may require that you make changes to other Setup options, as well. Windows networks • The FieryPRO80 requires a valid IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter these addresses manually or use DHCP or BOOTP protocols to assign them dynamically. Make sure the Fiery PRO80 name and address are listed in a domain name server (DNS) or hosts name database used by your system. If more than one Fiery PRO80 print connection is published (for example, if both the Print queue and Hold queue are published), consider creating a printer for each print connection, so that users can print to each connection directly. • Configure the Fiery PRO80 with the correct Windows domain name. This is especially important for Windows printing, also known as SMB printing. To use Microsoft Active Directory, you must assign the Fiery PRO80 to a domain. If you assign the Fiery PRO80 to a workgroup, you cannot use Active Directory. AppleTalk networks AppleShare servers require no special configuration. To allow Mac OS X computers to access Bonjour printers, you must enable Bonjour in Setup. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 14 UNIX networks • When you configure a UNIX workstation with the lpr protocol and connect to the Fiery PRO80 over a TCP/IP network, you can print directly to the Fiery PRO80. • Setting up UNIX workstations requires an administrator with root privileges. After the initial configuration, UNIX users submit print jobs to a named printer. • The FieryPRO80 is a printer controller that understands lpr protocols. • The FieryPRO80 has a remote printer name you must use in order to communicate with it successfully. Regardless of the UNIX system you use, the name that you use for the remote printer (or rp in the /etc/printcap file) in configuring the network for the Fiery PRO80 must be one of the following: print hold name of virtual printer Computers on a TCP/IP network can print directly to the Fiery PRO80 as a remote printer, or can print to a Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2 server or UNIX workstation acting as a print server. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 15 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP To prepare for printing at your site, you must do some initial Fiery PRO80 configuration (or “Setup”) to specify the network environment and the types of printing you do. Before you perform Setup, decide the levels of access to implement, such as passwords and other security features that the Fiery PRO80 offers. Because many of these security features are interconnected, review the information in this chapter to plan for an effective security system, and then perform Setup accordingly. Levels of access and control When you configure the Fiery PRO80 during Setup, you implement a particular level of control by configuring these elements: • Users and Groups • Print connections • Access to WebTools Users and Groups With Configure, you create users, assign passwords to users, create groups with particular privileges, and assign users to the groups. Several groups are provided by default, and you can create new groups. All users in a group have the same privileges. In addition to assigning the users that you have created to a group, you can add users from your organization’s global address list if you have LDAP services enabled on the Fiery PRO80. The following discussion is an overview designed to help you prepare a security strategy. For more information, including specific procedures, see Configure Help. You can view detailed information about users and groups that you have created from Configure in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 16 User authentication The term “user authentication” means the Fiery PRO80 verifies that the user who is sending a job belongs to a group, and the group has printing privileges (“Print in B&W” or “Print in Color and B&W”). By default, the Fiery PRO80 does not enforce user authentication. That is, even if you assign passwords to users and assign users to groups, no authentication occurs unless you clear the “Allow users to print without authentication” option (in Configure > Users and Groups). If this option is selected, anyone can print to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: You cannot enable Fiery PRO80 authentication and printer authentication at the same time. If you require users to specify their user name and password (that is, you have cleared the “Allow users to print without authentication” option), users must type this information in the printer driver when they print. Users must specify their user name and password if they create files from the printer driver for printing later (such as an e-mail attachment that will be sent to the Fiery PRO80). Because jobs that are sent through FTP do not require a printer driver, you can specify that FTP jobs are authenticated (see Configure > Network > Services > FTP > Require Password for Printing). Passwords When you create a new user in Configure > Users and Groups, you assign a password to the user. In other areas of the system, you can also set passwords for these areas: • Default admin user in Administrators group • Default operator user in Operators group • Windows system password NOTE: The Administrator and Operator passwords are separate from the Windows system password. By default, the Administrator password is set on the Fiery PRO80. Change the Administrator password periodically to protect the Fiery PRO80 from accidental or malicious changes to Setup. For more information, see “Setting passwords” on page 47. Users in the Administrators and Operators groups have privileges in addition to the explicit ones that you set when you create groups. Examples of these privileges are provided in the following sections. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 17 Administrator privileges Users in the Administrators group have the highest level of control. Administrator privileges include: • Configuring the Fiery PRO80 from Configure or the printer touch panel • Adding and deleting groups • Adding and deleting users • Setting and changing passwords for users • Deleting, printing, exporting, and viewing the Job Log • Deleting, viewing, and modifying users’ print jobs • Clearing the Fiery PRO80 of all job data • Printing in black-and-white or color • Publishing print connections • Deleting fonts • Controlling print jobs from the job management tools • Overriding job settings • Setting default settings for print options • Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 Operator privileges Users in the Operators group control print jobs from the job management tools, including the following: • Viewing the Job Log • Deleting, viewing, and modifying other users’ print jobs • Printing in black-and-white or color Guest privileges (no password) A user does not need a password to log on as a Guest from the job management tools. A Guest can view the status of active jobs but cannot make changes to jobs or to the Fiery PRO80 state. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 18 Fiery PRO80 print connections The Fiery PRO80 supports three print connections: Hold queue, Print queue, and Direct connection. You enable, or “publish,” these print connections to users on the network when you configure Printer Setup. All published connections are constantly checked for the presence of jobs. The Print queue and Direct connection give users more direct access to the Fiery PRO80 than the Hold queue. Therefore, do not publish the Print queue and the Direct connection in environments where maximum control is required. In addition, you can enable the Printed queue, which is a storage area for the most recent jobs from the Print queue. The Printed queue allows users to reprint those jobs by using the job management tools (for example, Command WorkStation). NOTE: To use the utilities and WebTools, you must enable at least one print connection. Hold queue Jobs sent to the Hold queue are spooled to the Fiery PRO80 hard disk drive for printing at a later time, or for reprinting. Because the Hold queue is a storage area, jobs sent to it cannot proceed through the printing process until the operator intervenes using the job management tools. Print queue The Print queue is the standard Fiery PRO80 queue. Jobs sent to the Print queue are processed and printed in the order in which they are received. Jobs prioritized by an operator with the job management tools and jobs sent via the Direct connection take priority over jobs sent to the Print queue. Direct connection The Direct connection transmits jobs directly to the Fiery PRO80, but only when the Fiery PRO80 is idle. If the Fiery PRO80 is busy, the job remains at the user’s computer until the Fiery PRO80 is ready. The job is then processed as soon as the previous job is finished and before the next queued job is processed. In most cases, jobs sent to the Direct connection are not stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, and cannot be selected for reprinting, moving, or deletion. Therefore, the Direct connection provides a measure of security for sensitive files. Jobs sent to the Direct connection do appear in the Job Log, for accounting purposes. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 19 Some types of jobs printed to the Direct connection cause temporary files to be stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, but do not appear in any of the job management tools. These job types are the following: • PDF jobs • TIFF jobs • Jobs with settings for any of the following print options: – Reverse order printing (for large jobs) – Booklet Maker – Mixed Media – Combine Separations NOTE: To download fonts to the Fiery PRO80, you must publish the Direct connection. WebTools The Fiery PRO80 supports Internet or intranet access with WebTools from Windows and Mac OS computers. To enable use of WebTools, see “Configuring WebTools” on page 45. Home Home provides you with current information about the jobs processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information, see Utilities. Downloads Downloads allows users to download installers for printer drivers and other software directly from the Fiery PRO80. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information, see Printing and Utilities. Docs Docs allows users to access, manage, and modify jobs in their mailboxes on the Fiery PRO80, and submit jobs to the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see WebTools Docs Help. Configure Configure allows you to view and modify Fiery PRO80 options from a network computer. This function requires an Administrator password. For more information, see page 39. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 20 Additional security features In addition to the traditional security features such as passwords, you can use these features to keep the Fiery PRO80 secure: • E-mail access • IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses • Secure Printing • LDAP authentication Controlling E-mail access to the Fiery PRO80 Because you can allow users to print file attachments in e-mail messages sent to the Fiery PRO80, the Fiery PRO80 accepts only valid attachments (for example, PostScript or PDF files). Typically, viruses transmitted via e-mail require execution by the receiver. Attachments that are not valid files are discarded by the Fiery PRO80. Because file types such as .BAT, .VBS, and .EXE could launch harmful virus activity, the Fiery PRO80 does not process these file types. The Fiery PRO80 also ignores e-mails in RTF (Rich Text Format) or HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) format, and any included JavaScript code. You can define lists of authorized e-mail addresses on the Fiery PRO80. Any e-mail that the Fiery PRO80 receives from an e-mail address not in the authorized list is deleted. For more information, see page 60. Restricting IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses To restrict unauthorized connections to the Fiery PRO80, you can permit only users whose IP addresses or MAC addresses are within a defined range. You can also close unnecessary ports to reject inbound access from the network. Commands or jobs sent from unauthorized IP addresses or ports are ignored by the Fiery PRO80. Secure Printing This option allows the printing of highly sensitive or confidential files. A user printing a file with the printer driver assigns a password to the job. The user must then enter the password at the printer to print the job. For more information, see Printing. LDAP authentication When you enable LDAP communication to retrieve names and other information for people at your organization, you can specify the type of authentication. For more information, see Configure Help. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 21 Connecting network cable to the Fiery PRO80 This section includes an illustration of the Fiery PRO80 back panel, and provides information about connecting the Fiery PRO80 to the network. Back view of the Fiery PRO80 1 USB ports (x2) 2 Network port (RJ-45) 3 USB ports (x4) 4 Printer interface 1 2 3 4 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 22 Ethernet connection For Ethernet connections, the Fiery PRO80 supports Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cabling for these network speeds: • 10BaseT: Category 3 or higher • 100BaseTX: Category 5 or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length) • 1000BaseT: Category 5e or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length) TO CONNECT TO THE NETWORK 1 Power off the printer and the Fiery PRO80. For information about the proper procedures, see page 67. 2 Connect the cable from the network to the appropriate network connector (RJ-45) on the back of the Fiery PRO80. 3 Power on the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. About Setup Setup configures the Fiery PRO80 to communicate with other devices and manage print jobs. Perform Setup the first time you turn on the Fiery PRO80, after new system software is loaded, or any time Server software is reinstalled. When the network or user printing environment changes, change the options accordingly. Setup from the printer touch panel Perform initial Setup from the printer touch panel. After the initial Setup, you can change Setup options from a network computer (page 39). If you do not set options in the Setup menus, the Fiery PRO80 uses default settings. You must choose settings appropriate for the printing environment at your site. Setup from a network computer To set up the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer, use Configure (page 39). Access Configure from WebTools or Command WorkStation. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 23 SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL Setup is required the first time the Fiery PRO80 is turned on after new system software is loaded. If you do not configure a particular Setup option, the Fiery PRO80 uses default settings. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the printing environment at your site. The Fiery PRO80 is equipped with two different types of printer touch panel Setup interfaces: • The new version of Setup: The new version of Setup provides a condensed list of Setup options to allow for quick configuration of the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see “Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version)” on page 24. • The Legacy LCD: This is a previous version of Setup that provides three groups of Setup options: Server Setup, Network Setup 1, Network Setup 2. For information on Legacy LCD Setup, see “Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD” on page 31. When the Enhanced Security Mode is set on the printer, use the Legacy LCD. Additional Setup is also available from Configure. For more information about Configure Setup, see Configure Help. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 24 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version) Setup allows you to configure the Fiery PRO80 to communicate with other devices and manage print jobs sent to it. Illustration of printer touch panel (new version) The printer touch panel allows you to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The printer touch panel includes the following parts: 1 2 Item Description Controller button Controls functions on the Fiery PRO80 Selection buttons Select an option or menu and proceed to the next option or menu SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 25 Accessing Setup options When you access Setup options, make sure that no one is printing to the Fiery PRO80. TO ACCESS SETUP WHEN THE FIERY PRO80 IS IDLE 1 Make sure that the information screen on the printer touch panel reads Idle. If Printing or RIPping appears, the Fiery PRO80 is processing, and you must wait until the system finishes and reaches the Idle state. 2 Press Controller on the printer touch panel. 3 Press the Setup button. 4 Press the Administrator Password field, enter your password, and then press OK. 5 Press Login. 6 Perform Setup. This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup menus, from a network computer. NOTE: This Setup screen does not display when Enable Web Services is disabled, the DHCP server is down, or the network does not have a DHCP server. When this occurs, the printer touch panel displays “The server appears to be offline” and you cannot access the above Setup screen. If this happens, press Enable Legacy LCD. This displays a previous version of Setup named Legacy LCD. From the Legacy LCD Setup screen, specify the IP address manually and make sure that Web Services is enabled. The new Setup screen is available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. 7 Change the Administrator password to protect your Setup from unauthorized changes. For more information, see page 47. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 26 About the printer touch panel Setup interface When you perform Setup from the printer touch panel, you select one menu after another and enter information about your Fiery PRO80 and your network and printing environment. When you perform a function from the printer touch panel that prompts you for the Administrator password, you must enter it promptly. Otherwise, the printer touch panel returns to Idle, and you must start over. Types of Setup screens There are different types of Setup options: Saving changes After you enter the settings, you must save the changes. You are usually prompted to do so. If you choose Yes, your settings overwrite previous settings. If you choose No, your previous settings are retained. If necessary, the Fiery PRO80 restarts after you exit the Setup menu. Multiple choice questions Possible choices appear as buttons on the touch panel (for example, Yes or No, or a list of settings from which to choose). The currently selected value is highlighted. Press the button for the desired option on the touch panel. Information entry options You must specify the information for your site (the printer name or IP address, for example). Use the keyboard provided on the printer touch panel to enter information. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 27 Menu tabs In addition to performing Setup, you can use the printer touch panel to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The menu provides many of the same options available from Command WorkStation. For information about the job management features, see Utilities. Jobs tab The Jobs tab displays properties of currently printing and queued jobs, and allows you to print jobs. From Jobs you can also access the following commands: Suspend Printing Suspend communication between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. Use this command if you want to interrupt the current job so that you can perform maintenance tasks. Jobs continue to process on the Fiery PRO80. After you complete the maintenance tasks, choose Resume Printing to continue printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80. Resume Printing Resume communication between the printer and the Fiery PRO80 after you have selected Suspend Printing. Secure Print Allows you to print a job with a secure password. USB Media Server Print a file from a USB device to one of the published print connections. For more information about printing, see Printing. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 28 Tools tab The Tools tab displays options that are installed on the Fiery PRO80. You can also print system pages and activity logs. Setup tab The Setup tab allows you to configure the Fiery PRO80 so that it can be operational on your network. Use Setup from the printer touch panel to perform minimum network Setup to put the Fiery PRO80 on the network. Use Configure to specify any remaining Setup options. Configure can be accessed from WebTools or from Command WorkStation. PS/PCL Test Page: Allows you to confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is properly connected to the printer, and provides color and grayscale samples to troubleshoot problems with the printer or the Fiery PRO80. Settings on the Test Page may include: Server Name, color settings, printer model, and date and time the Test Page was printed. Configuration: Prints the Configuration page, which gives the current server and device configuration. This page lists general information about the hardware and software configuration of the Fiery PRO80, the current options for all Setup settings, information about the current calibration, and the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. Color Charts: Prints samples of the RGB, CMY, and PANTONE colors available from the Fiery PRO80. PS/PCL Font List: Prints a list of all fonts currently on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk drive. Job Log: Prints a log of the last 55 jobs. E-mail Log: Prints a log listing recent e-mail activity. This E-mail log is useful to the network administrator. NOTE: To print the E-mail log, you must first enable the appropriate service. See Configure Help. FTP Log: Prints a log listing recent FTP activity. Calibrate: Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal. For more information, see Color Printing. If an Administrator password has been set, you must enter it to access Calibration. Align Trays: Adjust the placement of text and images on a page so that they are correctly aligned on the sheet of paper and both sides of a duplex sheet have the exact same alignment. For more information about this function, see Command WorkStation Help. Restart Fiery: Resets the server software but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are aborted and might be lost. Clear Server: Allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the Fiery PRO80 Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Clear Server also clears all jobs archived on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and all FreeForm masters. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 29 Setup options When you perform Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel, you configure the Fiery PRO80